Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with yourvehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty. The equipmentormodel designation of your vehicle may differ according to: Rmodel Rorder Rcountry variant Ravailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features Therefore, descriptions may vary from those of your own vehicle. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependentsupplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times.Ifyou sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. ADaimler Company
1665848681 É1665848681QËÍ
Contents 3
Index ...... 4 At aglance ...... 31
Introduction ...... 23 Safety ...... 41
Opening and closing ...... 77
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 101
Lights and windshield wipers ...... 119
Climate control ...... 137
Driving and parking ...... 155
On-board computer and displays .... 261
Stowage and features ...... 331
Maintenance and care ...... 363
Breakdown assistance ...... 379
Wheels and tires ...... 397
Technical data ...... 441 4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Damping System see ADS (Adaptive Damping System) 115 Vsocket ...... 348 Adaptive Highbeam Assist 12 Vsocket Display message ...... 298 see Sockets Function/notes ...... 125 360° camera Switching on/off (on-board Function/notes ...... 225 computer) ...... 275 4ETS Additives (engine oil) ...... 450 see ETS/4ETS (Electronic ADS (Adaptive Damping System) Traction System) Function/notes ...... 209 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Airbags drive) ...... 246 Display message ...... 294 Front air bag (driver, front A passenger)...... 46 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes ...... 44 Display message ...... 283 Knee bag ...... 47 Function/notes ...... 66 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Important safety notes ...... 66 indicator lamp ...... 48 Warning lamp ...... 319 Safety guidelines ...... 43 Activating/deactivating cooling Side impact airbag ...... 47 with air dehumidification ...... 145 Windowcurtain air bag ...... 48 Active BlindSpot Assist Air-conditioning system Activating/deactivating (on- see Climate control board computer) ...... 273 Airfilter (display message) ...... 301 Display message ...... 306 AIRFLOW ...... 146 Function/information...... 237 AIRMATIC package Trailer towing ...... 240 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 209 Active Curve System Function/notes ...... 209 Display message ...... 303 Level control ...... 210 Function/notes ...... 209 Airvents Active Driving Assistance package .237 Glove box ...... 152 Active Lane Keeping Assist Important safetynotes ...... 151 Activating/deactivating (on- Rear...... 152 board computer) ...... 273 Setting ...... 151 Display message ...... 306 Setting the center air vents ...... 151 Function/information...... 241 Setting the side air vents ...... 152 Trailer towing ...... 243 see Climate control Active light function ...... 125 Alarm system Active Parking Assist see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Display message ...... 307 Ambient lighting Function/notes ...... 218 Setting the brightness (on-board Important safety notes ...... 217 computer) ...... 275 Towing atrailer ...... 221 Setting the color (on-board ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 73 computer) ...... 275 Adaptive Brake Assist AMG adaptive sport suspension Display message ...... 290 system ...... 212 Function/notes ...... 69 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 278 Index 5
Anti-lock braking system Driving tips ...... 168 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Emergency running mode ...... 173 Anti-theft alarm system Engaging drive position ...... 167 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Engaging neutral...... 166 Approach/departure angle ...... 190 Engaging parkposition Ashtray ...... 346 automatically ...... 166 Assistance menu (on-board Engaging reversegear ...... 166 computer) ...... 272 Engaging the parkposition ...... 165 ASSYST PLUS Kickdown...... 168 Displaying a service message ...... 369 Manual drive program ...... 171 Hiding a service message ...... 369 Overview ...... 165 Notes ...... 368 Problem (malfunction) ...... 173 Resetting the service interval Programselector button ...... 169 display...... 369 Pulling away ...... 160 Service message ...... 368 Shift ranges...... 170 Special service requirements ...... 369 Starting the engine ...... 159 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 169 Activating/deactivating ...... 75 Trailer towing ...... 168 Function ...... 75 Transmission position display...... 165 Switching off the alarm ...... 75 Transmissionpositions ...... 167 ATTENTIONASSIST Automatic transmission Activating/deactivating ...... 273 emergency mode ...... 173 Display message ...... 302 Axle load, permissible (trailer Function/notes ...... 230 towing) ...... 455 Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 269 Audio system B see separate operating instructions Bag hook ...... 337 Authorized Centers Ball coupling see Qualified specialist workshop Installing ...... 255 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Removing ...... 259 see Qualified specialist workshop Storing ...... 260 Authorized workshops BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 67 see Qualified specialist workshop BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System AUTO lights PLUS) ...... 67 Display message ...... 298 Battery (SmartKey) see Lights Checking ...... 81 Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Important safety notes ...... 81 stop function) ...... 162 Replacing ...... 81 Automatic engine switch-off (ECO Battery (vehicle) start/stop function) ...... 162 Charging ...... 387 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 120 Display message ...... 300 Automatic transmission Important safety notes ...... 385 Automatic drive program ...... 169 Jump starting ...... 389 Changing gear...... 168 Overview ...... 385 DIRECT SELECT lever...... 165 BlindSpot Assist Display message ...... 312 Activating/deactivating ...... 273 Drive program display...... 165 Display message ...... 306 6 Index
Notes/function ...... 233 Gearorselectorlever ...... 376 Trailer towing ...... 235 Interior ...... 374 see Active Blind Spot Assist Matte finish ...... 372 BlueTEC NightView Assist Plus ...... 375 Adding DEF ...... 177 Notes ...... 369 BlueTEC (DEF) ...... 448 Paint ...... 371 Brake Assist Plastic trim ...... 375 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Power washer ...... 371 Brake fluid Rearview camera ...... 373 Display message ...... 289 Roof lining ...... 377 Notes ...... 450 Seat belt...... 377 Brake lamps Seat cover ...... 376 Changing bulbs ...... 132 Sensors ...... 373 Display message ...... 296 Steering wheel ...... 376 Brakes Trim pieces ...... 376 ABS ...... 66 Washing by hand ...... 371 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 69 Wheels ...... 372 BAS ...... 67 Windows ...... 372 BAS PLUS ...... 67 Wiper blades ...... 373 Brake fluid (notes) ...... 450 Wooden trim ...... 376 Display message ...... 283 Cargo compartment cover Driving tips ...... 183 Notes/howtouse ...... 338 High-performance brake system .... 184 Cargo compartment enlargement Important safety notes ...... 183 Important safety notes ...... 335 Maintenance ...... 184 Cargo compartment floor Parking brake ...... 180 Opening/closing ...... 342 Warning lamp ...... 318 Stowagewell (under) ...... 342 Breakdown Cargo net see Flat tire Attaching ...... 340 see Towing away Important safety information ...... 340 Bulbs Cargo tie down rings ...... 337 see Changing bulbs Car keys see SmartKey C Car wash (care) ...... 370 CD player/CD changer (on-board California computer) ...... 270 Important notice for retail Center console customers and lessees ...... 24 Lowersection ...... 37 Calling up a malfunction Uppersection ...... 36 see Display messages Central locking Car Automatic locking (on-board see Vehicle computer) ...... 276 Care Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 79 Carpets ...... 377 Changing bulbs Car wash ...... 370 Brake lamps ...... 132 Display ...... 374 High-beam headlamps ...... 130 Exhaustpipe ...... 374 Important safety notes ...... 128 Exterior lights ...... 373 Low-beam headlamps ...... 130 Index 7
Overview of bulb types ...... 129 Setting the temperature ...... 146 Parking lamps ...... 131 Switching air-recirculation mode Removing/replacing the cover on/off ...... 150 (front wheel arch) ...... 129 Switching on/off ...... 144 Side marker lamps ...... 131 Switching residual heaton/off ...... 150 Standing lamps (front) ...... 131 Switching the rear window Child-proof locks defroster on/off ...... 149 Important safety notes ...... 64 Switching the ZONE function on/ Reardoors ...... 65 off ...... 148 Children Coat hooks ...... 340 In the vehicle ...... 60 Cockpit Restraint systems ...... 60 Overview ...... 32 Specialseat belt retractor ...... 62 see Instrument cluster Child seat COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST ...... 68 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat COMAND anchors ...... 63 ON&OFFROAD menu ...... 252 Top Tether ...... 63 see separate operating instructions Cigarette lighter ...... 346 COMAND display Cleaning Cleaning ...... 374 Mirrorturn signal ...... 373 Combination switch ...... 123 Trailer tow hitch ...... 374 Combinedcargo cover and net ...... 339 Climate control Compass Automatic climate control (3- Calling up ...... 362 zone) ...... 142 Consumption statistics (on-board Controlling automatically ...... 145 computer) ...... 267 Cooling with airdehumidification .. 145 Convenience closing feature ...... 93 Defrosting the windows ...... 149 Convenience opening feature ...... 93 Defrosting the windshield ...... 148 Coolant(engine) Dual-zone automatic climate Checkingthe level ...... 367 control ...... 139 Display message ...... 299 Important safety notes ...... 138 Filling capacity ...... 451 Indicator lamp ...... 145 Important safety notes ...... 451 Information on using 3-zone Temperature (on-board computer) .278 automatic climate control ...... 144 Temperature gauge ...... 263 Maximum cooling ...... 148 Warning lamp ...... 326 Notes on using automatic climate Cooling control ...... 141 see Climate control Overview of systems ...... 138 Cornering light function Problems with cooling with air Display message ...... 295 dehumidification ...... 145 Function/notes ...... 125 Problem with the rear window Crash-responsive emergency defroster ...... 150 lighting ...... 128 Rearcontrol panel ...... 142 Cruise control Setting the airdistribution ...... 147 Activating ...... 193 Setting the airflow ...... 147 Activationconditions...... 192 Setting the airvents...... 151 Cruise control lever...... 192 Setting the climate mode (AIR Deactivating ...... 194 FLOW) ...... 146 8 Index
Display message ...... 309 Display messages Driving system ...... 192 ASSYSTPLUS ...... 368 Function/notes ...... 192 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 282 Important safety notes ...... 192 Driving systems ...... 302 Storing and maintaining current Engine ...... 299 speed...... 193 General notes ...... 282 Cup holder Hiding (on-board computer) ...... 282 Center console ...... 344 KEYLESS-GO ...... 315 Important safety notes ...... 343 Lights ...... 295 Rearcompartment...... 344 Safety systems ...... 283 Temperature controlled...... 344 SmartKey ...... 314 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 28 Tires ...... 310 Customer Relations Department ...... 28 Vehicle ...... 312 Distance display (on-board D computer) ...... 272 Distance recorder Dashboard see Trip odometer see Instrument cluster Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 328 Dashboard lighting Distance warning function see Instrument cluster lighting Activating/deactivating ...... 272 Data Function/notes ...... 68 see Technical data Warning lamp ...... 328 Daytime running lamps DISTRONIC PLUS Display message ...... 297 Activating ...... 196 Function/notes ...... 120 Activationconditions...... 196 Switching on/off (on-board Cruise control lever...... 196 computer) ...... 274 Deactivating ...... 201 Dealerships Display message ...... 308 see Qualified specialist workshop Displays in the multifunction Declarations of conformity ...... 27 display...... 202 DEF Driving tips ...... 202 Adding ...... 177 Function/notes ...... 194 Display message ...... 302 Important safety notes ...... 194 Filling capacity ...... 449 Setting the specified minimum Important safety notes ...... 448 distance ...... 200 Delayedswitch-off Warning lamp ...... 328 Exteriorlighting (on-board Doors computer)...... 275 Automatic locking (on-board Interior lighting ...... 276 computer) ...... 276 Diagnostics connection ...... 27 Automatic locking (switch) ...... 86 Diesel ...... 447 Central locking/unlocking Differential locks (display (SmartKey) ...... 79 message) ...... 304 Control panel ...... 40 Digital speedometer ...... 267 Display message ...... 313 DIRECTSELECT lever Emergency locking ...... 87 see Automatic transmission Emergency unlocking ...... 86 Important safety notes ...... 84 Opening (from inside) ...... 85 Index 9
Overview ...... 84 Driving systems Power closing feature ...... 86 360°camera ...... 225 Downhill SpeedRegulation Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 237 see DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) Active Curve System ...... 209 Drinking and driving ...... 182 Active Driving Assistance Drinks holder package ...... 237 see Cupholder Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 241 Drive program Active Parking Assist ...... 217 Automatic ...... 169 ADS ...... 209 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 165 AIRMATIC package ...... 209 Manual ...... 171 AMG adaptive sport suspension Off-road program (vehicles system ...... 212 without the ON&OFFROAD ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 230 package) ...... 248 Blind Spot Assist ...... 233 Off-road program (vehicles with Cruise control ...... 192 the ON&OFFROAD package) ...... 248 Display message ...... 302 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 279 DISTRONICPLUS ...... 194 see On-road programs HOLD function ...... 207 Driver's door Lane Keeping Assist ...... 235 see Doors Level control (vehicles with Driving abroad AIRMATIC package) ...... 210 Mercedes-Benz Service ...... 369 Level control (vehicles with the Symmetrical low beam...... 120 ON&OFFROAD package) ...... 204 Driving in mountainous terrain On-road programs ...... 243 Approach/departure angle...... 190 PARKTRONIC...... 213 Driving lamps Rearview camera ...... 221 see Daytime running lamps Driving tips Driving off-road Automatic transmission ...... 168 see Off-road driving Brakes ...... 183 Driving safety systems Break-in period ...... 156 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 66 DISTRONICPLUS ...... 202 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 73 Downhill gradient ...... 183 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 69 Drinking and driving ...... 182 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 67 Driving abroad ...... 120 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Driving in winter ...... 186 PLUS) ...... 67 Driving on flooded roads...... 185 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 68 Driving on sand ...... 189 Distance warning function ...... 68 Driving on wet roads...... 185 Electronic brake force distribution ... 73 Driving over obstacles ...... 189 ESP® (Electronic Stability Exhaustcheck ...... 182 Program) ...... 70 Fuel ...... 182 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction General ...... 182 System) ...... 70 Hydroplaning ...... 185 Important safety information ...... 66 Icy road surfaces ...... 186 Overview ...... 65 Limited braking efficiency on PRE-SAFE® Brake ...... 73 salted roads...... 184 STEER CONTROL ...... 75 Off-road driving ...... 187 Off-road fording ...... 185 10 Index
Snow chains ...... 401 Emergency unlocking Symmetrical low beam...... 120 Tailgate ...... 91 Tire ruts ...... 189 Emissions control Towing atrailer ...... 253 Service and warranty information .... 24 Traveling uphill ...... 190 Engine Wet road surface ...... 183 Check Engine warning lamp ...... 325 DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) Display message ...... 299 Display message ...... 305 ECO start/stop function ...... 161 Function/notes ...... 246 Engine number ...... 444 DVD audio Irregularrunning ...... 164 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 270 Jump-starting ...... 389 DVD video Starting problems ...... 164 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 270 Starting the engine with the SmartKey ...... 159 E Starting with KEYLESS-GO ...... 160 Switching off ...... 180 EASY-ENTRY feature Tow-starting (vehicle) ...... 394 Activating/deactivating ...... 277 Engine electronics Function/notes ...... 112 Problem (malfunction) ...... 164 EASY-EXIT feature Engine oil Crash-responsive ...... 113 Adding ...... 366 Function/notes ...... 112 Additives ...... 450 Switching on/off ...... 277 Checking the oil level ...... 365 EASY-PACK load-securing kit ...... 340 Checking the oil level using the EBD (electronic brake force dipstick ...... 366 distribution) Display message ...... 300 Display message ...... 285 Filling capacity ...... 450 Function/notes ...... 73 Notes about oil grades ...... 449 ECO start/stop function Notes on oil level/consumption .... 365 Automatic engine start ...... 162 Temperature (on-board computer) .278 Automatic engine switch-off ...... 162 Viscosity ...... 450 Deactivating/activating ...... 163 ESP® (Electronic Stability General information ...... 161 Program) Important safety notes ...... 161 AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 279 Electronic Stability Program ® Deactivating/activating ...... 71 see ESP (ElectronicStability Program) Display message ...... 283 Emergencyrelease ETS/4ETS ...... 70 Driver's door ...... 86 Function/notes ...... 70 Vehicle ...... 86 Important safety information ...... 71 Emergency spare wheel Trailer stabilization ...... 72 Important safety notes ...... 436 Warning lamp ...... 321 Points to remember ...... 437 ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Removing ...... 437 System) ...... 70 Storage location ...... 437 Exhaustcheck ...... 182 Technical data ...... 439 Exhaustpipe (cleaning Emergency Tensioning Devices instructions) ...... 374 Function ...... 59 Safety guidelines...... 43 Index 11
Exterior lighting Fuel filler flap see Lights Opening/closing ...... 174 Exterior mirrors Fuel filter(display message) ...... 301 Adjusting ...... 113 Fuel level Dipping (automatic) ...... 114 Calling up the range (on-board Folding in/out(automatically) ...... 114 computer) ...... 267 Folding in/out(electrically) ...... 114 Fuel tank Folding in whenlocking (on-board Capacity ...... 445 computer) ...... 277 Problem (malfunction) ...... 176 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 114 see Fuel tank Setting ...... 114 Fuses Storing settings (memory Allocation chart ...... 395 function) ...... 116 Before changing ...... 395 Storing the parking position ...... 115 Dashboard fuse box ...... 395 Eyeglasses compartment ...... 334 Fuse box in the engine compartment ...... 395 F Fuse box underrear bench seat .... 395 Important safety notes ...... 394 Fillercap see Fuses see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ...... 380 G Flat tire MOExtended tires ...... 382 Garage door opener Preparing the vehicle ...... 381 Clearing the memory ...... 361 TIREFIT kit ...... 383 Important safety notes ...... 359 Floormat ...... 362 Opening/closing the garage door .. 361 Folding the rear bench seat Programming (button in the rear- forwards/back ...... 335 view mirror) ...... 359 Fording Gear indicator (on-board Off-road ...... 185 computer) ...... 278 On flooded roads...... 185 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...... 442 Fuel Glove box ...... 333 Additives ...... 446 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Consumption statistics ...... 267 (definition) ...... 419 Displaying the current consumption ...... 267 H Displaying the range ...... 267 Handbrake Driving tips ...... 182 see Parking brake Flexible fuel vehicles ...... 448 Hazard warning lamps ...... 124 Fuel gauge ...... 33, 263 Grade (gasoline) ...... 445 Headlamps Important safety notes ...... 445 Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 368 Premium-grade unleaded gasoline .445 Cleaning system (capacity)...... 452 Problem (malfunction) ...... 176 Cleaning system (function) ...... 125 Quality (diesel)...... 447 Cleaning system (notes) ...... 452 Refueling ...... 173 Fogging up ...... 127 Tank content/reserve fuel ...... 445 see Automatic headlamp mode 12 Index
Head restraints Setting the brightness of the Adjusting ...... 104 ambient lighting (on-board Adjusting (electrically)...... 105 computer) ...... 275 Adjusting (manually)...... 105 Setting the color of the ambient Adjusting (rear) ...... 106 lighting (on-board computer) ...... 275 Installing/removing (rear) ...... 106 Luxury ...... 105 J Heating Jack see Climate control Storage location ...... 380 High-beam headlamps Using ...... 423 Changing bulbs ...... 130 Jump-start (engine) Display message ...... 296 see Jump starting (engine) Switching Adaptive Highbeam Jump starting (engine) ...... 389 Assist on/off ...... 126 Switching on/off ...... 124 Hill start assist ...... 161 K HOLD function KEYLESS-GO Deactivating ...... 208 Convenience closing feature ...... 94 Display message ...... 305 Display message ...... 315 Function/notes ...... 207 Locking ...... 79 Hood Start/Stop button ...... 158 Closing ...... 365 Starting the engine ...... 160 Display message ...... 313 Unlocking ...... 79 Important safety notes ...... 364 Keypositions Opening ...... 364 KEYLESS-GO ...... 158 Hydroplaning ...... 185 SmartKey ...... 157 Kickdown I Driving tips ...... 168 Manual drive program ...... 172 Ignition lock Knee bag ...... 47 see Key positions Immobilizer ...... 75 Indicator lamps L see Warning and indicator lamps Lamps Insectprotection on the radiator .... 365 see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Lane detection (automatic) Overview ...... 33, 263 see Lane Keeping Assist Warning and indicator Lane Keeping Assist lamps ...... 34, 316 Activating/deactivating ...... 273 Instrument cluster lighting ...... 263 Display message ...... 306 Interior lighting ...... 127 Function/information...... 235 Automatic control ...... 127 see Active Lane Keeping Assist Delayed switch-off (on-board Lap time (RACETIMER) ...... 279 computer) ...... 276 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Emergency lighting ...... 128 anchors ...... 63 Manual control ...... 128 Level control (display message) ...... 303 Overview ...... 127 Reading lamp ...... 127 Index 13
Level control (vehicles with Light sensor (display message) ...... 298 AIRMATIC package) Loading guidelines ...... 332 Basic settings ...... 211 Locking Function/notes ...... 210 see Centrallocking Important safety notes ...... 210 Locking (doors) Level control (vehicles with the Automatic ...... 86 ON&OFFROAD package) Emergency locking ...... 87 Basicsettings ...... 205 From inside (central locking Function/notes ...... 204 button) ...... 85 Important safety notes ...... 204 Locking centrally License plate lamp (display see Centrallocking message) ...... 297 Locking verification signal (on- Light function,active board computer) ...... 276 Display message ...... 298 Low-beam headlamps Lights Changing bulbs ...... 130 Activating/deactivating the Display message ...... 295 interiorlighting delayed switch-off .276 Setting for driving abroad Active light function ...... 125 (symmetrical) ...... 120 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 120 Switching on/off ...... 121 Cornering light function ...... 125 LOW RANGE Driving abroad ...... 120 Display message ...... 304 Hazard warning lamps ...... 124 Off-road gear...... 250 High beam flasher ...... 124 LOW RANGE off-road gear ...... 250 High-beam headlamps ...... 124 Luggage holder(EASY-PACK load- Lightswitch...... 120 securing kit) ...... 341 Low-beam headlamps ...... 121 Lumbar support Parking lamps ...... 122 Adjusting (on the seat) ...... 107 Rearfog lamp ...... 122 Luxury head restraints ...... 105 Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting (on-board M computer) ...... 275 Setting the color of the ambient M+S tires ...... 400 lighting (on-board computer) ...... 275 Maintenance Standing lamps ...... 123 see ASSYST PLUS Switching Adaptive Highbeam Malfunction message Assist on/off ...... 275 see Display messages Switching the daytime running Matte finish (cleaning lamps on/off (on-board instructions) ...... 372 computer) ...... 274 mbrace Switching the exteriorlighting Call priority ...... 354 delayed switch-off on/off (on- Display message ...... 289 board computer)...... 275 Downloading destinations Switching the surround lighting (COMAND) ...... 354 on/off (on-board computer) ...... 275 Downloading routes...... 358 Turn signals ...... 123 Emergency call ...... 351 see Changing bulbs Geo fencing ...... 358 see Interior lighting Important safety notes ...... 350 see Lights Locating astolen vehicle...... 357 14 Index
MB info call button ...... 353 N Remote vehicle locking ...... 356 Roadside Assistance button ...... 353 Navigation Search &Send ...... 355 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 268 Self-test ...... 351 see separate operating instructions Speed alert ...... 358 Night View Assist Plus System ...... 351 Activating/deactivating ...... 231 Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 359 Cleaning ...... 375 Vehicle remote malfunction Problem (malfunction) ...... 233 diagnosis...... 357 Notes on breaking-in anew Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 356 vehicle ...... 156 Mechanical key Function/notes ...... 80 O Locking vehicle ...... 87 Occupant Classification System Unlocking the driver's door ...... 86 (OCS) Memory card (audio) ...... 270 Faults ...... 53 Memory function ...... 116 Operation ...... 48 Message memory (on-board System self-test ...... 51 computer) ...... 282 Occupant safety Messages Childreninthe vehicle ...... 60 see Display messages Important safety notes ...... 42 Mirrors OCS see Exterior mirrors Faults ...... 53 see Rear-view mirror Operation ...... 48 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) System self-test ...... 51 Mobile phone Odometer Menu (on-board computer) ...... 270 see Trip odometer Modifying the programming Off-road driving (SmartKey) ...... 80 Checklist after driving off-road...... 188 MOExtendedtires ...... 382 Checklist before driving off-road .... 188 Mounting wheels General information ...... 187 Loweringthe vehicle ...... 426 Important safety notes ...... 187 Mounting anew wheel ...... 425 Traveling uphill ...... 190 Raising the vehicle ...... 423 Off-road program (vehicles Removing awheel ...... 425 without the ON&OFFROAD Securing the vehicle against package) rolling away ...... 422 Function/notes ...... 248 MP3 Off-road programs (vehicles with Operation ...... 270 the ON&OFFROAD package) see separate operating instructions Displays in the COMAND display... 252 Multifunction display Function/notes ...... 248 Function/notes ...... 265 Off-road program 1...... 249 Permanent display...... 274 Off-road program 2...... 249 Multifunction steering wheel Off-road system Operating the on-board computer .264 4MATIC ...... 246 Overview ...... 35 DSR ...... 246 LOW RANGE off-road gear ...... 250 Index 15
Off-road 4ETS ...... 71 Overhead control panel ...... 39 Off-road ABS ...... 66 Override feature Off-road ESP® ...... 72 Rearside windows ...... 65 Off-road program (vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD P package) ...... 248 Paintcode number ...... 443 Off-road programs (vehicleswith Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 371 the ON&OFFROAD package) ...... 248 Panic alarm ...... 42 Oil Panorama roof with power tilt/ see Engine oil sliding panel On and Offroad menu (on-board Opening/closing ...... 98 computer) ...... 278 Opening/closing the roller On-board computer sunblind ...... 99 AMG menu ...... 278 Problem (malfunction) ...... 100 Assistance menu ...... 272 Resetting ...... 99 Audiomenu ...... 269 Panorama sliding sunroof Convenience submenu ...... 277 Important safety notes ...... 96 Displaying a service message ...... 369 Parking ...... 179 Display messages ...... 282 Important safety notes ...... 179 DISTRONICPLUS ...... 202 Parking brake ...... 180 Factory settings submenu ...... 278 Position of exterior mirror, front- Important safety notes ...... 262 passenger side ...... 115 Instrument cluster submenu ...... 274 Rearview camera ...... 221 Lighting submenu ...... 274 see PARKTRONIC Menu overview ...... 266 Parking aid Message memory ...... 282 Active Parking Assist ...... 217 Navigation menu ...... 268 see Exterior mirrors On and Offroadmenu ...... 278 see PARKTRONIC Operation ...... 264 Parking brake RACETIMER ...... 279 Display message ...... 286 Service menu ...... 273 Electric parking brake ...... 180 Settings menu ...... 274 Warning lamp ...... 324 Standard display...... 266 see Parking brake Telephone menu ...... 270 Parking lamps Trip menu ...... 266 Vehicle submenu ...... 276 Switching on/off ...... 122 Video DVD operation...... 270 Parking lamps (changing bulbs) ...... 131 On-road programs PARKTRONIC AUTO program ...... 244 Deactivating/activating ...... 215 Function/notes ...... 243 Driving system ...... 213 Snow program ...... 245 Function/notes ...... 213 SPORT program ...... 244 Important safety notes ...... 213 Trailer program ...... 245 Problem (malfunction) ...... 217 Opening and closing the side trim Range of the sensors ...... 214 panels ...... 132 Trailer towing ...... 216 Operating system Warning display...... 215 PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator see On-board computer lamp ...... 48 Outside temperature display ...... 264 16 Index
Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .375 Rear seats Power closing feature ...... 86 Adjusting ...... 106 Power washers ...... 371 Rear view camera Power windows Cleaning instructions ...... 373 see Side windows Function/notes ...... 221 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Switching on/off ...... 222 protection) Rear-view mirror Display message ...... 289 Anti-glare (manual)...... 113 Operation ...... 54 Dipping (automatic) ...... 114 PRE-SAFE® Brake Rear window defroster Activating/deactivating ...... 272 Problem (malfunction) ...... 150 Display message ...... 291 Switching on/off ...... 149 Function/notes ...... 73 Rear window wiper Warning lamp ...... 328 Replacing the wiper blade ...... 134 Product information ...... 23 Switching on/off ...... 133 Program selector button ...... 169 Refueling Protection of the environment Fuel gauge ...... 33, 263 General notes ...... 23 Important safety notes ...... 173 Pulling away Refueling process...... 174 Trailer ...... 160 see Fuel Pulling away (automatic Remote control transmission) ...... 160 Programming (garage door opener) ...... 359 Q Reporting safety defects ...... 28 Reserve (fuel tank) Qualifiedspecialistworkshop ...... 27 see Fuel Reserve fuel R Display message ...... 301 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 279 Warning lamp ...... 325 Radar sensor system see Fuel Activating/deactivating ...... 277 Residual heat (climate control) ...... 150 Display message ...... 305 Restraint system Radiator cover ...... 365 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Radio System) Selecting astation ...... 269 Reversing lamps (display see separate operating instructions message) ...... 297 Radio-controlled devices Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25 (installing) ...... 362 Roller sunblind Reading lamp ...... 127 Panorama roof with power tilt/ Rear axle level control (AMG sliding panel ...... 98 adaptive sport suspension Rearside windows ...... 345 system) ...... 212 Roof carrier ...... 343 Rear compartment Roof lining and carpets (cleaning Setting the airvents...... 152 guidelines) ...... 377 Rear fog lamp Roof load (maximum) ...... 452 Switching on/off ...... 122 Route (navigation) see Route guidance (navigation) Index 17
Route guidance (navigation) ...... 268 Service products Brake fluid ...... 450 S Coolant (engine) ...... 451 DEF special additives...... 448 Safety Engine oil ...... 449 Childreninthe vehicle ...... 60 Fuel ...... 445 Child restraint systems ...... 60 Important safety notes ...... 444 Occupant Classification System Washer fluid ...... 452 (OCS) ...... 48 Settings Safety system Factory (on-board computer) ...... 278 see Driving safety systems On-board computer ...... 274 Seat belts Setting the air distribution ...... 147 Adjusting the driver's and front- Setting the airflow ...... 147 passenger seatbelt ...... 57 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 279 Adjusting the height ...... 57 Side impact air bag ...... 47 Belt force limiters ...... 59 Side marker lamp (display Cleaning ...... 377 message) ...... 297 Correct usage ...... 55 Side marker lamps (changing Emergency Tensioning Devices ...... 59 bulbs) ...... 131 Fastening ...... 56 Side windows Important safety guidelines ...... 54 Cleaning ...... 372 Releasing ...... 58 Convenience closing feature ...... 93 Safety guidelines ...... 43 Convenience opening feature ...... 93 Switching belt adjustment on/off Important safety information ...... 92 (on-board computer) ...... 277 Opening/closing ...... 92 Warning lamp ...... 317 Overview ...... 92 Warning lamp (function) ...... 58 Problem (malfunction) ...... 96 see Seat belts Resetting ...... 94 Seats Sliding sunroof Adjusting (electrically)...... 104 Important safety notes ...... 96 Adjusting the head restraint ...... 104 Opening/closing ...... 97 Cleaning the cover ...... 376 Problem (malfunction) ...... 100 Correct driver's seatposition ...... 102 Resetting ...... 98 Folding the rear bench seat see Panorama roof with power forwards/back ...... 335 tilt/sliding panel Important safety notes ...... 103 SmartKey Overview ...... 103 Changing the battery ...... 81 Seat heating problem ...... 109 Changing the programming ...... 80 Seat ventilation problem ...... 110 Checking the battery ...... 81 Storing settings (memory Convenience closing feature ...... 94 function) ...... 116 Convenience opening feature ...... 93 Switching seatheating on/off ...... 107 Display message ...... 314 Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 109 Door central locking/unlocking ...... 79 Securing hooks ...... 338 Important safety notes ...... 78 Selector lever Loss ...... 83 Cleaning ...... 376 Mechanical key ...... 80 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 373 Overview ...... 78 Service menu (on-board computer) .273 Positions (ignition lock) ...... 157 18 Index
Problem (malfunction) ...... 83 Important safety notes ...... 110 Starting the engine ...... 159 Paddle shifters ...... 169 Snow chains Steering wheel heating ...... 111 Information ...... 401 Storing settings (memory Snow drive program ...... 245 function) ...... 116 Sockets Steering wheel heating Center console ...... 347 Problem (malfunction) ...... 112 General notes ...... 347 Switching on/off ...... 111 Luggage compartment ...... 348 Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 169 Rearcompartment...... 348 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ...... 279 Spare wheel Stowage areas ...... 332 see Emergency spare wheel Stowage compartments Specialist workshop ...... 27 Armrest (under) ...... 334 Special seat beltretractor ...... 62 Center console ...... 334 Speed,controlling Cupholders ...... 343 see Cruise control Eyeglasses compartment ...... 334 Speedometer Glove box ...... 333 Digital ...... 267 Important safety information ...... 333 In the Instrument cluster ...... 33, 263 Stowage net ...... 335 Segments ...... 264 Stowage net ...... 335 Selecting the unit of Stowage space measurement ...... 274 Center console (rear) ...... 334 see Instrument cluster Summer tires ...... 400 SRS Sun visor ...... 345 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Surround lighting (on-board System) computer) ...... 275 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Suspension tuning System) AMG adaptive sport suspension Display message ...... 291 system ...... 212 Introduction ...... 43 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 279 Warning lamp ...... 324 SUV Warning lamp (function) ...... 43 (Sport Utility Vehicle) ...... 26 Standing lamps Switching air-recirculation mode Changing bulbs ...... 131 on/off ...... 150 Display message ...... 297 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ...... 75 Switching on/off ...... 123 Start/stop function T see ECO start/stop function Starting (engine) ...... 159 Tachometer ...... 264 STEERCONTROL ...... 75 Tailgate Steering (display message) ...... 314 Display message ...... 313 Steering wheel Emergency unlocking ...... 91 Important safety notes ...... 87 Adjusting (electrically)...... 111 Limiting the opening angle ...... 91 Adjusting (manually)...... 110 Opening/closing (automatically Button overview ...... 35 from inside) ...... 90 Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 264 Opening/closing (automatically Cleaning ...... 376 from outside) ...... 89 Index 19
Opening/closing (from outside) ...... 88 Outside temperature ...... 264 Opening dimensions ...... 452 Setting (climate control) ...... 146 Power closing ...... 86 Theft deterrent systems Tail lamps ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ...... 75 Display message ...... 296 Immobilizer...... 75 Tank content Through-loading ...... 335 Fuel gauge ...... 33, 263 Time Technical data see Separate Operator's Manual Capacities ...... 444 Timing (RACETIMER) ...... 279 Emergency spare wheel ...... 439 TIREFIT kit ...... 383 Information ...... 442 Tire pressure Tires/wheels ...... 426 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 406 Trailer loads ...... 455 Checking manually ...... 405 Vehicle data ...... 452 Display message ...... 310 TELEAID Maximum ...... 404 Call priority ...... 354 Notes ...... 403 Downloading destinations Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 384 (COMAND) ...... 354 Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 384 Downloading routes...... 358 Recommended ...... 402 Emergency call ...... 351 see Tire pressure Geo fencing ...... 358 Tire pressure loss warning system Important safety notes ...... 350 Important safety notes ...... 405 Locating astolen vehicle...... 357 Restarting ...... 406 MB info call button ...... 353 Tire pressure monitoring system Remote vehicle locking ...... 356 Checking the tire pressure Roadside Assistance button ...... 353 electronically ...... 408 Search &Send ...... 355 Function/notes ...... 406 Self-test ...... 351 Restarting ...... 409 Speed alert ...... 358 Warning lamp ...... 329 System ...... 351 Warning message ...... 409 Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 359 Tires Vehicle remote malfunction Aspect ratio (definition) ...... 420 diagnosis...... 357 Average weight of the vehicle Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 356 occupants (definition) ...... 419 Telephone Bar (definition) ...... 418 Accepting acall ...... 271 Changing awheel ...... 421 Display message ...... 314 Characteristics ...... 418 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 270 Checking ...... 399 Number from the phone book ...... 271 Definition of terms ...... 418 Redialing ...... 271 Directionofrotation ...... 422 Rejecting/ending acall ...... 271 Display message ...... 310 Telescopic rod (EASY-PACK load- Distributionofthe vehicle securing kit) ...... 341 occupants (definition) ...... 421 Temperature DOT, Tire Identification Number Coolant ...... 263 (TIN) ...... 418 Coolant (on-board computer) ...... 278 DOT (Department of Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 278 Transportation) (definition) ...... 419 20 Index
GAWR (Gross Axle WeightRating) Total load limit (definition) ...... 421 (definition) ...... 419 Traction ...... 414 GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Traction (definition) ...... 421 (definition) ...... 419 Treadwear ...... 414 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) TWR (permissible trailer drawbar (definition) ...... 419 noseweight) (definition) ...... 421 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Uniform Tire Quality Grading Rating) (definition) ...... 419 Standards...... 413 Important safety notes ...... 398 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Increased vehicle weight due to Standards(definition) ...... 419 optional equipment (definition) ...... 419 Unladen weight (definition) ...... 420 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...... 419 Wearindicator(definition) ...... 421 Labeling (overview)...... 415 Wheelrim (definition)...... 419 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 420 see Flat tire Load index ...... 417 Top Tether ...... 63 Load index (definition) ...... 420 Towing M+S tires ...... 400 Important safety guidelines ...... 391 Maximum loaded vehicle weight Installing the towing eye ...... 392 (definition) ...... 419 Removing the towing eye...... 393 Maximum load on a tire With the rear axle raised ...... 393 (definition) ...... 420 Towing atrailer Maximum permissible tire ActiveParking Assist ...... 221 pressure (definition) ...... 420 Axle load, permissible ...... 455 Maximum tire load...... 417 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ...... 374 Maximum tire load (definition) ...... 420 Coupling up atrailer ...... 257 MOExtended tires ...... 400 Decoupling atrailer ...... 258 Optional equipment weight Driving tips ...... 253 (definition) ...... 420 ESP® (Electronic Stability PSI (pounds per square inch) Program) ...... 72 (definition) ...... 420 Important safety notes ...... 253 Replacing ...... 421 Installing the ball coupling ...... 255 Service life ...... 400 Mounting dimensions ...... 454 Sidewall (definition) ...... 420 Power supply ...... 260 Speed rating (definition) ...... 419 Pulling away with a trailer ...... 160 Storing ...... 422 Removing the ball coupling ...... 259 Structure and characteristics Shift range ...... 168 (definition) ...... 418 Storing the ball coupling ...... 260 Temperature ...... 414 Trailer drive program ...... 245 TIN (Tire Identification Number) Trailer loads ...... 455 (definition) ...... 420 Towing away Tire bead(definition) ...... 420 With both axles on the ground ...... 393 Tire pressure (definition) ...... 420 Tow-starting Tire pressures (recommended)...... 419 Emergency engine starting ...... 394 Tire size (data) ...... 426 Important safety notes ...... 391 Tire size designation, load-bearing Trailer coupling capacity, speed rating ...... 415 see Towing atrailer Tire tread ...... 399 Trailer loads and drawbar Tire tread (definition) ...... 420 noseweights ...... 259 Index 21
Trailer towing V Active Blind SpotAssist ...... 240 Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 243 Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ...... 345 Blind Spot Assist ...... 235 Vehicle PARKTRONIC...... 216 Correct use ...... 27 Permissible trailer loads and Data acquisition ...... 28 drawbarnoseweights ...... 259 Display message ...... 312 Transfer case ...... 173 Equipment ...... 24 Transmission Individualsettings ...... 274 see Automatic transmission Limited Warranty ...... 28 Transmission position display ...... 165 Loading ...... 410 Transmission position display Locking (in an emergency) ...... 87 (DIRECT SELECTlever) ...... 165 Locking (SmartKey) ...... 79 Transporting the vehicle ...... 393 Lowering ...... 426 Traveling uphill Maintenance ...... 25 Brow of hill ...... 191 Parking for a long period ...... 182 Driving downhill ...... 191 Pulling away ...... 160 Maximum gradient-climbing Raising ...... 423 capability ...... 191 Reporting problems ...... 28 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .376 Securing from rolling away ...... 422 Trip computer (on-board Towing away ...... 391 Transporting ...... 393 computer) ...... 267 Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 86 Trip odometer Unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 79 Calling up ...... 266 Vehicle data ...... 452 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 268 Vehicle battery see Trip odometer see Battery (vehicle) Trunk Vehicle data ...... 452 see Tailgate Vehicle dimensions ...... 452 Turn signals Vehicle emergency locking ...... 87 Display message ...... 295 Vehicle identification number Switching on/off ...... 123 see Turn signals see VIN TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) Vehicle identification plate ...... 443 (definition) ...... 421 Vehicle level (display message) ...... 302 Type identification plate Vehicle tool kit ...... 380 see Vehicle identification plate Video Operating the DVD ...... 270 VIN ...... 443 U Unlocking W Emergency unlocking ...... 86 From inside the vehicle (central Warning and indicator lamps unlocking button) ...... 85 ABS ...... 319 Brakes ...... 318 Check Engine ...... 325 Coolant ...... 326 Distance warning ...... 328 DISTRONICPLUS ...... 328 22 Index
ESP® ...... 321 Windshieldwipers ESP® OFF ...... 322 Problem (malfunction) ...... 136 Fuel tank ...... 325 Rearwindow wiper ...... 133 Overview ...... 34, 316 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 133 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Switching on/off ...... 132 indicator lamp ...... 48 Winterdriving Reserve fuel ...... 325 Slippery roadsurfaces...... 186 Seat belt...... 317 Snow chains ...... 401 SRS ...... 324 Winter operation Tire pressure monitor ...... 329 General notes ...... 400 Warranty ...... 442 Overview ...... 400 Washer fluid Radiator cover ...... 365 Display message ...... 314 Snow drive program ...... 245 Wheel bolttightening torque ...... 426 Winter tires Wheel chock ...... 422 M+S tires ...... 400 Wheels Wiper blades Changing awheel ...... 421 Cleaning ...... 373 Checking ...... 399 Important safety notes ...... 133 Cleaning ...... 372 Replacing ...... 133 Cleaning (warning) ...... 422 Replacing (rearwindow) ...... 134 Emergency spare wheel ...... 436 Replacing (windshield)...... 134 Important safety notes ...... 398 Wooden trim (cleaning Interchanging/changing ...... 421 instructions) ...... 376 Mounting anew wheel ...... 425 Workshops Mounting awheel ...... 422 see Qualified specialist workshop Overview ...... 398 Removing awheel ...... 425 Storing ...... 422 Tightening torque ...... 426 Wheelsize/tiresize ...... 426 Window curtain air bag Display message ...... 292 Operation ...... 48 Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting ...... 148 Infrared reflective ...... 362 see Windshield Windshieldwasher fluid see Windshield washer system Windshield washer system Adding washer fluid ...... 368 Filling capacity ...... 452 Notes ...... 452 Introduction 23
Protection of the environment Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration. General notes Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. H Environmental note Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. Daimler's declared policy is one of integrated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources Environmental concerns and that form the basis of our existence on this recommendations planet to be used sparingly and in a manner Wherever the operating instructions require that takes the requirements of both nature you to dispose of materials, first try to and humanity into account. regenerate or re-use them. Observe the You too can help to protect the environment relevant environmental rules and regulations by operating your vehicle in an when disposing of materials. In this way you environmentally responsible manner. will help to protect the environment. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tire wear depend on the following factors: Product information Roperating conditions of your vehicle Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use Ryour personal driving style genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversion You can influence both factors. You should parts and accessories that have been bear the following in mind: approved for your vehicle. Operating conditions: Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well as Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel conversion parts and accessories that have consumption. been specifically approved for your vehicle for Ralways make sure that the tire pressures their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite are correct. ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. unable to assess other parts. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility for Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz consumption. vehicles. This is also the case, even if they Rremove roof racks once you no longer need have been independently or officially them. approved. The use of non-approved parts Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute could affect your vehicle's operating safety. to environmental protection. You should Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approved therefore adhere to the service intervals. conversion parts and accessories are Ralways have service work carried out at a available from any authorized Mercedes-Benz qualified specialist workshop. Center. Here, you will receive advice about Personal driving style: permissible technical modifications, and the parts will be professionally installed. Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle is stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front.
Z 24 Introduction
Operator's Manual Service and vehicle operation General notes Service and literature Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with warranties printed in the Service and your vehicle. Warranty Information booklet. Your For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will follow the instructions and warning notices in exchange or repair any defective parts this manual. Disregarding them may lead to originally installed in the vehicle in damage to the vehicle or personal injury. accordance with the termsofthe following Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard warranties: of the instructions is not covered by the RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. REmission Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty Vehicle equipment RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, This Operator's Manual describes all models Rhode Island and Vermont Emission and all standard and optional equipment of Control Systems Warranty your vehicle available at the time of going to RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon print. Country-specific differences are laws) possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety-related systems Information for customers in and functions. The equipment in your vehicle California may therefore differ from some of the descriptions or illustrations. Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the The original purchase agreement lists all purchase price or lease price, if after a systems installed in your vehicle. reasonable number of repair attempts Contactanauthorized Mercedes-BenzCenter Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its if you have any questions about equipment or authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix operation. one or more substantial defects or The Operator's Manual and Maintenance malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered Booklet are important documents and should by its express warranty. During the period of be kept in the vehicle. 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyerorlessee if one or more of the following occurs: (1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly Introduction 25
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Change of address or change of writing of the need for its repair, ownership (2) the same substantialdefect or In the event of a change of address, please malfunction of a less serious nature than send us the "Notification of Address Change" category (1) has been subject to repair in the Service and Guarantee booklet or four or more times and you have directly simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer notified us in writing of the need for its Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline repair, or number (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or repair of the same or differentsubstantial Customer Service Center (Canada) at defects or malfunctions for a cumulative 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in total of more than 30 calendar days. contacting you in a timely manner should the Please send your writtennotice to: need arise. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the Customer Assistance Center entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. One Mercedes Drive If you have purchased a used car, please send Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply Maintenance call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number The Service and Warranty Booklet describes 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or all the necessary maintenance work which Customer Service (Canada) at should be done at regular intervals. 1-800-387-0100. Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Vehicle operation outside the USA service advisor will record every service for and Canada you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that: Roadside Assistance Rservice facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic Program offers technical help in the event of converter may not be available. Leaded fuel a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside may cause damage to the catalytic Assistance Hotline are answered by our converter. agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause (USA) engine damage. 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) Some Mercedes-Benz models are available For additional information, refer to the for delivery in Europe through our European Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Delivery Program. For details, consult an Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to Assistance" section in the Service and one of the following addresses. Warranty booklet (Canada).You will find both In the USA in your vehicle literature portfolio.
Z 26 Introduction
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC an unbelted person is significantly more likely European Delivery Department to die than a person wearing a seat belt. One Mercedes Drive Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Operating safety Mercedes-BenzCanada, Inc. Important safety notes European Delivery Department G WARNING 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Work improperly carried out on electronic Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle's electronic components are Sports UtilityVehicle interconnected, any modifications made may G WARNING produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both seriously impair the operating safety of your on-road and off-road use. It can go places and vehicle. perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars are not intended. This Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle will handle and maneuver differently for repairs or modifications to electronic from conventional passenger cars in driving components. conditions which may occur on streets, Other improper work or modifications on the highways and off-road use. vehicle could also have a negative impact on This vehicle has a higherground clearance the operating safety of the vehicle. and a higher center of gravity than many Some safety systems only function when the passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this engine is running. You should therefore never type, if you make sharp turns at excessive turn off the engine while driving. speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. G WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or rollover rate than other types of vehicles. tires/wheels may cause serious damage and Failure to operate this vehicle safely may impair the operating safety of your vehicle. resultinanaccident, rollover of the vehicle, Such blows can be caused, for example, by and severe or fatal injury. running over an obstacle, road debris or a Before you startto drive this vehicle, read the pothole. Operator's Manual. Take time to become If you feel a sudden significant vibration or familiar with the driving characteristics of this ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all to your vehicle has occurred: vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle Rturn on your hazard warning flashers. handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or Rslow down carefully. abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. distance from the road. When driving off-road or working the vehicle Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ hard, do not overload it. And, always wear wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other Introduction 27
qualified maintenance or repair facility for sudden braking or acceleration. This may further inspection or repairs. affect the function of the pedals. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any equipment or cables in the Declarations of conformity driver's footwell.
Vehicle components which receive ! If the engine is switched off and and/or transmit radio waves equipment on the diagnostics connection USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle is used, the starter battery may discharge. comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. The diagnostics connection is only intended Operation is subjectto the following two for the connection of diagnostic equipment at conditions: 1) These devices may not cause a qualified specialist workshop. harmful interference, and 2) These devices Connecting equipment to the diagnostics must accept any interference received, connection can, for example, lead to including interference that may cause emissions monitoring information being undesired operation. Changes or reset. This may lead to the vehicle failing to modifications not expressly approved by the meet the requirements of the next emissions party responsible for compliance could void test during the main inspection. the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle Qualified specialist workshop comply with Industry Canada license-exempt An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the qualified specialist workshop. It has the following two conditions: (1) These devices necessary specialist knowledge, tools and may not cause interference, and (2) These qualifications to correctly carry out the work devices must accept any interference, required on your vehicle. This is especially the including interference that may cause case for work relevant to safety. undesired operation of the device." Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet. Diagnostics connection Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: G WARNING Rwork relevant to safety If you connect equipment to the on-board R diagnostics connection, it can affect the service and maintenance work operation of the vehicle systems. This can Rrepair work impair the operating safety of your vehicle Ralterations, installation work and while driving. There is a risk of an accident. modifications Do not connect any equipment to the on- Rwork on electronic components board diagnostics connection.
G WARNING Correct use Loose equipment or equipment cables which G WARNING are connected to the on-board diagnostics There are various warning stickers affixed to connection can obstruct the area around the your vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you and pedals. The equipment or the cables could others to various dangers. Therefore, do not come between the pedals in the event of
Z 28 Introduction
remove any warning stickers unless the If you believe that your vehicle has a defect sticker clearly states that you may do so. which could cause a crash or could cause If you remove any warning stickers, you or injury or death, you should immediately others could fail to recognize certain dangers inform the National Highway Traffic Safety and be injured. Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. When driving yourvehicle observe the If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may following information: open an investigation, and if it finds thata Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. Rthe Technical Data section in this manual However, NHTSA cannot become involved in Rtraffic rules and regulations individual problems between you, your Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. motorvehicles To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go Problems with your vehicle to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: If you should experience aproblemwith your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590. affectits safe operation, we urge you to You can also obtain other information about contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center motor vehicle safety from immediately to have the problem diagnosed http://www.safercar.gov and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem againwith a Mercedes-BenzCenter or Limited Warranty contact us at one of the following addresses. ! Follow the instructions in this manual In the USA aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle Customer Assistance Center as well as about possible vehicle damage. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Damage to your vehicle that arises from One Mercedes Drive culpable contraventions against these Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 instructions is not covered either by the In Canada Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Customer Relations Department Mercedes-BenzCanada, Inc. 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Data stored in the vehicle Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle Reporting safety defects (Including notice pursuantto California Code § 9951) USA only: Your vehicle records electronic data. If your The following text is published as required of vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada: manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuantto the an accident. "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". Introduction 29
This information helps, for example, to test vehicle systems after an accident and to continually improve vehicle safety. Daimler AG can access this data and submit it: Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner Ron the instruction of prosecuting authorities Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales and service organizations Ras otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELE AID) purchase agreement to find out more about data that can be recorded and transmitted by this system.
Information on copyright General information You can find information on licenses for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and its electronic components on the following website: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ opensource
Z 30 31
Dashboard ...... 32 Instrument cluster ...... 33 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 35 Center console ...... 36 Overheadcontrol panel ...... 39 Door control panel ...... 40 At a glance 32 Dashboard
Dashboard At a glance
Function Page Function Page : Steering wheel paddle F Adjusting the steering shifters 169 wheel manually 110 ; Combination switch 123 G Adjusting the steering wheel electrically 110 = Instrument cluster 33 Steering wheel heating 111 ? Horn H Cruise control lever 192 A DIRECT SELECT lever 165 I Opening the hood 364 B PARKTRONIC warning J display 213 Diagnostics connection 27 K C Overhead control panel 39 Electric parking brake 180 L D Climate control systems 138 Light switch 120 M E Ignition lock 157 Night View AssistPlus 231 Start/Stop button 158 Instrument cluster 33
Instrumentcluster Displays and controls At a glance
Function Page Function Page : Speedometer with ? Coolant temperature 263 segments 264 A Multifunction display 265 ; Fuel gauge B Instrument lighting 263 = Tachometer 264 34 Instrument cluster
Warning and indicator lamps At a glance
Function Page Function Page : L Low-beam F 6 SRS 324 headlamps 121 G ü Seat belt 317 ; T Parking lamps 122 H % Diesel engine: = ÷ ESP® 321 preglow 159 ? K High-beam I ? Coolant 326 headlamps 124 J R Rearfog lamp 122 A Electric parking brake (red) 324 K ; Check Engine 325 F (USA only) ! (Canada only) L 8 Reserve fuel 325 B ! Electric parking brake M å ESP® OFF 321 (yellow) 324 N ! ABS 319 C · Distance warning 328 O Braking 318 D #! Turn signals 123 $ (USA only) J (Canada only) E h Tire pressure monitor 329 Multifunction steering wheel 35
Multifunction steering wheel At a glance
Function Page Function Page : Multifunction display 265 A =; ; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 264 separate Operating 9: Instructions Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 264 = ? a Switches on the Voice Confirms yourselection 264 Control System; see the separate operating Hides display messages 282 instructions B % ? ~ Back 264 Rejects or ends a call 270 Switches off the Voice Exits phone book/redial Control System; see the memory separate operating 6 instructions Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute 36 Center console
Center console Center console, upper section At a glance
Function Page Function Page : COMAND; see the separate B £ Hazard warning operating instructions lamps 124 ; c Seat heating 107 C 45 Indicator lamp 48 = s Seat ventilation 109 D å ESP® 71 ? c PARKTRONIC 213 A ¤ ECO start/stop function 161 Center console 37
Center console, lower section At a glance
i Vehicles with ON&OFFROAD menu Function Page Function Page J Á Level control 204 F Cup holders 343 K Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Ashtray 346 Regulation) 246 Cigarette lighter 346 L p Manual drive program 171 Power socket 347 M Selector wheel for on-road G COMAND controller; see programs 243 the separate operating instructions Selector wheel for off-road programs 248 H d ON&OFFROAD menu N Stowage compartment 334 button 252 I + LOW RANGE off-road gear 250 38 Center console At a glance
i Vehicles without ON&OFFROAD menu Function Page and AMG vehicles I Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Function Page Regulation) 246 F Cup holders 343 J Á Level control Ashtray 346 (vehicles with AIRMATIC Cigarette lighter 346 package) 210 Power socket 347 K e Adaptive Damping G COMAND controller; see System (vehicles with the separate operating AIRMATIC package) 209 instructions à Adjusts AMG adaptive damping system H Ç Selects off-road (AMG vehicles) 212 program (vehicles with AIRMATIC package) 248 L Stowage compartment 334 Ú Selects the drive program 169 Selects the drive program (AMG vehicles) 169 Overhead control panel 39
Overheadcontrol panel At a glance
Function Page Function Page : p Switches the left- C Eyeglasses compartment 334 hand reading lamp on/off 127 D F Roadside Assistance ; c Switches the front call button (mbrace interiorlighting on 128 system) 353 = u Switches the rear E G SOS button (mbrace interior lighting on/off 128 system) 351 ? | Switches the front F ï MB Info call button interior lighting/automatic (mbrace system) 353 interior lighting control off 127 G Rear-view mirror 113 A p Switches the right- H Buttons for the garage door hand reading lamp on/off 127 opener 361 B 2 Opens/closes the I Microphone for mbrace sliding sunroof 97 (emergency call system) 3 Opens/closes the telephone and the Voice panorama roof with power Control System1 tilt/sliding panel with roller sunblinds 98
1 Voice Control System only available together with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instructions. 40 Doorcontrol panel
Door control panel At a glance
Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 85 B W Opens/closes the side windows 92 ; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 85 C q Opens/closes the tailgate 90 = r45= Stores settings forthe seat, D n Activates/ exterior mirrors and deactivates the override steering wheel (memory feature for the side function) 116 windows in the rear compartment 65 ? Adjusts the seats 103 A 7Zö\ Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 113 41
Useful information ...... 42 Panic alarm ...... 42 Occupant safety ...... 42 Children in the vehicle ...... 60 Driving safetysystems ...... 65 Theft deterrent locking system ...... 75 Safety 42 Occupant safety
Useful information Occupant safety
i This Operator's Manual describes all Important safety notes models and all standard and optional G WARNING equipment of your vehicle available at the Modifications to or work improperly time of publication of the Operator's conducted on restraint system components Manual. Country-specific differences are or their wiring, as well as tampering with possible. Please note that your vehicle may interconnected electronic systems, can lead Safety not be equipped with all features to the restraint systemsno longer functioning described. This also applies to safety- as intended. related systems and functions. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices i Read the information on qualified (ETDs), for example, could deploy specialist workshops: (Y page 27). inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, Panic alarm never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software.
In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle. The restraint system consists of: Rseat belts Rchild restraint systems RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors Additional protection is provided by: X To activate: press ! button : for at RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System) least one second. R ® An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting PRE-SAFE flashes. Rair bag system components with: X To deactivate: press ! button : - PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp again. - front-passenger seat with Occupant or Classification System (OCS) X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. The protective or functions of the system work in conjunction X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. with each other. Not all air bags are always The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the deployed in an accident. vehicle. i See "Children in the vehicle" for information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children (Y page 60). Occupant safety 43
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) for details. USA only: for further information, contact our Customer Assistance Center at Introduction 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). SRS consists of: SRS functions are checked regularly when R6 SRS warning lamp you switch on the ignition and when the RAir bags engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions RThe air bag control unit with crash sensors can be detected in good time. REmergency Tensioning Devices for the The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument Safety front seat belts and the outer seat belts in cluster lights up when the ignition is switched the rear on. It goes out no later than a few seconds RBelt force limiters after the engine is started. SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming The SRS components are in operational into contact with the vehicle's interior in the readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp event of an accident. It can also reduce the goes out while the engine is running. effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) SRS warning lamp and air bags G WARNING G WARNING The SRS self-checkhas detected a RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have malfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp: been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points R does notlight up at all must also be checked. Only use seat belts Rdoes not go out after approximately four installed or supplied by an authorized seconds after the engine is started Mercedes-Benz Center. Rlights up after the engineis started or while RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency the vehicle is in motion Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly perchlorate material, which may require recommends that you have the system special handling and regard for the checked as soon as possible at a qualified environment.Check your national disposal specialist workshop. SRS may otherwise fail guidelines. California residents, see to activate when it is needed in the event of www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ an accident, which could lead to serious or Perchlorate/index.cfm. fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD also result in injury. that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- In addition, work carried out improperly on SAFE® has electrically operated reversible SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause belt tensioners in addition to the unintended air bag deployment. Work on the pyrotechnic ETDs. SRS system should only be carried out by RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. qualified specialist personnel. Consult a They could tear. qualified specialist workshop. RDo not make any modification that could If it is necessary to modify an air bag system change the effectiveness of the seat belts. to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Z 44 Occupant safety
RDo not bleach or dye seatbelts as this may followed. These instructions are available severely weaken them. In a crash they may from any authorized Mercedes-Benz not be able to provide adequate protection. Center. RNo modifications of any kind may be made RGiven the considerable deployment speed, to any components or wiring of the SRS. required inflation volume, and the material RDo not change or remove any component of the air bags, there is the possibility of or part of the SRS. abrasions or other, potentially more serious R injuries resulting from air bag deployment. Safety Do not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc.to the: If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz - padded steering wheel boss strongly recommends that you inform the - knee bag covers subsequent owner that the vehicle is - front-passenger air bag cover equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the - outer side of front seat bolsters applicable section in the Operator's Manual. - outer side of rear bench seat backrest seat bolsters Air bags - roof lining trim RDo not install additional electrical/ Important safety notes electronic equipment on or near SRS G WARNING components and wiring. Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence RKeep area between air bags and occupants of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front- RDo not hang items such as coat hangers passenger front air bags and driver's knee from the coat hooks or handles over the bag) door. These items may be thrown around in Rside impacts (side impact air bags and the vehicle and cause head and other window curtain air bags) injuries when the window curtain air bag is Rrollover (window curtain air bags) deployed. However, no system available today can RAir bag system components will be hot after completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. When the air bags are deployed, a small RNever place your feet on the instrument amount of powder is released. The powder panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always generally does not constitute a health hazard keep both feet on the floor in front of the and does not indicate that there is a fire in the seat. vehicle. In order to prevent potential RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a breathing difficulties, you should leave the risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you causing unintended air bag deployment. have any breathing difficulty but cannot get Work on the SRS must therefore only be out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, performed by qualified technicians. then get fresh air by opening a window or Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz door. Center. RFor your protection and the protection of G WARNING others, when scrapping the air bag unit or In order to reduce the potential danger of ETD, our safety instructions must be injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger Occupant safety 45 must always be correctly seated and wear properly and use an appropriately sized their seat belts. infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster For maximum protection in the event of a seat recommended for the size and weight collision, you must always be in the normal of the child. seat position with yourback against the Failure to follow these instructions can result backrest. Fastenyour seat belt and make sure in severe injuries to you or other occupants. that it is correctly positioned on your body. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you As the air bag inflates with considerable make the buyer aware of this safety Safety speed and force, a proper seating position information. Be sure to give the buyer this and correct positioning of the hands on the Operator's Manual. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are G WARNING not wearing their seat belt, are not seated Accident research shows that the safest place properly or are too close to the air bag can be for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it Aside impact air bag related injury may occur inflates with great force instantaneously: if occupants, especially children, are not Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and properly seated or restrainedwhen next to a in a position that is as upright as possible side impact air bag which needs to deploy with your back against the backrest. rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. Rmove the driver's seat as far back as To help avoid the possibility of injury, please possible, still permitting proper operation follow these guidelines: of vehicle controls. The distance from the (1) Always sit as upright as possible center of the driver's chest to the center of and use the seat belts properly. the air bag cover on the steering wheel Make sure that children 12 years must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You old and under use an appropriately should be able to accomplish this by sized child restraint, infant adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If restraint, or booster seat you have any difficulties, please contact an recommended for the size and authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. weight of the child. Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the (2) Always wear seat belts properly. steering wheel or dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a Placing hands and arms inside the rim can bang, and a small amount of powder may also increase the risk and potential severity of be released. Only in rare cases will the bang hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag affect your hearing. The powder that is inflates. released generally does not constitute a Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp as possible from the dashboard when the lights up. seat is occupied. The air bags are deployed if the air bag control Roccupants, especially children, should unit detects the need for deployment. Only in never place their bodies or lean their heads the event of such a situation will the air bags in the area of the door where the side provide their supplemental protection. impact air bag inflates. This could result in If the driver and front passenger do not wear serious or fatal injuries should the side their seat belts, it is not possible for the air impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as bags to provide their supplemental upright as possible, wear the seat belt protection.
Z 46 Occupant safety
In the event of other types of impacts and Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being impacts below air bag deployment used thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The Rindependently of other air bags in the driver and passengers will then be protected vehicle to the extent possible by a properly fastened If the vehicle overturns, the front air bags are seat belt. Aproperly fastened seat beltis also generally not deployed. If the system detects needed to provide the best possible high vehicle deceleration in alongitudinal protection in a rollover. direction, the front air bags are deployed. Safety Air bags provide additional protection; they When a child restraint system is installed on are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. the front-passenger seat and the 4 All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in belts regardless of whether your vehicle is the center console does not light up: equipped with air bags or not. It is important for your safety and that of your Ra child restraint system without a passengers to have deployed air bags transponder for the air bag deactivation replaced and to have any malfunctioning air system is installed or bags repaired. This will help to make sure the Ra child restraint system with a transponder air bags continue to perform their protective has not been installed properly. function for the vehicle occupants in the Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air event of a crash. bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle Front air bags deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. The deployment of front-passenger front air bag ; is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (Y page 48). The lighter the passenger side occupant, the Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required steering wheel; front-passenger front air (predicted at the start of the impact) for bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove second-stage inflation of the front-passenger box. front air bag. In the second stage, the front air bags are inflated with the maximum The front air bags increase protection for the amount of propellant gas available. driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is They are deployed: predicted. You will then be protected by the Rin the event of certain frontal impacts fastened seat belt. Rif the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Occupant safety 47
Front-passenger front air bag ; will only authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for deploy if: availability. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, has detected that the G WARNING front-passenger seat is occupied. The pressure sensors for side impact air bag Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door console is not lit (Y page 48). trim panels including, for example, the
Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high Safety addition of door speakers. impact severity. Improper repair work on the doors or the Driver's knee bag modification or addition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is always deployed along with the driver's front air bag. The driver's knee bag is designed to operate together with the frontair bags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The driver's knee bag operates Frontside impactair bags : and side impact best in conjunction with correctly positioned air bags in the 2nd row of seats ; inflate next and fastened seat belts. to the outer seat cushion. The driver's knee bag increases protection of When deployed, the side impactair bags offer the driveragainst: additional protection for the thorax and, on the front seats, the pelvis of the vehicle Rknee injuries occupants on the side of the vehicle on which Rthigh injuries the impactoccurs.However, they do not Rlower leg injuries protect the: R Side impact air bags head Rneck G WARNING Rarms Only use seat covers which have been tested The side impact air bags are deployed: and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your Ron the side on which an impact occurs vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of Rat the start of an accident with a high rate the side impact air bags. Contact an of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in aside impact
Z 48 Occupant safety
Rregardless of whetherthe seat belt on the Window curtain air bags : enhance the level driver's seat and the outer seats of the 2nd of protection for the head, but not chest or row of seats is used arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of Rindependently of the front air bags the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Rindependently of the ETDs The window curtain air bags are integrated If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air into the side of the roof frame and deploy in bags are generally not deployed. side impact the area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar. air bags are deployed if the system detects Window curtain air bags are deployed: Safety high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a Rat the start of an accident with a high rate lateral direction, or also if the vehicle rolls of lateral vehicle deceleration or over, and the system determines that side acceleration, e.g. in aside impact impact air bag deployment can offer Ron the side on which an impactoccurs additional protection to that provided by the seat belt. Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in the event of a vehicle rollover and if the Side impact air bags will not deploy in side system determines that airbag deployment impacts which do not exceed the system's can offer the vehicle occupants additional preset deployment thresholds for lateral protection to that provided by the seat belt acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belt. Rindependently of the use of the seat belt The side impact air bag on the front- Rregardless of whether the front-passenger passenger side is not deployed in the seat is occupied following situations: Rindependently of the frontair bags Rthe OCS system detects that the front- Window curtain air bags will not deploy in passenger seat is not occupied, and impacts which do not exceed the system's presetdeployment thresholds for lateral Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not acceleration/deceleration.You will then be fastened. protected by the fastened seat belt. The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side will deploy if the front- passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of Occupant Classification System whether the front-passenger seat is occupied (OCS) or not. Method of operation Window curtain air bags G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himself or herself in the seat until the 45 indicator lamp goes out. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS has classified the front passenger seat occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old Occupant safety 49 child in a standard child restraint or if the front If the 45 indicator lamp is not passenger seatis classified as being empty. illuminated, the front passenger front air bag When the OCS senses that the front is activated and will be deployed passenger seat occupant is classified as Rin the event of certain frontal impacts being up to or less than the weight of a typical Rif the impact exceeds a predetermined 12-month-old child in a standard child triggering threshold restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will Rindependent of the side impact air bag or illuminate when the engine is started and pelvis air bag Safety remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be When the OCS senses that the front influenced by passenger seat is classified as being empty, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed when the engine is started and remain by the air bag control unit illuminated. This indicates that the front Rthe front passenger's weight category as passenger front air bag is deactivated. identified by the OCS When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as G WARNING being heavier than the weight of a typical 12- According to accident statistics, children are month-old child seated in astandard child safer when properly restrained on the rear restraint or as being a small individual (such seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, as a young teenager or asmall adult), the we strongly recommend that children be 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for placed in the rear seats whenever possible. approximately 6seconds when the engine is Regardless of seating position, children 12 started. Depending on occupant weight years old and under must be seated and sensor readings from the seat, it will then properly secured in an appropriate infant remain illuminated or go out. With the restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat 45 indicator lamp illuminated, the recommended for the size and weight of the frontpassenger frontair bag is deactivated. child. With the 45 indicator lamp out, the The infant or child restraint must be properly front passenger front air bag is activated. secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat When the OCS senses that the front belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors passenger seat occupant is classified as an and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with adult or someone larger than a small the child seat manufacturer's instructions. individual, the 45 indicator lamp will Occupants, especially children, should always illuminate for approximately six seconds sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt when the engine is started and thengo out. properly and use an appropriately sized infant This indicates that the front passenger front restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat air bag is activated. recommended for the size and weight of the If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, child. the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.
Z 50 Occupant safety
Children can be killed or seriously injured by RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child an inflating air bag. Note the following restraint on the front-passenger seat: important information when circumstances - move the seat as far back as possible require you to place a child in the front- - use the proper child restraint passenger seat: recommended for the age, size and RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag weight of the child technology designed to deactivate the - secure child restraint with the vehicle's front-passenger frontair bag in your vehicle
Safety seat belt according to the child seat when the system senses the weight of a manufacturer's instructions typical 12-month-old child or less along RFor children larger than the typical 12- with the weight of a standard appropriate month-old child, the front-passenger front child restraint on the front-passengerseat. air bag may or may not be activated. RAchild in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously G WARNING injured or even killed if the front-passenger If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the front air bag inflates in a collision which instrument cluster and the 45 could occur under some circumstances, indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the even with the air bag technology installed OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate front air bag will be deactivated in this case. this risk completely is never to place a child Have the system checked by qualified in a rear-facing child restraint in the front- technicians as soon as possible. Contact an passenger seat. We therefore strongly authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an seat. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on In order to ensure proper operation of the air the front-passenger seat, make sure the bag system and OCS: 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a indicating that the front-passenger front air position that is as upright as possible with bag is deactivated. Should the 45 your back against the seat backrest. indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while RWhen seated, a passenger should not the restraint is installed, please check position him/herself in such a way as to installation. Periodically check the cause the passenger's weight to be lifted 45 indicator lamp while driving to from the seat cushion as this may result in make sure that the 45 indicator the OCS being unable to correctly lamp is illuminated. If the 45 approximate the passenger's weight indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do category. not transport a child on the front-passenger RRead and observe all warnings in this seat until the system has been repaired. chapter. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates. Occupant safety 51
Both the driver and the front passenger should always observe the 45 indicator lamp to determine whether or not the front passenger is positioned correctly. Also observe the air bag display messages, which appearinthe instrumentcluster (Y page 294). If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag Safety will also deploy. The OCS may have detected that the seat: If the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition lock or is in position 0, Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a 45 indicator lamp : does not light typical child up to twelve months old, up. seated in a child restraint system The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a categorizes the occupant on the front- young teenager or a small adult passenger seat using a weight sensor. The Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint front-passenger front air bag is deactivated system whose weight is greater than that automatically for certain weight categories. of a typical twelve month old child. 45 indicator lamp : shows you the These are examples of when the OCS current status. If deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. 45 indicator lamp : lights up, the Deactivation takes place although the front-passenger air bag is disabled. collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the The system does not deactivate: driver's air bag.
Rthe side impact air bag System self-test Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices G WARNING To be classified correctly, the front passenger If the 45indicator lamp does not must sit: illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Center before seating any child on the front Rin a positionthat is as upright as possible passenger seat. with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet on the floor G WARNING The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if Never place anything betweenseat cushion the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces leaning on the armrest. the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or and rear side child restraint system must be the seat cushion are damaged, have the placed entirely on the seat cushion and the necessary repair work carried out at a backrest of the front-passenger seat qualified specialist workshop. backrest. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger recommends that you only use seat seat backrest. accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z 52 Occupant safety
An incorrectly mounted child seatcould cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation of child restraint systems.
The 45 indicator lamp lights up: Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock Safety to position 1 or 2 Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO Rif an adult is seated properly on the front- passenger seat and the OCS classifies the occupant as an adult The 45 indicator lamp goes out after approximately six seconds. If the seat is not occupied and the OCS detects that the front-passenger seat is empty, the 45 indicator lamp will continue to light up. The 45 indicator lamp will not go out. For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 53). Occupant safety 53
Problems with the occupant classification system G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
G WARNING
If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical Safety 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat, do not transport achild on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning. indicator lamp lights up X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified and stays on. specialist workshop. The person on the X Observe the additional messages in the multifunction display front-passenger seat: (Y page 294). Rhas the weight of a typical adult Rhas been determined by the system not to be a child
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning. indicator lamp does not X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the light up and/or does child seat. not stay on. X Check the installation of the child restraint system. The front-passenger X Make sure that no objectsare applying additional weight onto seat is: the seat. Runoccupied X If the 45 indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS Roccupied with a checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. weight up to that of a Do not transport a child on the front-passengerseat as long as typical twelve- the OCS is not functioning. month-old child in a X Observe the additional messages in the multifunction display standard child (Y page 294). restraint system
Z 54 Occupant safety
PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air protection system) pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest is increased. G WARNING Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ The PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact of panorama roof with power tilt/sliding an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as panel and the side windows are closed so their seat belts have been fastened correctly. that only a small gap remains. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE- If the hazardous situation passes without Safety SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You the belt pretensioning. In vehicles with should therefore always drive carefully and multicontour seats, the air pressure in the adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, side bolsters is reduced again. All settings weather and traffic conditions. made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belts are not released: G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but as you adjust the seat. only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the ! Make sure that there are no objects in the locking mechanism is released. footwell or behind the seats when resetting More information about seat belt adjustment, the seats. There is a risk that the seats a convenience function integrated into PRE- and/or the objects could be damaged. SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to adjustment" section (Y page 57). protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Seat belts Rif BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency Important safety notes braking situations G WARNING Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully — on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure all of your passengers are R if, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the properly restrained. You and your passengers radar sensor system detectsanimminent should always wear seat belts. dangerofcollision in certain situations Failure to wear and properly fasten and R in critical driving situations, e.g. when position your seat belt greatly increases your physical limits are exceeded and the risk of injuries and their likely severity in an vehicle understeers or oversteers severely accident. ® PRE-SAFE takes the following measures If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can depending on the hazardous situation be considerably more severe without your detected: seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit Rvehicles with the memory function: the the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an it. You can be seriously injured or killed. unfavorable position. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only protect Occupant safety 55 as intended if the occupants are properly The use of seat belts and infant and child wearing their seat belts. restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states WARNING G RU.S. territories Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Rthe DistrictofColumbia backrestinanexcessively reclined position as Rall Canadianprovinces this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seatbelt in a collision. If you slide under Even where this is not required by law, all it, the seat belt would apply force at the vehicle occupants should correctly fasten Safety abdomen or neck.That could cause serious their seat belts before starting the journey. or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and i See "Children in the vehicle" seat belt provide the best restraint when the (Y page 60) for further information on wearer is in a position that is as upright as infants and children traveling in the vehicle possible and the seat belt is properly as well as on child restraint systems. positioned on the body. Correct use of the seat belts G WARNING Never let more people ride in the vehicle than G WARNING there are seat belts available. Make sure USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly RSeat belts can only work when used restrained with a separate seat belt. Never properly.Never wear seat belts in any other use a seat belt for more than one person at a way than as described in this section, as time. that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident. G WARNING REach occupant should wear their seat belt Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts at all times, because seat belts help reduce that have been subjected to a load in an the likelihood of and potential severity of accident replaced and the anchorages injuries in accidents, including rollovers. checked. The integrated restraint system includes Only use seat belts that have been approved SRS (driver frontair bag, driver's side knee by Mercedes-Benz. bag, front-passengerfront air bag, side Never tamper with seat belts. This can result impact air bags, window curtain air bags for in the unintended deployment of the the side windows), Emergency Tensioning Emergency Tensioning Devices or the failure Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front to deploy when necessary. seat knee bolsters. Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may The system is designed to enhance the severely weaken them. In the event of a protection offered to properly belted collision, they may be unable to provide occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, adequate protection. driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side Have all work carried out only by qualified (side impact air bags, windowcurtain air technicians. Consult a qualified specialist bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed workshop. preset deploymentthresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETDs). RNever wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.
Z 56 Occupant safety
In a frontal crash, yourbody would move RNever place your feet on the instrument too far forward. That would increase the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always chance of head and neck injuries. The seat keep both feet on the floor in front of the belt would also apply too much force to the seat. ribs or abdomen, which could severely RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant injure internal organs such as your liver or restraints, toddler restraints, or children in spleen. booster seats, always follow the child seat Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder manufacturer's instructions. Safety section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not G WARNING touch the neck.Never pass the shoulder Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They portion of the seat belt under your arm. For could tear. this purpose, you can adjust the height of Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the the seat belt outlet. door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on This could damage the seat belt. your hips and not across the abdomen. If Never attempt to make modifications to seat the lap belt is positioned across your belts. This could impair the effectiveness of abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in the seat belts. a crash. RNever wear seat belts over rigid or Fastening seat belts breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as G WARNING these might cause injuries. According to accident statistics, children are RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted safer when properly restrained on the rear snugly. Take special care of this when seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, wearing loose clothing. we strongly recommend that children be RNever use a seat belt for more than one placed in the rear seat whenever possible. person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt Regardless of seating position, children 12 around a person and another person or years old and under must be seated and other objects at the same time. properly secured in an appropriately sized RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a child restraint system or booster seat crash, you would not have the full width of recommended for the size and weight of the the seat belt to distributeimpact forces. child. For additional information, see the The twisted seat belt against yourbody "Children in the vehicle" section. could cause injuries. Achild's risk of serious or fatal injuries is RPregnant women should also always use a significantly increased if the child restraints lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ should be positioned as low as possible on or the child is not properly secured in the child the hips to avoid any possible pressure on restraint. the abdomen. RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible. RCheck your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. Occupant safety 57
Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock. Safety Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a retraction force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt an almostvertical position (Y page 102). adjustment on and off in the on-board X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt computer (Y page 277). sash guide :. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More section of the seat belt across the middle information about PRE-SAFE® can be found of your shoulder and the lap section across under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant your pelvis. protection)" (Y page 54). X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat-belt adjustment:ifnecessary, the Belt height adjustment driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 57). X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 57). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found You can adjust the seat belt height on the under "Special seat belt retractor" frontseats. Adjust the belt to a height that (Y page 62). allows the upper part of the seat belt to be For more information about releasing the seat routed across the center of your shoulder. belt with release button ?, see "Releasing X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. seat belts" (Y page 58). The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :.
Z 58 Occupant safety
X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. lights up for six seconds each time the engine X Release belt sash guide release : and is started. It then goes out if the driver and make sure thatthe belt sash guide has the front passenger have fastened their seat engaged. belts. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when Releasing seat belts the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. The warning tone goes out ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled after approximately six seconds or once the Safety up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue driver's seat belt is fastened. will be trapped in the door or in the seat If after six seconds the driver or front mechanism. This could damage the door, passenger have not fastened their seat belts the door trim panel and the seat belt. and the doors are closed, the 7 seat belt Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill warning lamp lights up: their protective function and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seat workshop. belt is fastened Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is exceeded, a warning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver/front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds again. The warning tone ceases even if the driver or front passenger have still not fastened their seat belt after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt warning lamp stops flashing but remains illuminated. After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the warning tone is reactivated and the 7 seat : Belt sash guide belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehicle ; Seat belt tongue speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). = Buckle The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes ? Release button out if:
X Press release button ? and guide belt Rboth the driver and the front passenger tongue ; back towards belt sash have fastened their seat belts. guide : . or Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open. Belt warning for the driver and front i For more information on the 7 seat passenger belt warning lamp, see "Warning and Regardless of whether the driver's and front- indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, passenger seat belts have already been seat belts" (Y page 317). fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp Occupant safety 59
Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat The belt force limiters for the front seats are belt force limiter synchronized with the front airbags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This G WARNING results in the force exerted on the occupant Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices being distributed overagreater area. that have been deployed must be renewed. The ETDs can only be activated when: For your safety, when disposing of Emergency Rthe ignition is switched on. Tensioning Devices, always observe the R safety instructions. These are available from the restraint systems are operational; see Safety any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 43). R The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on operated reversible pre-tensioners that do each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front. not require replacement after activation. Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on ! If the front-passenger seat is not the front-passenger side occupied, do not engage the seat belt The ETDs on the outside seats in the rear tongue in the buckle on the front- compartment are triggered independently of passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency the lock status of the seat belts. Tensioning Device could be triggered in the The ETDs are triggered depending on the type event of an accident. and severity of an accident: X In order to ensure that the pyrotechnic Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end Emergency Tensioning Devices have not collision, the vehicle decelerates or been triggered, always have the seat belts accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal checked after an accident. direction during the initial stages of the If the Emergency Tensioning Devices have impact been triggered, they must be replaced. Rif, in the event of a side impact, on the side The frontseat belts and the outer seat belts opposite the impact the vehicle in the rear are equipped with Emergency decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a Tensioning Devices and belt force limiters. lateral direction The ETDs on the driver's and front-passenger Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle seat consist of pyrotechnic belt buckle overturns, the system determines that it tensioners and belt anchor tensioners that can provide additional protection are triggered together. The belt buckle If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, tensioner is mounted on the B-pillar and the and a small amount of powder may also be belt anchor installing is mounted on the side released. Only in rare cases will the bang of the seat. After deploying, both tensioners affect your hearing. The powder that is must always be replaced. released generally does not constitute a The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp pulling them close against the body. lights up. The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. When triggered, seat belt force limiters help to reduce the peak forceexerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant.
Z 60 Children in the vehicle
Children in the vehicle RAchild in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously Child restraint systems injured or even killed if the front passenger Important safety notes front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, G WARNING even with the air bag technology installed According to accident statistics, children are in your vehicle. The only means to saferwhen properly restrained in the rear completely eliminate this risk is to never Safety seating positions than in the front seating place a child in a rear-facing child restraint position. Thus, we strongly recommend that in the front seat. We therefore strongly children be placed in the rear seats whenever recommend that you always place a child possible. Regardless of seating position, in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. children 12 years old and under must be RIf you must install a rear-facing child seated and properly secured in an appropriate restraint on the front passenger seat infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster because circumstances require you to do seat recommended for the size and weight of so, make sure the 45indicator the child. lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front The infant or child restraint must be properly passenger front air bag is deactivated. secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat Should the 45indicator lamp not belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and illuminate or go out while the restraint is top tether strap, fully in accordance with the installed, please checkinstallation. child seat manufacturer's instructions. Periodically check the 45indicator Occupants, especially children, should always lamp while driving to make sure the 4 sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt 5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the properly and use an appropriately sized infant 45indicator lamp goes out or restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat remains out, do not transport a child on the recommended for the size and weight of the front passenger seat until the system has child. been repaired. Children can be killed or seriously injured by Achild in a rear-facing child restraint on the an inflating air bag. Note the following front passenger seat will be seriously important information when circumstances injured or even killed if the front passenger require you to place a child in the front front air bag inflates. passenger seat: RIf you have to place a child in a forward- RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag facing child restraint on the front passenger technology designed to deactivate the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible, passenger front air bag in your vehicle use the proper child restraint when the system senses the weight of a recommended for the age, size and weight typical 12-month-old child or less along of the child, and secure child restraint with with the weight of a standard appropriate the vehicle's seat belt according to the child restraint on the front passenger seat. child seat manufacturer's instructions. RFor children larger than the typical WARNING 12-month-old child, the front passenger G front air bag may or may not be activated. If the child restraint system is not fitted Always make sure the 45indicator correctly on a suitable seat, it may not fulfil lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front its protective function. In the event of an passenger front air bag is deactivated. accident, sharp braking or a sudden change Children in the vehicle 61 in direction, the child may not be held G WARNING securely. The child could thus be seriously or When leaving the vehicle, always remove the even fatally injured. For this reason, when SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take fitting a child restraint system, observe the the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. manufacturer's installation instructions and Do not leave children unattended in the the correct use of the child restraint system. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child Child restraint systems should preferably be restraint system, or with access to an fitted on the rear seats.The child is generally unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised better protected there. access to a vehicle could result in an accident Safety The entire base of the child restraint system and/or serious personal injury. The children must always rest on the seat cushion. could: Therefore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle under the child restraint system. Rbe seriously or fatally injured through Only use child restraint systems with the excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold original cover designed for them. Only replace Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with damaged covers with genuine covers. vehicle equipment that can be operated We recommend that you use the child even if the SmartKey is removed from the restraint systems which have been ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, recommended for Mercedes-Benz. such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function G WARNING If children open a door, they could injure other Infants and small children should never share persons or get out of the vehicle and injure a seat belt with another occupant. In the event themselves or be injured by following traffic. of an accident, they could be crushed Do not expose the child restraint system to between the occupant and seat belt. direct sunlight. The child restraint system's Achild's risk of serious or fatal injuries is metal parts, for example, could become very significantly increased if the child restraints hot, and the child could be burned on these are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ parts. or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. G WARNING Children that are too large for a child restraint Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the must travel in seats using normal seat belts. passenger compartment or cargo Position the shoulder belt across the chest compartmentunless they are firmly secured and shoulder, not face or neck.Abooster seat in place. may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until increases a child's risk of injury in the event they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt of fits properly without a booster. Rstrong braking maneuvers When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat Rsudden changes of direction belt to prevent the child restraint from Ran accident becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Further informationonsecure stowage of loads can be found under "Loading guidelines".
Z 62 Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle: Special seat belt retractor RSecure the child with a child or infant seat G WARNING restraint system appropriate to the age and If you release the seat belt when driving, the weight of the child. special seat belt retractor is deactivated. RMake sure that the infant or child is The released seat belt cannot be engaged properly secured at all times while the again while driving, because the inertia reel vehicle is in motion. pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The
Safety Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always child restraint system is no longer properly properly secure all infants and childrenwith secured. There is an increased risk of serious a child or infant seat restraint system for the injury or even fatal injury. trip. Always keep the seat belt of the activated The use of seat belts and infant and child special seat belt retractor engaged when restraint systems is required by law in: driving. Rall 50 states All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are RU.S. territories equipped with a special seat belt retractor. R the DistrictofColumbia When activated, the special seat belt Rall Canadianprovinces retractor ensures that the seat belt will not Infants and children must always be seated in slacken once the child restraint system has an appropriate infant or child restraint system been secured. recommended for the size and weight of the Installing a child restraint system: child.The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with X Always comply with the manufacturer's the manufacturer's instructions. installation instructions. All infant or child restraint systems must meet X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat the following standards: belt retractor. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety buckle. Standards 213 and 225 RCanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards Activating the special seat belt retractor: 213 and 210.2 X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat An information label on the child restraint belt retractor retract it again. system indicates whether it meets these While the seat belt is retracting, you should standards. This information is also provided hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat in the installation instructions supplied with belt retractor is activated. the child restraint system. X Push down on the child restraint system to Always read and follow the manufacturer's take up any slack. instructions when using an infant or child Removing a child restraint system/ restraint system or booster seat. deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior or on the infant or child restraint. X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Children in the vehicle 63
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors the rear seats. Securing rings : for two in the rear LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are installed on the left and right of the rear G WARNING seats. Children that are too large for a child restraint Secure child restraint systems without a must travel in seats usingnormal seat belts. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing Position shoulder belt across the chest and system using the seat belts in the vehicle. shoulder, not face or neck. When installing child restraint systems, you Abooster seat may be necessary to achieve must observe the manufacturer's installation Safety proper seat belt positioning for children over instructions. 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a Top Tether booster. Install the child restraint system in Top Tether anchorages accordance with the manufacturer's G WARNING instructions. Always lock the rear seat backrests in their Attach the child restraint system to both upright position when the rear seats are securing rings. occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat An incorrectly installed child restraint system backrests in their upright position before could come loose during an accident and installing the Top Tether straps or when the seriously or even fatally injure the child. cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure Child restraint systems or child seat securing that rear seat backrestsare secured properly rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. the result of a collision must be replaced. If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the seat backrest could fold forward. The child ! When installing the child restraint system, restraint system is no longer supported make sure that the seat belt for the middle properly or held in position and can no longer seat does not get trapped. The seat belt fulfill its function. This could cause serious or could otherwise be damaged. even fatal injuries.
X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing. ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for specially designed child restraint systems on
Z 64 Children in the vehicle
Ensure that: RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ? as shown. RTop Tether belt B is not twisted. RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear seat backrest ; and cargo compartment cover : if cargo Safety compartment cover : is installed. RTop Tether belt B is routed between the rear seat backrest ; and the cargo net if the cargo net is installed. X Tension Top Tether belt B.Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Move head restraint = back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 106). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correctrouting of Top Tether belt B.
Top Tether provides an additional connection between a child restraint system, secured Child-proof locks with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount, Important safety notes and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. G WARNING The Top Tether anchorages are located on the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the rear side of the rear seat backrests. SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take X Move head restraint = upwards. the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply restraint system, or with access to an with the manufacturer's installation unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised instructions when doing so. access to a vehicle could result in an accident X Route Top Tether belt B under head and/or serious personal injury. The children restraint = between the two head restraint could: bars. Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle X Guide Top Tether belt B downwards Rbe seriously or fatally injured through between cargo compartment cover : and excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold rear seat backrest ;. Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt vehicle equipment that can be operated B into Top Tether anchorage ?. even if the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function Driving safety systems 65
If childrenopen a door, they could injure other Override feature for the rear side persons or get out of the vehicle and injure windows themselves or be injured by following traffic. G WARNING Do not expose the child restraint system to When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, direct sunlight.The child restraint system's activate the override switch. Otherwise, the metal parts, for example, could become very children could be injured, e.g. by trapping hot, and the child could be burned on these themselves in the rear side window. parts. Safety
Child-proof locks for the rear doors G WARNING Children could open a rear door from inside the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries or an accident. Therefore, when children ride in the rear always secure the rear doors with the child-proof locks.
X To activate/deactivate: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is only possible using the switches in the driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, operation is possible using the switches in the rear compartment.
You secure each door individually with the Driving safety systems child-proof locks on the rear doors. Adoor Overview of driving safety systems secured with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. When the In this section, you will find information about vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened the following driving safety systems: from the outside. RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) X To activate: press the child-proof lock (Y page 66) lever up in the direction of arrow :. RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67) X Make sure that the child-proof locks are RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) working properly. (Y page 67) X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock RCOLLISION PREVENTION lever down in the direction of arrow ;. ASSIST(Y page 68) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (Y page 71) REBD (electronic brake force distribution) (Y page 73) RADAPTIVE BRAKE(Y page 73)
Z 66 Driving safety systems
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73) Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 75) immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also If you fail to adapt your driving style or become inoperative. Observe the information become distracted, the driving safety on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 318) and
Safety systems can neither reduce the risk of display messages which may be shown in the accident nor override the laws of physics. instrument cluster (Y page 283). Driving safety systems are merely aids ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way designed to assist driving. You are that the wheels do not lock when you brake. responsible for the distance to the vehicle in This allows you to continue steering the front, for vehicle speed and for braking in vehicle when braking. good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph conditions and maintain asafe distance from (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if you only brake gently. i The driving safety systems described only The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the work as effectively as possible when there instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is adequate contact between the tires and is switched on. It goes out when the engine is the road surface. Please pay special running. attention to the noteson tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths, Braking etc. (Y page 398). In wintry driving conditions, always use X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, brake pedal vigorously until the braking snow chains. Only in this way will the situation is over. driving safety systems described in this X To make a full brake application: section work as effectively as possible. depress the brake pedal with full force. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) The pulsating brake pedal can be an Important safety notes indication of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a reminder to take extra care i Observe the "Importantsafety notes" while driving. section(Ypage 66). G WARNING Off-road ABS If ABSis faulty, the wheels could lock when An ABS system specifically suited to off-road braking. The steerability and braking terrain is activated automatically once the off- characteristics may be severely impaired. road program is activated on: Additionally, further driving safety systems R are deactivated. There is an increased danger vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD of skidding and accidents. package (Y page 248) Rvehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 248) Driving safety systems 67
At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in wheels lock cyclically during braking.The hazardous situations at speeds greater than digging-in effect achieved in the process 4 mph (7 km/h). reduces the stopping distance on off-road At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph terrain. This limits steering capability. (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary objects are stopped or parked vehicles. BAS (Brake Assist System) To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUS i Observe the "Important safety notes" calculates the brake force necessary if: Safety section (Y page 66). Ryou approach an obstacle, and G WARNING RBAS PLUS has detected arisk of collision If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance At aspeedless than 20 mph(30 km/h): if in an emergency braking situation is you depress the brake pedal, BASPLUS is increased. There is a risk of an accident. activated. The increase in brake pressure will In an emergency braking situation, depress be carried out at the last possible moment. the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents At a speed greater than 20 mph the wheels from locking. (30 km/h):ifyou depress the brake pedal sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the BAS operates in emergency braking brake pressure to a value adapted to the situations. If you depress the brake pedal traffic situation. quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking If BAS PLUS demands particularly high force, thus shortening the stopping distance. braking force, preventative passenger The brakes will function as usual once you protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. activated simultaneously. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System ABS prevents the wheels from locking. PLUS) BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes i Observe the "Important safety notes" function as usual, if: section (Y page 66). Ryou release the brake pedal. BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. collision. For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the Rno obstacle is detected in front of your radar sensor system must be: vehicle. R activated (Y page 277) If you have activated DSR (Y page 246), BAS Roperational PLUS is likewise deactivated. With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS G WARNING PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify time. objects and complex traffic situations. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, is a risk of an accident. BAS PLUS will not be available. The brake system is still available with complete brake Always pay careful attention to the traffic boosting effect and BAS. situation and be ready to brake.
Z 68 Driving safety systems
In particular, the detection of obstacles can Distance warning function be impaired if: Important safety notes Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors. i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radarsources G WARNING Rthere are strong radar reflections, for The distance warning function does not react:
Safety example in parking garages Rto people or animals Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a Rto oncoming vehicles motorbike Rto crossing traffic R a vehicle traveling in front on a different line Rwhen cornering relative to the center of your vehicle Thus, the distance warning function cannot G WARNING provide a warning in all critical situations. BAS PLUS does not react: There is a risk of an accident. Rto people or animals Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic The distance warning function cannot always Rwhen cornering clearly identify objects and complex traffic As aresult, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all situations. critical situations. There is a risk of an In such cases, the distance warning function accident. may: Always pay careful attention to the traffic Rgive an unnecessary warning situation and be ready to brake. Rnot give a warning Following damage to the frontend of the Always pay careful attention to the traffic vehicle, have the configurationand operation situation and do not rely solely on the of the radarsensors checked at a qualified distance warning function. specialist workshop. This also applies to Function collisions at low speeds where there is no X To activate/deactivate: activate or visible damage to the frontofthe vehicle. deactivate the distance warning function in the on-board computer (Y page 272). COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST When the distance warning function is activated, the multifunction display shows General notes the Ä symbol, as long as the HOLD COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of function is not switched on (Y page 207). On Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance vehicles with Active Parking Assist, the warning function, which are described in the Ä symbol is displayed when P is engaged following. or you are driving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). The distance warning function can help you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a collision. If the distance warning Driving safety systems 69 function detects that there is a risk of a Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a collision, you will be warned visually and motorbike acoustically.The distance warning function Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line cannot prevent a collision without your relative to the center of your vehicle intervention. Following damage to the front end of the Starting at a speed of around 20 mph vehicle, have the configuration and operation (30 km/h), this function warns you if you of the radar sensor checked at a qualified rapidly approach a vehicle in front.An specialist workshop. This also applies to intermittentwarning tone will then sound and collisions at low speeds where there is no Safety the · distance warning lamp will light up visible damage to the front of the vehicle. in the instrument cluster. X Brake immediately in order to increase the Adaptive Brake Assist distance from the vehicle in front. i Observe the "Important safety notes" or section (Y page 66). X Take evasive action, provideditis safe to do so. G WARNING Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly For the distance warning function to assist identify objects and complex traffic you when driving, the function must be situations. In these cases, Adaptive Brake activated in the on-board computer and be Assist may not intervene. There is a risk of an operational (Y page 272). accident. Due to the nature of the system, particularly Always pay careful attention to the traffic complicated driving conditions may cause the situation and be ready to brake. system to display unnecessary warnings. With the help of the radar sensor system, the G WARNING distance warning function can detect Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Rto people or animals At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), the Rto oncoming vehicles distance warning function may also detect Rto crossing traffic stationary obstacles, for example stopped or Rto stationary obstacles parked vehicles. Rwhen cornering If you approach an obstacle and the distance As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not warning function detects a risk of a collision, intervene in all critical conditions. There is a the system will initially alert you both visually risk of an accident. and acoustically. Always pay careful attention to the traffic In particular, the detection of obstacles can situation and be ready to brake. be impaired if: Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking covering the sensors assistance in hazardous situations at speeds Rsnow or heavy rain greater than 20 mph (30 km/h) and uses radar sensor technology to assess the traffic Rinterference by other radar sources situation. Rthere are strong radar reflections, for With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the example in parking garages distance warning signal can detect obstacles
Z 70 Driving safety systems
thatare in the path of yourvehicle for an Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a extended period of time. motorbike Should you approach an obstacle and Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of relative to the center of your vehicle collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the Following damage to the front end of the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end vehicle, have the configuration and operation collision. Should you apply the brakes of the radar sensor checked at a qualified vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will specialist workshop. This also applies to Safety automatically increase the braking force to a collisions at low speeds where there is no level suitable for the traffic conditions. visible damage to the front of the vehicle. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) The brakes will work normally again if: General notes Ryou release the brake pedal. i Observe the "Important safety notes" R there is no longer any danger of a rear-end section (Y page 66). collision. ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, Rno obstacle is detected in frontofyour i.e. power transmission between the tires and vehicle. the road surface. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating If Adaptive Brake Assist requires particularly from the direction desired by the driver, one high brake pressure, preventive passenger or more wheels are braked to stabilize the ® protection measures (PRE-SAFE ) are vehicle. The engine output is also modified to deployed simultaneously. keep the vehicle on the desired course within Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® of reacting to moving objects that have can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. already been recognized as such at least once over the period of observation. Adaptive ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Brake Assist does not react to stationary obstacles. ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due Traction control brakes the drive wheels to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, individually if they spin. This enables you to the brake system remains available with full pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, brake boosting effect and BAS. for example if the road surface is slippery on In particular, the detection of obstacles can one side. In addition, more drive torque is be impaired if there is: transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else covering the sensors Traction control remains active, even if you deactivate ESP®. Rsnow or heavy rain Rinterference by other radar sources Rthere are strong radar reflections, for example in parking garages Driving safetysystems 71
In appropriate driving situations, activate the If the ÷ warning lamp and the å off-road program: warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not X Vehicles withoutthe ON&OFFROAD available due to a malfunction. package (Y page 248) Observe the information on warning lamps X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 321) and displaymessages which (Y page 248) may be shown in the instrument cluster (Y page 283).
Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction i Only use wheels with the recommended Safety System) tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. A4ETS systemspecifically suited to off-road terrain is activated automatically once the off- ® road program is activated on: Characteristics of ESP Rvehicles without the ON&OFFROAD General information package (Y page 248) ESP® is activated automatically when the Rvehicles with the ON&OFFROADpackage engine is started. (Y page 248) If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. Important safety notes If ESP® intervenes: G WARNING X Do not deactivate ESP® under any If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to circumstances. stabilize the vehicle.Additionally, further X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far driving safety systems are deactivated. This as necessary when pulling away. increases the risk of skidding and an accident. X Adapt your driving style to suit the ® Drive on carefully. Have ESP checked at a prevailing road and weather conditions. qualified specialist workshop. ECO start/stop function ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: only operate the The ECO start/stop function switches the vehicle for a maximum of ten seconds on a engine off automatically when the vehicle brake test dynamometer. Switch off the stops moving. The engine starts ignition. automatically when the driver wants to pull ® Application of the brakes by ESP may away again. ESP® remains in its previously otherwise destroy the brake system. selected status. Example: if ESP® was ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or deactivated before the enginewas switched performance tests may only be carried out off, ESP® remains deactivated when the on a 2-axle dynamometer. Before you engine is switched on again. operate the vehicle on such a dynamometer, please consult a qualified Deactivating/activating ESP® workshop. You could otherwise damage the drive train or the brake system. Important safety notes ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp You can selectbetween the following states ® in the instrument cluster lights up of ESP : continuously when the engineis running. RESP® is activated. RESP® is deactivated.
Z 72 Driving safetysystems
G WARNING the instrument cluster flashes. In such ® If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer situations, ESP will not stabilize the vehicle. stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased If you deactivate ESP®: risk of skidding and an accident. RESP® no longer improves driving stability. ® Only deactivate ESP in the situations Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and described in the following. the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action, which It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the Safety provides better grip. following situations: RETS/4ETS is still active. Rwhen using snow chains RESP® still provides support when you Rin deep snow brake. Ron sand or gravel ® i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations Off-road ESP described above no longer apply.ESP® will An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road otherwise not be able to stabilize the terrain is activated automatically once the off- vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a road program is activated on: wheel starts to spin. Rvehicles without the ON&OFFROAD ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an package (Y page 248) ® extended period with ESP deactivated. Rvehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. (Y page 248) Deactivating/activating ESP® Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if there is oversteering or understeering, thus improving traction.
ESP® trailer stabilization G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving. Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. X To switch off: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the Always adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. instrument cluster lights up.
X To switchon: press button :. If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the combination) begins to lurch, you can only instrument cluster goes out. stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated In this situation, ESP® assists you and can If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels detect if the vehicle/trailer combination start to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting the engine output until Driving safety systems 73 the vehicle/trailercombination has If PRE-SAFE® Brake is to aid you, the radar stabilized. sensor system must be:
Trailer stabilization is active above speeds of Ractivated (Y page 277) about 37 mph (60 km/h). Roperational ® Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP is With the help of the radar sensor system, deactivated because of a malfunction. PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended
period of time. Safety EBD (electronic brake force distribution) PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or i Observe the "Important safety notes" reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- section (Y page 66). SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, G WARNING you will be warned visually and acoustically ® If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE still lock, e.g. under full braking. This Brake cannot prevent a collision without your increases the risk of skidding and an accident. intervention. You should therefore adapt your driving style Starting at a speed of around to the different handling characteristics. Have 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if the brake system checked at a qualified you very quickly approach a vehicle in front. specialist workshop. An intermittent warning tone will then sound and the · distance warning lamp will light Observe information regarding indicator and up in the instrument cluster. warning lamps (Y page 319) as well as X Brake immediately in order to increase the display messages (Y page 285). distance from the vehicle in front. EBD monitors and controls the brake or pressure on the rear wheels to improve X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do driving stability while braking. so. From a speed of approximately ADAPTIVE BRAKE 4 mph (7 km/h), if the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the vehicle and offers increased braking comfort. In automatically at speeds up to approximately addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE 124 mph (200 km/h). BRAKE also has the HOLD function Due to the nature of the system, particularly (Y page 207) and hill start assist complicated driving conditions may cause (Y page 161). unnecessary warnings or the unnecessary intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. PRE-SAFE® Brake You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- SAFE® Brake at any time by: i Observe the "Important safety notes" Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further section (Y page 66). Ractivating kickdown PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles Rreleasing the brake pedal with DISTRONIC PLUS.
Z 74 Driving safety systems
The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake is In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: ended automatically if: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle. brake the vehicle Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end Rnot give a warning or intervene collision. There is a risk of an accident. Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in Always pay particular attention to the traffic front of your vehicle. situation and be ready to brake, especially if Safety If you have activated DSR (Y page 246), PRE- PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the SAFE® Brake is deactivated. intervention in a non-critical driving situation. At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h),PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect In particular, the detection of obstacles can stationary objects.Examples of stationary be impaired if: objects are stopped or parked vehicles. Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® covering the sensors Brake detects a riskofacollision, the system Rsnow or heavy rain will alert you both visuallyand acoustically. If Rinterference by other radar sources you do not brake or take evasive action, the Rthere are strong radar reflections, for system will warn you by automatically braking example in parking garages the vehicle gently.Ifthere is an increased risk R of collision, preventative passenger a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are R activated (Y page 54). If, at speeds over a vehicle traveling in front on a different line 20 mph (30 km/h), a risk of collision remains relative to the center of your vehicle and you do not brake, take evasive action or G WARNING significantly accelerate, automatic braking PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: may be performed up to alevel of automatic emergency braking. Automatic emergency Rto people or animals braking is not performed until immediately Rto oncoming vehicles prior to an accident that can no longer be Rto crossing traffic avoided. Rwhen cornering G WARNING As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your give warnings nor intervene in all critical vehicle by a partial application of the brakes situations. There is a risk of an accident. if a danger of collision is detected. There may Always pay careful attention to the traffic be a collision unless you also brake. situation and be ready to brake. Automatic emergency brakingcannot prevent a collision.There is a risk of an accident. In order to maintain an appropriate distance Always apply the brakes yourself and try to from the vehicle in front and thus prevent a take evasive action. collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. X To activate/deactivate: activate or G WARNING deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on- PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly board computer (Y page 272). identify objects and complex traffic When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the conditions. Ä symbol appears in the multifunction display as long as the HOLD function is Theft deterrent locking system 75
deactivated (Y page 207). On vehicles with Anyone can start the engine if a valid Active Parking Assist, the Ä symbol is SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. displayed when P is engaged or you are i The immobilizer is always deactivated driving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). when you start the engine. Following damage to the frontend of the In the event that the engine cannot be vehicle, have the configurationand operation started when the starter battery is fully of the radarsensors checked at a qualified charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. specialist workshop. This also applies to
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Safety collisions at low speeds where there is no Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the visible damage to the frontofthe vehicle. USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
STEER CONTROL ATA (anti-theft alarm system) i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering assistance is provided in particular if: Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey Rthe vehicle starts to skid or KEYLESS-GO. Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receive system is armed after approximately steering support from STEER CONTROL. 15 seconds. Power steering will, however, continue to function. X To switch off using the SmartKey: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey. or Theft deterrent locking system X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Immobilizer X To switch off using KEYLESS-GO: unlock the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO. X To activate with the SmartKey: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the X Press the Start/Stop button on the ignition off and open the driver's door. dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the being started without the correct SmartKey. alarm system is armed and you open: When leaving the vehicle, always take the Ra door SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key
Z 76 Theft deterrent locking system
Rthe tailgate Rthe hood X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarmis switched off. or
Safety X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off.
X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. i If the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, the mbrace (USA only) or TELE AID (Canada only) emergency call system initiates a call to the Customer Assistance Center automatically. The emergency call system initiates the call provided that: Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/ TELEAID Service. Rthe mbrace/TELEAID Service has been activated properly. Rthe required mobile phone, power supply and GPS are available. 77
Useful information ...... 78 SmartKey ...... 78 Doors ...... 84 Cargo compartment ...... 87 Side windows ...... 92 Sliding sunroof ...... 96 Opening and closing 78 SmartKey
Useful information G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take models and all standard and optional the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. equipment of your vehicle available at the Do not leave children unsupervised in the time of publication of the Operator's vehicle, even if they are secured in a child Manual. Country-specific differences are restraint system, and do not give them access possible. Please note that your vehicle may to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised not be equipped with all features access to a vehicle could result in an accident described. This also applies to safety- and/or serious personal injury. They could: related systems and functions. Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts i Read the information on qualified Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme specialist workshops: (Y page 27). heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in SmartKey operation even after the SmartKey has Important safety notes been removed from the ignition, such as the Opening and closing seat adjustment, steering wheel G WARNING adjustment or memory function. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, If children open a door, they could cause they could: severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if Ropen the doors, thus endangering other they get out of the vehicle, they could injure people or road users. themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to Roperate the vehicle's equipment. direct sunlight. The child restraint system's Additionally, children could set the vehicle in metal parts, for example, could become very motion if, for example, they: hot, and a child could be burned on these Rrelease the parking brake. parts. Rshift the automatic transmission out of parking position P. G WARNING Rstarting the engine. If you attach heavy or large objects to the There is a risk of an accident and injury. SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This When leaving the vehicle, always take the could cause the engine to be switched off. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never There is a risk of an accident. leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of Do not attach any heavy or large objects to reach of children. the SmartKey. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. SmartKey 79
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. vicinity of powerful electrical installations. When locking, they flash three times. RDo not keep the SmartKey: You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 276). - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case computer (Y page 275). This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the KEYLESS-GO temperature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be General notes recognized. Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. SmartKey functions Opening and closing Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the : & To lock the vehicle corresponding door handle must not be ; F To open/close the tailgate greater than 3 ft (1 m). = % To unlock the vehicle KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically X To unlockcentrally: press the % establishing a radio connection between the button. vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens: If you do not open thevehicle within Rwhen the external door handles are approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: touched Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rwhen starting the engine Rthe theft deterrent locking system is Rwhile the vehicle is in motion armed again.
X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap
Z 80 SmartKey
The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the X To unlockthe vehicle: touch the inner inner surface of the door handle on the surface of the door handle. driver's door. X To lockthe vehicle: touch sensor X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface :. surface of the door handle on the front- passenger door or the rear door. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles
Opening and closing extended period. (Y page 79). Further information on the convenience X closing feature (Y page 93). To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons If you pull on the handleofthe tailgate, only the cargo compartment of the vehicle is simultaneously for approximately six unlocked. seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 81).
Changing the settings of the locking system Mechanical key You can change the settings of the locking General notes system. This means that only the driver's door If the vehicle can no longer be locked or and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the unlocked with the SmartKey, use the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you mechanical key. frequently travel on your own. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and X To change the setting: press and hold open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm down the % and & buttons system will be triggered (Y page 75). simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp There are several ways to turn off the alarm: flashes twice (Y page 81). X To turn the alarm off with the i If the setting of the locking system is SmartKey: press the % or & button changed within the signal range of the on the SmartKey. vehicle, pressing the & or % button: or Rlocks or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Runlocks the vehicle or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS- GO: press the Start/Stop button in the SmartKey 81
ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you have vehicle. the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist or workshop. X Lockorunlock the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO.The SmartKey must be outside the Checking the battery vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
X Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery Opening and closing checklamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does notlight up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 81). i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal receptionrange of the vehicle, : Release catch pressing the & or % button: ; Mechanical key Rlocks or R X Push release catch : in the direction of unlocks the vehicle the arrow and at the same time remove i You can get a battery at any qualified mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. specialist workshop.
Replacing the battery SmartKey battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Important safety notes X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.
Z 82 SmartKey
X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.
: Battery compartment cover ; Mechanical key
X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment
Opening and closing cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :.
= Battery
X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insertthe new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. SmartKey 83
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 81) and replace it if necessary (Y page 81). X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using the mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using the mechanical key. Opening and closing X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work:
X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 81) and replace it if necessary (Y page 81). X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using the mechanical key.
You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist SmartKey. workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Z 84 Doors
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 387). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be Adoor is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as started using KEYLESS- easily. GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.
Opening and closing the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Doors G WARNING Important safety notes When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take G WARNING the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Do not leave children unsupervised in the they could: vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access Ropen the doors, thus endangering other to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised people or road users. access to a vehicle could result in an accident Rget out and disrupt traffic. and/or serious personal injury. They could: R operate the vehicle's equipment. Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme motion if, for example, they: heat or cold Rrelease the parking brake. Rinjure themselves or have an accident with Rshift the automatic transmission out of vehicle equipment that may still be in parking position P. operation even after the SmartKey has Rstarting the engine. been removed from the ignition, such as the There is a risk of an accident and injury. seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never If children open a door, they could cause leave children or animals unattended in the severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of they get out of the vehicle, they could injure reach of children. Doors 85
themselves when doing so or be seriously or X Front door: pull door handle ;. evenfatally injured by any passing traffic. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops Do not expose the child restraint system to up. The door is unlocked and can be direct sunlight.The child restraint system's opened. metal parts, for example, could become very X Rear door: pull up locking knob : on the hot, and a child could be burned on these relevant rear door. parts. The rear door is unlocked and can be opened. G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or cargo Centrally locking and unlocking the compartmentunless they are firmly secured vehicle from the inside in place. You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo from the inside. The buttons are located on increases a child's risk of injury in the event both frontdoors. of Rstrong braking maneuvers Opening and closing Rsudden changes of direction Ran accident
Unlocking and opening doors from the inside You can open a door from inside the vehicle evenifithas been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they : To unlock are notsecured by the child-proof locks ; To lock (Y page 65). X To unlock: press button :. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a X To lock: press button ;. door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft If the front-passenger door is closed, the alarm system. Switch off the alarm vehicle locks. (Y page 75). Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.
Z 86 Doors
If the vehicle has been locked using the Power closing feature locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid opened from the inside: into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had X To power-close adoor: push the door into previously been fully unlocked the lock up to the first detent position. Ronly the door which has been opened form Power closing will pull the door fully closed. the inside is unlocked if only the driver's X To power-close the tailgate: lightly press door had been previously unlocked the tailgate downwards. Power closing will pull the tailgate fully Automatic locking feature closed.
Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with
Opening and closing the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlockand open the driver's door, the anti-theftalarm system will be triggered (Y page 75). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). : To deactivate X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of ; To activate the driver's door as far as it will go. X To deactivate: press and hold button : for aboutfive seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: 1 To unlock Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1. Rthe vehicle is being towed. The door is unlocked. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove You can also switch the automatic locking it. function on and off using the on-board X Insert the mechanical key into the computer (Y page 276). SmartKey. Cargo compartment 87
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) Cargo compartment If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the Important safety notes SmartKey, use the mechanical key. G WARNING X Open the driver's door. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust X Close the front-passenger door, the rear gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate doors and the tailgate. is open when the engine is running, X Press the locking button (Y page 85). particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust X Checkwhether the locking knobs on the fumes could enter the passenger front-passenger door and the rear doors compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. are still visible. Press down the locking Turn off the engine before opening the knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 85). tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the G WARNING SmartKey (Y page 80). When leaving the vehicle, always remove the X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the driver's door as far as it will go. the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the Opening and closing vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in 1 To lock operation even after the SmartKey has X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far been removed from the ignition, such as the as it will go to position 1. seat adjustment, steering wheel X Turn the mechanical key back and remove adjustment or memory function. it. If children open a door, they could cause X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if are locked. they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to i If you lock the vehicle as described above, direct sunlight. The child restraint system's the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- metal parts, for example, could become very theft alarm system is not armed. hot, and a child could be burned on these parts.
Z 88 Cargo compartment
G WARNING Opening/closing from outside Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the Opening passenger compartment or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of Rstrong braking maneuvers Rsudden changes of direction Ran accident
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened.Therefore, make sure X Press the % button on the SmartKey. that there is sufficient clearance above and X Pull handle :. behind the tailgate. X Raise the tailgate.
Opening and closing i Tailgate opening dimensions Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate: if (Y page 452). you pull handle : and then release it, the Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo tailgate opens automatically. compartment. You could otherwise lock yourself out. Closing Vehicles without the EASY-PACK tailgate: the tailgate can be: G WARNING Ropened and closed manually from outside To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the cargo Runlocked from inside with the emergency compartmentopening when closing the release tailgate. Be especially careful when small For vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate children are around. you can: Rclose the tailgate manually from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from inside Runlock the tailgate from inside with the emergency release Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate
X Pull the tailgate down using recess :. X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. Cargo compartment 89 i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the blocks or restricts the tailgate during the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not closing process, the tailgate opens again lock. automatically.
Opening the tailgate automatically Opening/closing automatically from outside You can open the tailgate automatically with the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate. Important safety notes X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the tailgate opens. G WARNING or Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be and let it go again immediately. standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There Closing the tailgate automatically is a risk of injury. G WARNING Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process. Parts of the body could become trapped Opening and closing during automatic closing of the tailgate. Use one of the following options to stop the Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be closing process: standing in the closing area or may enter the Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. closing area during the closing process. There Rpress the remote operating switch on the is a risk of injury. driver's door. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the Rpress the closing or locking button on the closing area during the closing process. tailgate. Use one of the following options to stop the Rpull the handle on the tailgate. closing process: Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. G WARNING Rpress the remote operating switch on the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust driver's door. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate Rpress the closing or locking button on the is open when the engine is running, tailgate. particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger Rpull the handle on the tailgate. compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 452). i The tailgate is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object
Z 90 Cargo compartment
Opening/closing automatically from inside Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There Closing and locking button (example:vehicle with is a risk of injury. EASY-PACK tailgate and KEYLESS-GO) Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the : Closing button closing area during the closing process. ; Locking button Use one of the following options to stop the X To close: press closing button : on the closing process: tailgate. Rpress the F button on the SmartKey.
Opening and closing or Rpress the remote operating switch on the X Press and hold the F button on the driver's door. SmartKey until the tailgate closes. Rpress the closing or locking button on the Vehicles with the EASY-PACK tailgate and tailgate. KEYLESS-GO: you can simultaneously close Rpull the handle on the tailgate. and lock the tailgate. G WARNING X Press locking button ; on the tailgate. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate the vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks. is open when the engine is running, All the doors must be shut and the particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust SmartKey located in the vicinity of the fumes could enter the passenger tailgate. compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. i The tailgate cannot be opened and closed Turn off the engine before opening the with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. the ignition. If the tailgate touches an objectwhile ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the closing, the closing procedure is rear when opened. Therefore, make sure interrupted and the tailgate reopens. that there is sufficient clearance above and i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the behind the tailgate. cargo compartment, the tailgate will not i Tailgate opening dimensions lock. (Y page 452). i The tailgate is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the tailgate during the closing process, the tailgate opens again automatically. Cargo compartment 91
Opening and closing (Y page 89) in the tailgate or pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate again. X To store the position: press and hold the closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening.
Deactivating
X Press and hold the closing button (Y page 89) in the tailgate until you hear You can open and close the tailgate from the two short tones. driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. X To open: pull remote operating switch : Tailgate emergency release for the tailgate until the tailgate opens. X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 Important safety notes Opening and closing or 2 in the ignition lock. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the X Press remote operating switch for rear when opened. Therefore, make sure tailgate : until the tailgate is closed. that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions Limiting the opening angle of the (Y page 452). tailgate If the tailgate can no longer be opened from Important safety notes outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. ! Make sure there is sufficientclearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the opening angle. The tailgate could otherwise Opening be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside.
Activating You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 4in (10 cm) before the stop. This could be useful, for example, if there is insufficientspace above the tailgate. X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on X Take the mechanical key out of the the tailgate. SmartKey (Y page 80). X To stop the opening procedure at the X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening desired position: press the closing button in paneling :.
Z 92 Side windows
X Turn mechanical key ;90° clockwise. G WARNING X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of The reversing feature does not react: the arrow and open the tailgate. Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rover the last 4mmofthe closing movement Side windows Rduring resetting Important safety notes Rwhen closing the side window again manually immediately after automatic G WARNING reversing While opening the side windows, body parts This means that the reversing feature cannot could become trapped between the side prevent someone being trapped in these window and the door frame as the side situations. There is a risk of injury. window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close Make sure that nobody touches the side proximity during the closing procedure. If window during the opening procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch somebody becomes trapped, release the to open the side window again. switch or pull the switch to close the side Opening and closing window again.
G WARNING Opening and closing the side windows While opening the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. The switches for all side windows are located There is a risk of injury. on the driver's door. There is also a switch on Make sure that no body parts are in close each door for the corresponding side window. proximity during the closing procedure. If The switches on the driver's door take somebody becomes trapped, release the precedence. switch or press the switch to open the side window again.
G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. : Front left ; Front right The side windows are equipped with an = Rear right automatic reversing feature. If an object ? Rear left blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again automatically. Side windows 93
X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding ignition lock. panel are in the desired position. X To open: press the corresponding switch. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the X To close: pull the corresponding switch. roller sunblinds are opened first. i If you press the switch beyond the point X Press and hold the % button again until of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding corresponding direction.You can stop panel is in the desired position. automatic operation by operating the X To interrupt convenience opening: switch again. release the % button. i You can continue to operate the side windows after you switch off the engine or Convenience closing feature remove the SmartKey. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the Important safety notes driver's or front-passenger door is opened. G WARNING i The side windows cannot be operated When the convenience closing feature is from the rear when the override feature for Opening and closing operating, parts of the body could become the side windows is activated (Y page 65). trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of Convenience opening injury. Observe the complete closing procedure General notes when the convenience closing feature is You can ventilate the vehicle before you start operating. Make sure that no body parts are driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to in close proximity during the closing carry out the following functions procedure. simultaneously: When you lock the vehicle, you can Runlock the vehicle simultaneously: Ropen the side windows Rclose the side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roof with power tilt/sliding panel roller sunblinds On vehicles with a panorama roof with power Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the driver's seat roller sunblinds. i The convenience opening feature can Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: only be operated using the SmartKey. The RRelease the & button to interrupt the SmartKey must be close to the driver's closing procedure. door handle. RPress and hold the % button to open. Convenience opening
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the side windows and the sliding sunroof or the
Z 94 Side windows
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior door handle to interrupt the closing procedure. RTo open, pull the same door handle immediately and hold it firmly. The door windows and the sliding sunroof will open for as long as the door handle is held but the door is not opened. i Notes on the automatic reversing feature for: X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle until the side windows and the Rthe side window (Y page 92) sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 96) power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. i Using the SmartKey Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. The SmartKey must be close to the driver's Opening and closing X Make sure that all the side windows and the door handle. sliding sunroof or panorama roof with X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's power tilt/sliding panel are closed. door handle. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power X Press and hold the & button until the tilt/sliding panel: side windows and the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the panel are fully closed. door handle again until theroller sunblinds X Make sure that all the side windows and the of the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding sunroof or panorama roof with sliding panel close. power tilt/sliding panel are closed. X To interrupt convenience closing: On vehicles with a panorama roof with power release recessed sensor surface : on the tilt/sliding panel: door handle. X Press and hold the & button againuntil the rollersunblinds of thepanorama roof Resetting the side windows with power tilt/sliding panel close. If a side window can no longer be closed fully, X To interruptconvenience closing: you must reset it. release the & button. X Close all the doors. Using KEYLESS-GO X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the X Pull the corresponding switch on the door vehicle. All the doors must be closed. control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 92) X Hold the switch for an additional second. Side windows 95
If the side window opens again slightly: X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 92). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeatthe steps above again. Opening and closing
Z 96 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the side windows G WARNING Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows.
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Aside window cannot X Remove the objects. be closed because it is X Close the side window. blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.
Aside window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you slightly: cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding Opening and closing switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapmentfeature.
Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding switch briefly in any direction sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding The opening or closing procedure will be sunroof" refers to both types of sliding stopped. sunroof. G WARNING G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, could become trapped, particularly if they are body parts in close proximity could become left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. trapped. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Make sure that no body parts are in close SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never proximity during the opening and closing leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. procedures. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during Sliding sunroof 97 the closing process, the sliding sunroofopens Operating the sliding sunroof again automatically. Opening and closing G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rover the last 4mmofthe closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these Overhead control panel situations. There is a risk of injury. : To raise Make sure that no body parts are in close ; To open proximity during the closing procedure.
= To close/lower Opening and closing If somebody becomes trapped: X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Rrelease the switch immediately, or ignition lock. Rduring automatic operation, push the X Press or pull the 2 switch in the switch briefly in any direction corresponding direction. The closing process is stopped. i If you press the 2 switch beyond the ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free point of resistance, an automatic opening/ of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions closing process is started in the may occur. corresponding direction. You can stop Do not allow anything to protrude from the automatic operation by operating the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could switch again. be damaged. When opening and raising the roof, automatic operation is only available if the i Resonance noises can occur in addition sliding sunroof is in the closed position. to the usual airflow noises when the sliding The sun protection cover automatically opens sunroof is open. They are caused by minor along with the sliding sunroof. You can open pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. or close the sun protection cover manually Change the position of the sliding sunroof when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. or open a side window. The noise will be reduced or eliminated. i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front- passenger door is opened.
Z 98 Sliding sunroof
Resetting closing process is started in the corresponding direction.You can stop ! If the sliding sunroof still cannotbe automatic operation by operating the opened or closed fully after resetting, switch again. contact a qualified specialist workshop. The automatic raising feature is available Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move only when the sliding sunroof is closed. smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Operating the roller sunblinds for the X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear panorama roof with power tilt/sliding (Y page 97). panel X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another Important safety notes second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be G WARNING fully opened and closed again (Y page 97). When opening or closing the roller sunblind, X If this is not the case, repeat the steps parts of the body could be trapped between above again. the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding
Opening and closing sunroof. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no Operating the panorama roof with parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller power tilt/sliding panel sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.
The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Overhead control panel is closed. : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open (Y page 99). X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 2 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ Sliding sunroof 99
Opening and closing the roller sunblinds
Overhead control panel : To open Overhead control panel ; To open : To open = To close ; To open Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/ = To close sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly. ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the X Press or pull the 2 switch in the ignition lock. corresponding direction. X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point i If you press the 2 switch beyond the of resistance in the direction of arrow = point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the until the panorama roof with power tilt/ corresponding direction. You can stop sliding panel is fully closed. automatic operation by operating the X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an switch again. additional second. X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point Resetting the panorama roof with of resistance in the direction of arrow = power tilt/sliding panel and the roller until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. sunblinds X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/ additional second. sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannot X Make sure that the panorama roof with be fully opened or closed after resetting, power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 98) and the contact a qualified specialist workshop. roller sunblinds (Y page 99) can be fully opened again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.
Z 100 Sliding sunroof
Problems with the sliding sunroof G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. Opening and closing Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens cannot be closed and again slightly: you cannot see the X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 cause. switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 101
Useful information ...... 102 Correct driver's seat position ...... 102 Seats ...... 103 Steering wheel ...... 110 Mirrors ...... 113 Memory function ...... 116 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 102 Correct driver's seat position
Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 103). i This Operator's Manual describes all X Make sure that seat = is adjusted models and all standard and optional properly. equipment of your vehicle available at the Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 104) time of publication of the Operator's When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag not be equipped with all features as possible. described. This also applies to safety- Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. related systems and functions. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. i Read the information on qualified Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost specialist workshops: (Y page 27). vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is G WARNING adjusted properly. You could lose control of your vehicle if you When doing so, make sure that you have do the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by steering wheel or mirrors the center of the head restraint.Also make Rfastenthe seat belt sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is as There is a risk of an accident. close to the head restraint as possible.This Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, will be the case if the head restraint is
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors steering wheel and mirror and fasten your adjusted correctly (Y page 105). seat belt before starting the engine. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 110). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 110) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 111) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly. X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 54). Seats 103
X Checkwhether you have fastened seat accidentally press the electrical seat belt ; properly (Y page 56). adjustment buttons and become trapped. The seat belt should: There is a risk of injury. Rfit snugly across your body While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under Rbe routed across the middle of your the lever assembly of the seat adjustment shoulder system. Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints G WARNING X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the way that you have a good view of road and seat guide rail. There is arisk of injury. traffic conditions(Ypage 113). Make sure when adjusting aseat that no one X Vehicles with a memory function: save has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function G WARNING (Y page 116). If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased Seats risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. Important safety notes in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints G WARNING installed. Before driving off, make sure for Children could become trapped if they adjust every vehicle occupant that the center of the the seats, particularly when unattended. head restraint supports the back of the head There is a risk of injury. at about eye level.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the Seats, steering wheel and mirrors SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if the backrest is not in the G WARNING upright position.When braking or in the event You could lose control of your vehicle if you of an accident, you could slide underneath the do the following while driving: seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, risk of injury or even fatal injury. steering wheel or mirrors Adjust the seat properly before beginning Rfasten the seat belt your journey. Always make sure that the seat There is a risk of an accident. is in the upright position. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your G WARNING seat belt before starting the engine. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear G WARNING seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or we strongly recommend that children be other vehicle occupants could be trapped and placed in the rear seat whenever possible. thereby injured. Children in particular could Regardless of seating position, children 12
Z 104 Seats
years old and under mustbe seated and i Further related subjects: properly secured in an appropriately sized RImportant safety notes on air bags child restraint system or booster seat (Y page 44) recommended for the size and weight of the RCargo compartment enlargement child. For additional information, see the (folding down the rear bench seat) "Children in the vehicle" section. (Y page 335) Achild's risk of serious or fatal injuries is RSecuring children in the vehicle significantly increased if the child restraints (Y page 60) are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Adjusting the seats electrically ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". : Head restraint height Rdo not transport heavy loads on the ; Seat cushion angle seats. Do not place sharp objects on the = Seat height seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. A Backrest angle Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- not cover the seats with insulating SAFE® has been triggered, the front- materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, passenger seat will be moved to a better seat covers, child seats or booster seats. position if it was previously in an ! Make sure that there are no objects in the unfavorable position. footwell or behind the seats when resetting i You can store the seat settings using the the seats. There is a risk that the seats memory function (Y page 116). and/or the objects could be damaged. i It is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. The rear- Adjusting the head restraints compartmenthead restraints, however, General notes can be removed (Y page 106). For more information, contact a qualified Pay attention to the important safety notes specialist workshop. (Y page 103). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust Seats 105 the height and angle of the head restraints to There are several notches. the correct position. X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head Adjusting the head restraints manually restraint backwards. Adjusting the head restraint height X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position. i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.
Adjusting the head restraints electrically
X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the (Y page 104) up or down in the direction of desired position. the arrow. X To lower: press release catch : in the directionofthe arrow and push the head Adjusting the luxury head restraints restraint down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the head restraint Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left- hand side bolster : into the desired position. With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of X To adjust the fore/aft position of the the seat occupant's head. head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until i Adjust the head restraint so that the back it engages. of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.
Z 106 Seats
Rear seat head restraints Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backrests Adjusting the rear seat head restraint height
You can adjust the angle of the backrests in the second row of seats. There are ten detent X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, positions to choose from. press release catch :. X Pull the left or right release lever ; X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the upwards in the direction of the arrow until desired position. the relevant backrest : is fully released. X To lower: press release catch : and push X Pull the backrest : forwards in the the head restraint downuntil it is in the desired position. direction of the arrow and allow it to engage. Removing and installing the rear seat X To ensure that the backrest has engaged, head restraints lean firmly against backrest :.
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Adjusting the multicontour seat You can set the multicontour seat using COMAND. See the separate COMAND Operating Instructions.
X To remove: pull the head restraint up to the stop. X Press release catch : and pull the head restraint outofthe guides. X To re-install: insert the head restraint so that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. X Push the head restraint down until you hear it engage in position. Seats 107
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
Driver's and front-passenger seat
: To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour = To lower the backrest contour ? To harden the backrest contour You can adjust the contour of the front seat backrests individually to provide optimum support for your back.
Switching the seatheating on/off Rear seats Activating/deactivating The three red indicator lamps in the button indicate the heating level you have selected. G WARNING The system automatically switches down
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can from level 3 to level 2 after approximately Seats, steering wheel and mirrors cause the seat cushion and backrestpads to eight minutes. become very hot.The health of persons with The system automatically switches down limited temperature sensitivity or a limited from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten ability to react to excessively high minutes. temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk The system automatically switches off of injury. approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on repeatedly. You can set the distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and backrest. You can find information about this in the separate operating instructions. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out.
Z 108 Seats
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Seats 109
Problems with the seat heating
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical switched off consumers are switched on. prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off Activating/deactivating
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons indicate the ventilation level you have Seats, steering wheel and mirrors selected. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 93). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level.
Z 110 Steering wheel
Problems with the seat ventilation
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical switched off consumers are switched on. prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will switch back on automatically.
Steering wheel Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering Important safety notes wheel while the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. : Release lever Seats, steering wheel and mirrors WARNING G ; To adjust the steering wheel height Children could injure themselves if they = To adjust the steering wheel position adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of (fore-and-aft adjustment) injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Push release lever : down completely. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The steering column is unlocked. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. Adjusting the steering wheel The steering column is locked. manually X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering G WARNING wheel up or down or try to move it in the If the steering wheel is unlocked while the fore-and-aft direction. vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Steering wheel 111
Adjusting the steering wheel Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:when you electrically remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.
: To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 112) RStoring settings (Y page 116)
Steering wheel heating Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Activating/deactivating
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicatorlamp = lights up or goes out.
Z 112 Steering wheel
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical heating has switched consumers are switched on. off prematurely or X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as cannot be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. Important safety notes The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting G WARNING in and out of your vehicle easier. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts You can activate and deactivate the EASY- the steering wheel, you and other vehicle ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board occupants –particularly children–could computer (Y page 277). become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is Position of the steering wheel when the making adjustments, make sure that no one EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureis active has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. The steering wheel swings upwards when If somebody becomes trapped: you: Rpress one of the memory function position Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock buttons, or Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in Rmove the switch for steering wheel position 1 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors adjustmentinthe opposite direction to that Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is in which the steering wheel is moving. in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock The adjustment process is stopped. i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end G WARNING stop. If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, Position of the steering wheel for particularly when unattended. There is a risk driving of injury. The steering wheel is moved to the last When leaving the vehicle, always take the selected position when: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition G WARNING lock If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT or feature is making adjustments, you could lose Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an vehicles with KEYLESS-GO accident. When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is Mirrors 113 also automatically moved to the previously This means that you could misjudge the set position. distance fromroad users traveling behind, The last positionofthe steering wheel is e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an stored when you switch off the ignition or accident. when you store the settingwith the memory For this reason, always make sure of the function (Y page 116). actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 277). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior Mirrors mirror or button ; for the right-hand Rear-view mirror exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after some time. You can adjust the selected Seats, steering wheel and mirrors mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustmentbutton = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger forwards or back. field of vision. The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if the rear window defroster is switched on Exterior mirrors and the outside temperature is low. Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear.
Z 114 Mirrors
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as electrically soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front- passenger door.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding X Briefly press button :. exterior mirrors: press and hold button for Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. folding the mirrors :(Y page 114) until you i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are hear a click and then the mirror engage in always folded out fully while driving.They position. could otherwise vibrate. The mirror housing is engaged again and i If you are driving faster than you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold (Y page 113). in the exterior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors Automatic anti-glare mirrors
Seats, steering wheel andIf mirrors the battery has been disconnected or The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror completely discharged, the exterior mirrors on the driver's side automatically go into anti- must be reset. The exterior mirrors will glare mode if the following conditions are met otherwise not fold in when you select the simultaneously: "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the Rthe ignition is switched on and on-board computer (Y page 277). Rincident light from headlamps strikes the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in sensor in the rear-view mirror. position 1 in the ignition lock. i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode X Briefly press button :. if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer: (Y page 277) Mirrors 115
Parking position for the exterior Using the memory button mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror ; Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror = Adjustment button : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror ? Memory button M ; Button for the front-passenger side You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror exterior mirror in such a way that you can see = Adjustment button the rear wheel on that side as soon as you ? Memory button M engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see X Make sure that the SmartKey is in the rear wheel on that side as soon as you position 2 in the ignition lock. engage reverse gear. You can store this X With the exterior mirror on the front- position. passenger side activated, use adjustment Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the ignition lock. curb should be visible. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on X Press memory button M ? and one of the the front-passenger side. arrows on adjustment button = within X Engage reverse gear. three seconds. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The parking position is stored if the exterior side moves to the preset parking position. mirror does not move. X X Use adjustment button = to adjust the If the mirror moves out of position, repeat exterior mirror to a position that allows you the steps. to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving position.
Z 116 Memory function
Calling up a stored parking position G WARNING setting When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants –particularly children–could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button.The adjustment process is stopped.
: Buttonfor the driver's side exterior mirror G WARNING ; Button for the front-passenger side Children could become trapped if they exterior mirror activate the memory function, particularly = Adjustment button when unattended. There is arisk of injury. ? Memory button M When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- With the memory function, you can store up passenger side using button ;. to three different settings, e.g. for three X Engage reverse gear. differentpeople. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The following settings are stored as a single side moves to the stored parking position. memory preset:
Seats, steering wheel andThe mirrors exterior mirror on the front-passenger Rposition of the seat, backrest and head side moves back to its original position: restraint Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9mph Rdriver's side: steering wheel position (15 km/h) Rdriver's side: position of the exterior Rif you press button : for the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger mirror on the driver's side sides
Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memoryfunctiononthe driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. Memory function 117
X Adjust the seat(Ypage 104). X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 111)and the exteriormirrors (Y page 113). X Press the M memory button and thenpress one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. Atone sounds when the settings have been completed. The memory function can still be used if the SmartKey has been removed.
Calling up astoredsetting
X Press the button for storage position 1, 2 or 3.Keep pressing until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsare in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position buttons. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z 118 119
Useful information ...... 120 Exterior lighting ...... 120 Interior lighting ...... 127 Replacing bulbs ...... 128 Windshield wipers ...... 132 Lights and windshield wipers 120 Exterior lighting
Useful information Setting the exterior lighting
i This Operator's Manual describes all Setting options models and all standard and optional Exterior lighting can be set using: equipment of your vehicle available at the Rthe light switch time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are Rthe combination switch (Y page 123) possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rthe on-board computer (Y page 274) not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety- Light switch related systems and functions. Operation i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed 1W Left-hand standing lamps obligations. 2X Right-hand standing lamps 3T Parking lamps, license plate and Driving abroad instrumentclusterlighting Lights and windshield wipers 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, Conversion to symmetrical low beam controlled by the light sensor Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps beam in countries in which traffic drives on BR Rear fog lamp the opposite side of the road from the country If you hear a warning tone when you leave the where the vehicle is registered. This prevents vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not X Turn the light switch to Ã. lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ Have the headlamps converted at a qualified standing lamps) switches off automatically if specialist workshop as close to the border as you: possible before driving in these countries. Rremove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey Conversion to asymmetrical low beam in position 0. after returning Have the headlamps converted back to Automatic headlamp mode asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a G WARNING qualified specialist workshop as soon as When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- possible after crossing the border again. beam headlamps may not be switched on Exterior lighting 121
automatically if there is fog, snow or other X To switch on automatic headlamp causes of poor visibility due to the weather mode: turn the light switch to Ã. conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an Only for Canada: accident. The daytime running lamps improve the In such situations, turnthe light switch to visibility of your vehicle during the day. The L. daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be The automatic headlamp feature is only an deactivated. aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's When the engine is running and the vehicle is lighting at all times. stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in high ambient light: if you turn the light switch to T, you turn on the daytime running lamps and parking lamps. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. 1W Left-hand standing lamps USA only: 2X Right-hand standing lamps The daytime running lamps improve the 3T Parking lamps, license plate and visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do instrumentcluster lighting this, the daytime running lamps function must 4à Automatic headlamp mode, be switched on using the on-board computer controlled by the light sensor (Y page 274). Lights and windshield wipers 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings BR Rear fog lamp take precedence over the daytime running à is the favored light switch setting. The lamps. light setting is automatically selected i according to the brightnessofthe ambient In the USA, the daytime running lamps are light (exception: poor visibility due to weather deactivated upon delivery from the factory. conditions such as fog, snow or spray): Low-beam headlamps RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: G WARNING the parking lamps are switched on or off When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- automatically depending on the brightness beam headlamps may not be switched on of the ambient light. automatically if there is fog, snow or other RWith the engine running: if you have causes of poor visibility due to the weather activated the daytime running lamps conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an function via the on-board computer, the accident. daytime running lamps or the low-beam In such situations, turn the light switch to headlamps and parking lamps are switched L. on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
Z 122 Exterior lighting
3T Parking lamps, license plate and instrumentclusterlighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country- specific regulations for the use of rear fog 1W Left-hand standing lamps lamps. 2X Right-hand standing lamps X To switch on the rearfog lamps: turn the 3T Parking lamps, license plate and SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 instrument cluster lighting or start the engine. ipers 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. controlled by the lightsensor dw X Press the R button. 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps The yellow R indicator lamp in the BR Rear fog lamp instrumentcluster lights up. Even if the light sensor does not detectthat X To switch off therear fog lamp: press the it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam R button. headlamps switch on when the ignition is The yellow R indicator lamp in the switched on and the light switch is set to the instrumentcluster goes out. L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. Parking lamps X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: ! If the battery has been excessively
Lights and windshiel turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to discharged, the parking lamps or standing position 2 or start the engine. lamps are automatically switched off to enable the nextengine start. Always park X Turn the light switch to L. your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit The green L indicator lamp in the according to legal standards.Avoid the instrumentcluster lights up. continuous use of the T parking lamps Rear fog lamp for several hours.Ifpossible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp.
1W Left-hand standing lamps 2X Right-hand standing lamps Exterior lighting 123
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle).
1W Left-hand standing lamps 2X Right-hand standing lamps Combination switch 3T Parking lamps, license plate and Turn signal instrument cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the lightsensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp
X To switch on: turn light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right Lights and windshield wipers = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left
X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. 1W Left-hand standing lamps X To indicate: press the combination switch 2X Right-hand standing lamps beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. 3T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp
Z 124 Exterior lighting
High-beam headlamps High-beam flasher
: High-beam headlamps : High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left ? Turn signal, left
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the position 2 or start the engine. engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Pull the combination switch in the direction X Press the combination switch beyond the of arrow =. pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the high-beam Hazard warning lamps headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. Lights and windshield wipers The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high- beamheadlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: it controls activation of the high-beam press button :. headlamps (Y page 125). All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Exterior lighting 125
The hazard warning lamps automatically Cornering light function switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of over 6mph (10km/h) again after a full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better Headlamp cleaning system visibility in tight bends, for example. It can The headlamps are cleaned automatically if only be activated when the low-beam the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is headlamps are switched on. operated five times (Y page 132) while the Active: lights are on and the engine is running. When Rif you are driving at speeds below you switch off the ignition, the automatic 25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn headlamp cleaning system is reset and signal or turn the steering wheel counting is resumed from 0. Rif you are driving at speeds between 25mph (40 km/h) and45mph (70 km/h) Active light function and turn the steering wheel Not active: if your speed exceeds
25mph (40 km/h) or if you switch off the turn Lights and windshield wipers signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Important safety notes The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the G WARNING steering movements of the front wheels. In Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize this way, relevant areas remain illuminated road users: while driving. This allows you to recognize Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Active: whenthe lights are switched on. Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
Z 126 Exterior lighting
In very rare cases, Adaptive HighbeamAssist Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail too recognize other road users that on/off have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.
: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left
X To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the on- board computer (Y page 275). X Turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 123). The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark
Lights and windshield wipers You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and and the light sensor activates the low-beam high beam automatically. The system headlamps. recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either If you are driving at speeds above approaching from the opposite direction or approximately 28 mph (45 km/h): traveling in front of your vehicle, and the headlamp range is set automatically consequently switches the headlamps from depending on the distance between the high beam to low beam. vehicle and other road users. The system automatically adapts the low- If you are driving at speeds above beam headlamp range depending on the approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no distance to the other vehicle. Once the other road users have been detected: system no longer detects any other vehicles, the high-beam headlamps are switched on it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. automatically. The K indicator lamp in The system's optical sensor is located behind the instrument cluster also lights up. the windshield near the overhead control If you are driving at speeds below panel. approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: Interior lighting 127
The high-beam headlamps are switched off ? | To switch the frontinterior lighting/ automatically. The K indicator lamp in automatic interiorlighting control off the instrument cluster goes out. The _ A p To switch the right-handfront indicator lamp in the multifunction display reading lamp on/off remains lit. B To switch the automatic interior lighting X To deactivate: move the combination control on switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Interior lighting control General notes Headlamps fogged up on the inside In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from The headlamps may fog up on the inside if discharging, the interior lighting functions are there is high atmospheric humidity. automatically deactivated after some time except for when the SmartKey is in position X Switch on the lights and drive off. 2 in the ignition lock. The level of moisture diminishes, The color and brightness of the ambient depending on the length of the journey and lighting can be adjusted using the on-board the weather conditions (humidity and computer (Y page 275). temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish: Automatic interiorlighting control X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting Lights and windshield wipers
Overhead control panel : p To switch the left-hand frontreading lamp on/off ; c To switch the front interior lighting on = v To switch the rear interior lighting Overhead control panel on/off : p To switch the left-hand frontreading ? | To switch the frontinterior lighting/ lamp on/off automatic interiorlighting control off ; c To switch the front interior lighting A p To switch the right-handfront on reading lamp on/off = v To switch the rear interior lighting B To switch the automatic interior lighting on/off control on
Z 128 Replacing bulbs
X To switchon: set the switch to center X To switch the front interiorlighting on: position B. set the switch to the c position. X To switch off: set the switch to the | X To switch the interior lighting off: set the position. switch to the | position or (if the door The interior lighting automatically switches is closed) to the center position. on if you: X To switch the rearinterior lighting on/ off: press the u button. Runlock the vehicle X To switch the reading lamps on/off: Ropen a door press the p button. Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The interior light is activated for a short while Crash-responsive emergency lighting when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. You can activate this delayed The interior lighting is activated automatically switch-off using the on-board computer if the vehicle is involved in an accident. (Y page 276). X To switch off the crash-responsive emergency lighting: press the hazard Manual interior lighting control warning lamp button. or X Lock and then unlock the vehicle using the SmartKey.
Replacing bulbs Important safety notes
Lights and windshield wipers Xenon bulbs G DANGER Overhead control panel Xenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can get : p To switch the left-hand frontreading an electric shock if you remove the cover of lamp on/off the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical ; c To switch the front interior lighting contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. on Never touch the parts or the electrical = v To switch the rear interior lighting contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on/off on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified ? | To switch the frontinterior lighting/ specialist workshop. automatic interiorlighting control off A p To switch the right-handfront If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, reading lamp on/off you can recognize this by the following: the cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves B To switch the automatic interior lighting from the top to the bottom and back again control on when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. Replacing bulbs 129
Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.
Other bulbs G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Halogen headlamps Allow these components to cool down before : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W changing a bulb. ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W = Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W BV There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs ? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W that you cannot replace. Replace only the bulbs listed (Y page 129). Have the bulbs that you cannot replace yourself changed at a qualified specialist workshop. If you require assistance changing bulbs, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint- free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb when installing. Tail lamp Lights and windshield wipers Only use bulbs of the correcttype. : Brake lamp: P 21 W-L If the new bulb still does notlight up, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Bulbs and lamps are an importantaspect of Changing the front bulbs vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure Removing and installing the cover in the that these function correctly at all times. front wheel housing Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. You must remove the cover from the front wheel housing before you can change the Overview:changing bulbs/bulb types front bulbs. You can change the following bulbs. The bulb type can be found in the legend.
Z 130 Replacing bulbs
X Remove the cover in the front wheel housing (Y page 129). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X To remove: switch off the lights. X Align housing cover : and turn it X Turn the front wheels inwards. clockwise until it engages. X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable X Replace the cover in the front wheel tool. housing (Y page 129). X Slide cover : up and remove it. X To install: insert cover : againand slide High-beam headlamps (halogen it down until it engages. headlamps) X Insert securing pin ;. G WARNING These bulbs are pressurized. Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) They can explode when being changed if: Rthey are still hot G WARNING Rthey hit an object when being removed These bulbs are pressurized. Rthey are dropped They can explode when being changed if: There is a risk of injury. Lights and windshield wipers Rthey are still hot You should wear eye protection and clean Rthey hitanobjectwhen being removed gloves when you are changing a bulb. If Rthey are dropped necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified There is a risk of injury. specialist workshop. You should wear eye protection and clean gloves when you are changing a bulb. If necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop.
X Switch off the lights. X Open the hood. Replacing bulbs 131
X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise Side marker lamps and pull it out. X Pull lever = upwards and remove bulb holder ;. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Simultaneously press bulb holder ; and pull lever = downwards. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Parking lamps/standing lamps X Remove the cover in the front wheel (halogen headlamps) housing (Y page 129). X Turn cap ; counter-clockwise and remove it. X Pull out bulb holder :. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder :. X Align cap ; and turn it clockwise until it engages. X Replace the cover in the frontwheel housing (Y page 129). X Switch off the lights.
X Open the hood. Lights and windshield wipers X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Pull out bulb holder ;. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Insert bulb holder ;. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages.
Z 132 Windshield wipers
Changing the rearbulbs Brake lamp Opening and closing the service flap
X Switch off the lights. X Open the cargo compartment. Left-hand service flap X Open the service flap (Y page 132). X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Take bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insertthe new bulb into bulb holder :. X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn it clockwise. X Close the service flap (Y page 132).
Right-hand service flap Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers You must open the service flap in the cargo Switching the windshield wipers on/ compartment before you can change the off bulbs in the brake lamp. ! Do not operate the windshield wipers X To open: release service flap : at the top, when the windshield is dry, as this could e.g. with a screwdriver, and swing it damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust downward in the direction of the arrow. that has collected on the windshield can X Right side: remove the first-aid kit scratch the glass if wiping takes place when beforehand and pull the parcelnet down. the windshield is dry. X To close: reinsertservice flap :. If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wipers in dry weather conditions, always use washer fluid when operating the windshield wipers. ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield after the vehicle has been washed in an automatic car wash, wax or other residues may be the reason for this. Cleanthe windshield using washer fluid after washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash. Windshield wipers 133
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideally to optical influences and the windshield in spring and fall. becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the Switching the rear window wiper on/ windshield wiper blades or scratch the off windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Combination switch : è Rear window wiper switch 2 b To wipe with washer fluid Combination switch 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping 1 $ Windshield wiper off 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the set to high sensitivity) ignition lock (Y page 157). 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow X Turn switch : on the combination switch Lights and windshield wipers 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, B í Single wipe the icon appears in the instrumentcluster. C î To wipe with washer fluid
X Switch on the ignition. X Turn the combination switch to the Replacing the wiper blades corresponding position. Important safety notes In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate wiping frequency is set automatically G WARNING according to the intensity of the rain. In If the windshield wipers begin to move while the Å position, the rain sensor is more you are changing the wiper blades, you could sensitive than in the Ä position, causing be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk the windshield wipers to wipe more of injury. frequently. Always switch off the windshield wipers and If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield ignition before changing the wiper blades. will no longer be wiped properly.This could ! Neveropen the hood/tailgate if a wiper prevent you from observing the traffic arm has been folded away from the conditions, thereby causing an accident. windshield/rear window.
Z 134 Windshield wipers
Never fold a windshield wiperarm without Installing the wiper blades a wiper blade back onto the windshield/ rear window. Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at aqualified specialist workshop. X Position new wiper blade : in the retainer ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, on the wiper arm and slide it into place in make sure that you touch only the wiper the direction of the arrow. arm of the wiper. The wiper blade audibly engages. Changing the windshield wiper blades X Make sure that wiper blade is seated correctly. Removing the wiper blades X Fold the wiper arm back onto the X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition windshield. lock. X Fold the wiper arm away from the Replacing the rearwindow wiper blade windshield. Removing the wiper blades Lights and windshield wipers
X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the lock. direction of the arrow. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until it engages. X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it releases. X Remove wiper blade ;. Windshield wipers 135
Installing the wiper blade X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages. X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly. X Positionwiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear window. Lights and windshield wipers
Z 136 Windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield are jammed. wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Lights and windshield wipers 137
Useful information ...... 138 Overview of climate control sys- tems ...... 138 Operating the climate control sys- tems ...... 144 Setting the air vents ...... 151 Climate control 138 Overview of climate control systems
Useful information i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust, and completely filters out i This Operator's Manual describes all pollen. Aclogged filter reduces the amount models and all standard and optional of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For equipment of your vehicle available at the this reason, you should always observe the time of publication of the Operator's interval for replacing the filter, which is Manual. Country-specific differences are specified in the Maintenance Booklet.As it possible. Please note that your vehicle may depends on environmental conditions, e.g. not be equipped with all features heavy air pollution, the interval may be described. This also applies to safety- shorter than stated in the Maintenance related systems and functions. Booklet. i Read the information on qualified i It is possible that the dehumidification specialist workshops: (Y page 27). function of the climate control system may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle Overview of climate control systems is ventilated for 30 minutes. Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To preventthe windows from fogging up: Climate control Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. The system only works optimally when the side windows and the roof are closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 150). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 93). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. Overview of climate control systems 139
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
USA only Frontcontrol panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 146) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 148) = To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 148) Climate control ? To switch cooling with air dehumidificationon/off (Y page 145) A To switch the rearwindow defroster on/off (Y page 149) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146) C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150) D To set the air distribution (Y page 147) E To increase the airflow (Y page 147) F To reduce the airflow (Y page 147) G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144) H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145) 140 Overview of climate control systems
Canada only Frontcontrol panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 146) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 148) = To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148) ? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification(Ypage 145) or activates/
Climate control deactivates the residual heatingfunction (Y page 150) A To switch the rear window defrosteron/off (Y page 149) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146) C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150) D To set the airdistribution (Y page 147) E To increase the airflow (Y page 147) F To reduce the airflow (Y page 147) G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144) H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145)
Rear control panel : To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic ; To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off Overview of climate control systems 141
= To direct the airflow through the rear air vents ? To direct the airflow through the footwell vents
Information about using dual-zone automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of dual- zone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿/Á buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the defrosting function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. RUse the ZONE function to adopt the
temperature settings on the driver's side Climate control for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. i During automatic engine switch-off, the ECO start/stop function only operates at a reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 163). 142 Overview of climate control systems
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
USA only Frontcontrol panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 146) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 148) = To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 148) Climate control ? To switch cooling with air dehumidificationon/off (Y page 145) A To switch the rearwindow defroster on/off (Y page 149) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146) C To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148) D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144) E To set the air distribution (Y page 147) F To increase the airflow (Y page 147) G To reduce the airflow (Y page 147) H Display I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 146) J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150) K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145)
Rear control panel L To increase the airflow (Y page 147) M To set the temperature (Y page 146) N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 145) O To directthe airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 147) P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 147) Overview of climate control systems 143
Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144) R To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)
Canada only Front control panel : To set the temperature, left (Y page 146) ; To defrost the windshield (Y page 148) Climate control = To switch the ZONE function on/off (Y page 148) ? To activate/deactivate cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 145) or activate/ deactivate the residual heating function (Y page 150) A To switch the rear window defroster on/off(Ypage 149) B To set the temperature, right (Y page 146) C To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off D To switch climate control on/off (Y page 144) E To set the air distribution (Y page 147) F To increase the airflow (Y page 147) G To reduce the airflow (Y page 147) H Display I To adjust the climate mode settings (Y page 146) J To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 150) K To set climate control to automatic (Y page 145)
Rear control panel L To increase the airflow (Y page 147) M To set the temperature (Y page 146) N To set rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 145) O To direct the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 147) 144 Operating the climate control systems
P To direct the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 147) Q To switch rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 144) R To reduce the airflow (Y page 147)
Information about using 3-zone Operating the climate control automatic climate control systems The following contains instructions and Switching climate control on/off recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control. Points to observe before use RActivate climate control using the à and When the climate control is switched off, the ¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above air supply and air circulation are also the à and ¿ buttons light up. switched off. Only use this setting for a brief RIn automatic mode, you can also use the period. The windows could otherwise fog up. ñ button to set a climate mode Only switch off climate control briefly to (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The prevent the windows from fogging up. MEDIUM level is recommended. i Switch on climate control primarily using RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). the à button (Y page 145). ROnly use the defrosting function briefly In the rear compartment, you can also switch until the windshield is clear again. climate control on and off using the à and ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ^ buttons. Climate control if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could Activating/deactivating otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the RUse the ZONE function to adopt the ignition lock (Y page 157). temperature settings on the driver's side X To activate: press the à button. for the front-passenger side and the rear The indicator lamp in the à button lights compartment as well. The indicator lamp up. Airflow and air distribution are set to above the á button goes out. automatic mode. RUse the residual heat function if you want or to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior X Press the ^ button. when the ignition is switched off. The The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes residual heat function can only be activated out. The previously selected settings are or deactivated with the ignition switched restored. off. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. i During automatic engine switch-off, the The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights ECO start/stop function only operates at a up. reduced capacity. If you require the full climate control output, you can switch off the ECO start/stop function by pressing the ECO button (Y page 163). Operating the climate control systems 145
Activating/deactivating cooling with Problems with the "cooling with air air dehumidification dehumidification" function Points to observe before use When you press the ¿ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three If you switch off the cooling function, the times or remains off. You can no longer switch vehicle will notbe cooled when weather on the cooling with air dehumidification conditions are warm. The windows can fog up function. more quickly. Only deactivate the cooling with air dehumidification function for a short X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. time to preventthe windows from fogging up. The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. Setting climate control to automatic The air inside the vehicle is cooled and Points to observe before use dehumidified according to the temperature selected. If you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather Condensation may drip from the underside of conditions are warm. The windows can fog up the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is more quickly. Only deactivate the cooling normal and not a sign that there is a with air dehumidification function for a short malfunction. time to prevent the windows from fogging up. Activating/deactivating In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow Climate control and the air distribution. Automatic mode will achieve optimal operation if cooling with air dehumidification is also activated. If necessary, cooling with air dehumidification can be deactivated. In the rear compartment, you can also switch climate control for the rear seats to automatic mode using the à button. Example: ¿ button Activating/deactivating X To activate: press the ¿/Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿/Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidification function has a delayed switch-off feature. 146 Operating the climate control systems
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Setting the temperature ignition lock (Y page 157). Dual-zone automatic climate control X Set the desired temperature. X To activate: press the à button. Different temperatures can be set for the The indicator lamp in the à button lights driver's and front-passenger sides. up. Automatic air distribution and airflow X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the are activated. ignition lock (Y page 157). X To select manually: press the _ X To increase/reduce: turn control : or button. B clockwise or counter-clockwise or (Y page 139). X Press the I or K button. Only change the temperature setting in The indicator lamp in the à button goes small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). out. 3-zone automatic climate control: when 3-zone automatic climate control automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (Y page 146).
Adjusting the climate mode settings You can select the following climate mode settings in automatic mode: Climate control FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly Automatic climate control zones warmer and with less draft You can select different temperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front: turn control : or B clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 142). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). X To increase/reduce the temperature in X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the the rear compartment using the front ignition lock (Y page 157). control panel: press the á button. X Press the à button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the desired climate mode appears in the X Turn control : clockwise or counter- display. clockwise (Y page 142). Operating the climate control systems 147
Only change the temperature setting in i Regardless of the air distribution setting, small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). airflow is always directed through the side The temperature setting for the driver's air vents. The side air vents can only be side is adopted for the rear compartment closed when the controls on the side air and the front-passenger side. vents are turned downwards. X To increase/decrease the rear compartment temperature using the Adjusting rear control panel: turn control M clockwise or counter-clockwise on the rear control panel (Y page 142). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Setting the air distribution Air distribution settings Front control panel X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the P Directs the airflow through the center ignition lock (Y page 157). vents X Press the _ button repeatedly until the O Directs air through the footwell air desired symbol appears in the display. vents Climate control S Directs the airflow through the center and footwell vents Setting the airflow ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents b Directs the airflow through the defroster and center vents (Canada only) a Directs air through the defroster and footwell vents _ Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and footwell air vents (Canada only) Rear control panel M Directs the airflow through the rear X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the center and rear side air vents ignition lock (Y page 157). O Directs air through the footwell air X To increase: press the K button. vents X To reduce: press the I button. i Using the rear control panel, you can also activate both air distribution positions i You can use 3-zone automatic climate simultaneously. In order to do this, press control to set the airflow in the rear both air distribution buttons. The air is then compartment separately. routed through all rear air vents. 148 Operating the climate control systems
Switching the ZONE function on/off The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off
X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains X To activate: press the á button. deactivated. The indicator lamp above the á button or lights up. X Press the à button. Dual-zone automatic climate control: the The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes temperature setting for the driver's side is out. Airflow and air distribution are set to not adopted for the front-passenger side. automatic mode. 3-zone automatic climate control: the or temperature setting for the driver's side is X Turn controls : or B clockwise or not adopted for the front-passenger side counter-clockwise: and the rear compartment. Dual-zone automatic climate control Climate control X To deactivate: press the á button. (Y page 139) The indicator lamp above the á button 3-zone automatic climate control goes out. (Y page 142) Dual-zone automatic climate control: the or temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. X Press the K or I button. 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and MAX COOL maximum cooling the rear compartment. The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.
Defrosting the windshield You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows. Switch off the "defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights MAX COOL is only operational when the up. engine is running. Operating the climate control systems 149
X To activate: press the Ù button. Rear window defroster The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Activating/deactivating X To activate: press off-road button Ù again. The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Whenyou activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions: Rmaximum cooling Rmaximum airflow Rair-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as Windows fogged up on the inside soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, X Activate the ¿ / Á cooling with air the rear window defroster switches off dehumidification function. automatically after several minutes. X Activate automatic mode Ã. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the defrosting function (Y page 148). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock (Y page 157). Climate control i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights Windows fogged up on the outside up or goes out.
X Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. 150 Operating the climate control systems
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged. defroster has X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading deactivated lamps or interior lighting. prematurely or cannot When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window be activated. defroster is activated again automatically.
Activating/deactivating air- activated automatically, the indicator lamp recirculation mode in the d button is not lit. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the Outside air is added after about windows can fog up more quickly, in 30 minutes. particular at low temperatures. Only use air- X To deactivate: press the d button. recirculation mode briefly to prevent the The indicator lamp in the d button goes windows from fogging up. out. i Air-recirculation mode deactivates automatically: Rafter approximately five minutes at outside temperatures below Climate control approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling unpleasant odors are enteringthe vehicle with air dehumidification" function is from outside. The air already inside the activated vehicle will then be recirculated. The operation of air-recirculation mode is the Activating/deactivating the residual same for all control panels. heat function X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). The "residual heat" function is only available in Canada. X To activate: press the d button. The indicator lamp in the d button lights up. i In the event of high pollution levels (3- zone automatic climate control only) or at high outside temperatures, air- recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is Setting the air vents 151
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirectthe airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:
It is possible to make use of the residual heat Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in of the engine to continue heating the the engine compartment on the front- stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after passenger side free of blockages, such as the engine has been switched off. The heating ice, snow or leaves. time depends on the temperature that has Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles been set. in the vehicle interior. X To activate: press the Ì/Á button. i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á the sliders of the air vents to the center button lights up. position. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. Setting the center air vents i If you activate the residual heat function Climate control at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at mediumspeed. X To deactivate: press the Ì/Á button. The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á button goes out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on : Center air vent, left Rif the battery voltage drops ; Center air vent, right Rwhen the auxiliary heating is activated = Center vent thumbwheel, right ? Center vent thumbwheel, left Setting the air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? to the right or left. Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
Z 152 Setting the air vents
Setting the side air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the center vents in the rear compartment
: Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent = Control for side air vent
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down.
Setting the glove box air vent Example: center vents with rear control panel : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ! Close the air vent when heating the ; Rear-compartment air vent, right Climate control vehicle. = Rear control panel At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air ? Rear-compartment air vent, left dehumidification" function. Otherwise, X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or temperature-sensitive items stored in the down. glove box could be damaged. Setting the rear-compartment side air vents
2nd row of seats
: Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow : B-pillar air vent depends on the airflow and air distribution ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent settings. Setting the air vents 153
X To open/close: turnthumbwheel ; to the left or right. Climate control
Z 154 155
Useful information ...... 156 Notes on breaking-in anew vehicle 156 Driving ...... 156 Automatic transmission ...... 165 Refueling ...... 173 Parking ...... 179 Driving tips ...... 182 Driving systems ...... 192 Towing atrailer ...... 253 Driving and parking 156 Driving
Useful information After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and i This Operator's Manual describes all accelerate the vehicle to full speed. models and all standard and optional Additional breaking-in notes for AMG equipment of your vehicle available at the vehicles: time of publication of the Operator's Rdo not drive faster than 85 mph Manual. Country-specific differences are (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles possible. Please note that your vehicle may (1,500 km). not be equipped with all features Ronly allow the engine to reach a maximum described. This also applies to safety- engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. related systems and functions. Rchange gear in good time. i Read the information on qualified Rideally, drive for the first 1,000 miles specialist workshops: (Y page 27). (1,500km) in drive program C.
Driving and parking i You should also observe these notes on Notes on breaking-in anew vehicle running in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Important safety notes i Always observe the respective speed New and replaced brake pads and discs only limits. reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force Driving to the brake pedal. Important safety notes
The first 1,000miles (1,500 km) G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrictthe The more you look after the engine when it is pedal travel or obstruct adepressed pedal. new, the more satisfied you will be with its The operating and road safety of the vehicle performance in the future. is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. RYou should therefore drive at varying Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are vehicle and engine speeds for the first stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter 1,000 miles (1,500 km). the driver's footwell. Install the floormats RAvoid heavy loads, e.g.driving at full securely and as specified in order to ensure throttle, during this period. sufficientclearance for the pedals. Do not use RChange gearingood time, before the loose floormats. tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. G WARNING RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to Unsuitable footwear can hindercorrect usage brake the vehicle. of the pedals, e.g.: RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator Rshoes with thick soles pedal past the point of resistance Rshoes with high heels (kickdown). Rslippers ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when There is a risk of an accident. driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. Driving 157
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct Key positions usage of the pedals. SmartKey G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect.You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING g To remove the SmartKey If the parking brake has not been fully Driving and parking 1 Power supply for some consumers, such released when driving, the parking brake can: as the windshield wipers Roverheat and cause a fire 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) Rlose its hold function. and drive position There is a risk of fire and an accident.Release 3 To start the engine the parking brake fully before driving off. As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster light the engine's full performance until it has up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after reached operating temperature. starting the engine or lights up while driving, see (Y page 318). Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignition is stationary. lock for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the ignition lock.The Where possible, avoid spinning the drive steering is then locked. To unlock, remove the wheels when pulling away on slippery SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock. roads. You could otherwise damage the drive train. The steering is locked when you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil X Remove the SmartKey when the engine is temperatures below 68 ‡(+20 †), the switched off. maximumengine speed is restricted in The starter battery could otherwise be order to protect the engine.To protectthe discharged. engine and maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driving at full throttle when If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignition the engine is cold. lock, the starter battery may not be charged sufficiently. X Check the starter battery and recharge if necessary (Y page 387). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389).
Z 158 Driving
i The SmartKey can be turned in the Rthe vehicle can be started using the ignition lock even if it is not the correct Start/Stop button and SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not Relectrically powered equipment can be switched on. The engine cannot be started. operated. i KEYLESS-GO The engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding General notes the Start/Stop button for approximately three seconds. This function operates RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: independently of the ECO start/stop - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile automatic engine switch-off function. phone or another SmartKey - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal Key positions with KEYLESS-GO foil - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case Driving and parking This can impair the functionality of the KEYLESS-GO key. Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 344). Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with aSmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS- GO function and a detachable Start/Stop As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the button. indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after ignition lock and the SmartKey with the starting the engine or lights up while driving, integrated KEYLESS-GO function must be in see (Y page 318). the vehicle. X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition Pressing the Start/Stop button several times lock ;. in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignitionlock. This is only i When you insert Start/Stop button : the case if you are not depressing the brake into ignition lock ;, the system needs pedal. approximately two seconds recognition If you depress the brake pedal and press the time. You can then use Start/Stop Start/Stop button, the engine starts button :. immediately. Activating power supply The Start/Stop button can be removed from X If Start/Stop button : has not yet been the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey SmartKey into the ignition lock. being removed from the ignition. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop X Press Start/Stop button : once. button from the ignition lock when you The power supply is switched on. You can leave the vehicle. You should, however, now activate the windshield wipers, for always take the SmartKey with you when example. leaving the vehicle. As long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle: Driving 159 i The power supply is switched off again if: Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Rthe driver's door is opened and motion if, for example, they: Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice Rrelease the parking brake. when in this position. Rshift the automatic transmission out of Switching on the ignition parking position P. Rstarting the engine. X Press Start/Stop button : twice. The ignition is switched on. There is a risk of an accident and injury. i The power supply is switched off again if: When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Rthe driver's door is opened and leave children or animals unattended in the Ryou press Start/Stop button : once vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of when in this position. reach of children.
G WARNING Driving and parking Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
i Vehicles with agasoline engine: the catalytic converter is preheated for up to Start/Stop button 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of = USA only the engine may change during this time. ? Canada only Automatic transmission
X Shift the transmission to position Starting the engine P(Y page 165). Important safety notes The transmission position displayinthe multifunction display shows G WARNING P(Y page 165). If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, i You can also start the engine when the they could: transmission is in position N. Ropen the doors, thus endangering other people or road users. Starting procedure with the SmartKey Rget out and disrupt traffic. X To startagasoline engine: turn the Roperate the vehicle's equipment. SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock
Z 160 Driving
(Y page 157) and release it as soon as the X Depress the brake pedal and keep it engine is running. depressed. X To start adiesel engine: turn the X Shift the transmission to position D or SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock R(Y page 165). (Y page 157). X Release the brake pedal. The % preglow indicator lamp in the X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. instrumentcluster lights up. The electric parking brake (Y page 180) is X When the % preglow indicator lamp automatically released. goes out, turnthe SmartKey to position The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada 3(Y page 157) and release it as soon as the only) indicator lamp in the instrument engine is running. cluster goes out. i You can start the engine without preglow i It is only possible to shift the transmission if the engine is warm. from position P to the desired position if
Driving and parking you depress the brake pedal. Only then is Using KEYLESS-GO to startthe engine the parking lock released. If you do not X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depress the brake pedal, you can move the depressed. DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock remains engaged. X To start agasoline engine: press the Start/Stop button (Y page 158) once. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have The engine starts. pulled away.The locking knobs in the doors X To start adiesel engine: press the Start/ drop down. Stop button (Y page 158) once. You can open the doors from the inside at Preglow is activated and the engine starts. any time. You can also deactivate the automatic i The Start/Stop button can be used to locking feature (Y page 276). startthe vehicle without inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ i Upshifts take place at higher engine Stop button must be inserted in the ignition speeds after a cold start. This helps the lock and the SmartKey must be in the catalytic converter to reach its operating vehicle. This mode for starting the engine temperature more quickly. operates independently of the ECO start/ stop automatic engine start function. Pulling away with a trailer
Pulling away Automatic transmission G WARNING If the engine speed is above the idling speed and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is a risk of an accident. When engaging transmission position D or R, always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate. Driving 161
To ensure that you do not roll backwards Rthe electric parking brake is applied. when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage RESP® is malfunctioning. the electric parking brake. X Press and hold handle :. The electric parking brake continues to ECO start/stop function brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling Important safety notes backwards. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada G WARNING only) indicator lamp in the instrument If the engine is switched off automatically and cluster remains on. you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted X Depress the accelerator pedal. automatically. The vehicle may begin moving. X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination There is a risk of accident and injury. is held by the driving force of the engine, If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off release lever :. the ignition and secure the vehicle against Driving and parking The electric parking brake is released. rolling away. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp in the instrument General notes cluster goes out.
Hill startassist G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. : ECO start/stop display Therefore, quickly move your foot from the If the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never multifunction display, the ECO start/stop leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start function switches the engine off assist. automatically if the vehicle stops moving. X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. The engine starts automatically when the The vehicle is then held for about a second. driver wants to pull away again. The ECO X Pull away. start/stop function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel consumption and emissions Hill start assist helps you when pulling away of your vehicle. forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. Every time you switch on the engine using the It holds the vehicle for a short time after you SmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECO have removed your foot from the brake pedal. start/stop function is activated. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal If the ECO start/stop function has been and to depress it before the vehicle begins to manually deactivated (Y page 163) or a roll. malfunction has caused the system to be deactivated, the ¤ symbol is not Hill start assist will not function if: displayed. Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on AMG vehicles: the Stop/Start active or a downhill gradient. Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG Rthe transmission is in position N. menu in the multifunction display goes out.
Z 162 Driving
AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop function the accelerator pedal, the engine starts is only available in drive program C. automatically and the braking effect of the For further information on automatic engine HOLD function is deactivated. switch-off (Y page 162) and automatic i All vehicles (apart from AMG engine start (Y page 162). vehicles): automatic engine switch-off can take place a maximum of four times Automatic engine switch-off consecutively (initial stop then repeated If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or three times). The ¤ symbol is shown in N, the ECO start/stop function switches off yellow in the multifunction display after the the engine automatically. engine has been started automatically for the fourth time. When the ¤ symbol is The ECO start/stop function is operational and the ¤ symbol is displayed in green in shown in green in the multifunction display, automatic engine switch-off is again the multifunction display, if: possible.
Driving and parking Rthe indicator lamp in theECO buttonis lit green. i AMG vehicles: times which the engine can be automatically switched off. Rno off-road program has been selected. Rthe outside temperature is within the Automatic engine start comfort range. Rthe engine is at normal operating The engine starts automatically if: temperature. Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop function Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior by pressing the ECO button. has been reached. Rin transmission position D or N the brake Rthe battery is sufficiently charged. pedal is released and the HOLD function is Rthe system detects that the windshield is not active. not fogged up when the air-conditioning Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. system is switched on. Ryou engage reverse gear R. Rthe hood is closed. Ryou move the transmission out of position Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's P. seat belt is fastened. Ryou switch to drive program S or M (AMG If conditions for automatic engine switch-off vehicles). have not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol will Ryou switch to an off-road program (except be shown in yellow. for AMG vehicles). AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open the multifunction display additionally shows the driver's door. Stop/Start inactive message. Rthe vehicle starts to roll. i All of the vehicle's systems remain active Rthe brake system requires this. when the engine has been stopped Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior automatically. deviates from the set range. i The HOLD function can be activated if the Rthe system detects moisture on the engine has been switched off windshield when the air-conditioning automatically. It is then not necessary to system is switched on. continue applying the brakes during the Rthe charge level of the battery is too low. automatic stop phase. When you depress Driving 163 i Shifting the transmissionto position P Deactivating (AMG vehicles) does not start the engine. X Press button : in drive program C. i If you shift the transmission from R to D, or the ECO start/stop function is available X Switch to drive program S or M again once the ¤ symbol reappears in (Y page 169). green in the multifunction display. Indicator lamp ; on button : and the ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go Deactivating/activating the ECO start/ out. stop function The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in the multifunction display goes out. Activating (AMG vehicles) X Press button :. Driving and parking Indicator lamp ; on button : lights up. If drive program S or M is active, the automatic transmission switches to drive program C. If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the ECO button ¤ symbol is shown in green in the Deactivating (except for AMG vehicles) multifunction display. In addition, the X Press button :. Stop/Start active message is shown in Indicator lamp ; on button : and the the AMG menu in the multifunction display. ¤ symbol in the multifunction display go If conditions for automatic engine switch- out. off (Y page 162) have not been fulfilled , the ¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If this Activating (except for AMG vehicles) is the case, the ECO start/stop function is X Press button :. not available. In addition, the Stop/Start Indicator lamp ; on button : lights up. If inactive message is shown in the AMG all conditions for automatic engine switch- menu in the multifunction display. off (Y page 162) are fulfilled, the ¤ symbol is shown in green in the i If indicator lamp ; on button : is off, multifunction display. the ECO start/stop function has been If not all conditions for automatic engine deactivated manually or as the result of a switch-off are fulfilled, the malfunction. The engine will then not be switched off automatically when the (Y page 162)¤ symbol is shown in vehicle stops. yellow in the multifunction display.Ifthis is the case, the ECO start/stop function is not available.
Z 164 Driving
Problems with the engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. can be heard. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 159). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak start. You cannot hear or discharged. Driving and parking the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 389). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical running smoothly and component of the engine management system. is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.
The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine temperature gauge is no longer being cooled sufficiently. shows a value above X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant 248 ‡ (120 †). to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 367). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. Automatic transmission 165
Automatic transmission transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display Important safety notes (Y page 165) in the multifunction display. G WARNING Transmission position and drive If the engine speed is above the idling speed program display and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There ! If the transmission position display in the is a risk of an accident. multifunction display is not working, you When engaging transmission position D or R, should pull away carefully to check whether always firmly depress the brake pedal and do the desired transmission position is notsimultaneously accelerate. engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and drive program G WARNING C or S. Do not restrict the shift range. The automatic transmission switches to Driving and parking neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle fromrolling away by applying the parking brake. Transmission position and drive program display : Transmission position display ; Drive program display DIRECT SELECTlever The current transmission position and drive Overview of transmission positions program appearinthe multifunction display. i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
Engaging parkposition P ! If the engine speed is toohigh or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P.The automatic transmission could otherwise be P Park position with parking lock damaged. R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the rightofthe steering column. i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current
Z 166 Automatic transmission
Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.
Shifting to neutral N P Park position with parking lock G WARNING R Reverse gear If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, N Neutral they could: D Drive Driving and parking Ropen the doors, thus endangering other X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the people or road users. direction of arrow P. Rget out and disrupt traffic. i The automatic transmission shifts into Roperate the vehicle's equipment. park position P automatically: Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rif you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission Rrelease the parking brake. position D or R Rshift the automatic transmission out of Rif you open the door while traveling at parking position P. very low speeds in transmission position Rstarting the engine. D or R There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Engaging parkposition P automatically SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Park position P is automatically engaged if: leave children or animals unattended in the Ryou switch off the engine using the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of SmartKey and remove the SmartKey reach of children. R you switch off the engine using the Start/ X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the Stop button and open one of the frontdoors brake pedal. R the HOLD (Y page 207) or DISTRONIC X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down PLUS (Y page 194) function brake your to the first point of resistance. vehicle until it is stationary and at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled: If the engine has been switched off, the automatic transmission automatically shifts - there is a system malfunction. to N. - the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhill If you want the automatic transmission to gradient. The electric parking brake is remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the then also applied. vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing system, observe the following notes: Automatic transmission 167
Using the SmartKey: Transmission positions RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. B Parkposition RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Do not shift the transmission into position P(Y page 179) unless the RShift to neutral N. vehicle is stationary. The parking RRelease the brake pedal. lock should not be used as a brake RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, when parking.Always apply the release it. electronic parking brake in RSwitch off the ignition and leave the additionto the parking lock in order SmartKey in the ignition lock. to secure the vehicle. Using KEYLESS-GO: If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. may be locked in position P. Have RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the the vehicle electronics checked Driving and parking brake pedal and keep it depressed. immediately at a qualified REngage park position P. specialist workshop. RRelease the brake pedal. The automatic transmission shifts RRemove the Start/Stop button from the to P automatically if you: ignition lock. Rremove the SmartKey RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rswitch off the engine when in R RSwitch on the ignition. or D and open one of the front RDepress the brake pedal and keep it doors depressed. C Reverse gear RShift to neutral N. Only shift the transmission to R RRelease the brake pedal. when the vehicle is stationary. RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.
Z 168 Automatic transmission
A Neutral Driving tips Do not shift the transmission to N Kickdown while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be Use kickdown for maximum acceleration: damaged. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the No power is transmitted from the pressure point. engine to the drive wheels. The transmission shifts to a lower gear Releasing the brakes will allow you depending on the engine speed. to move the vehicle freely, e.g.to X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the push it or tow it. desired speed is reached. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: The automatic transmission shifts back up. only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger Rocking the vehicle free
Driving and parking of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. Shifting the transmission repeatedly between If you switch off the engine using gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if the SmartKey or the Start/Stop it has become stuck in slush or snow. The button, the automatic transmission vehicle's engine management restricts shifts to neutral N automatically. repeated shifting between gears up to a ! Rolling in neutral N can damage maximum speed of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift the drive train. back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the selector lever up 7 Drive and down beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All Towing atrailer forward gears are available. X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. Changing gear X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2(Y page 170) depending on the uphill or The automatic transmission shifts to the downhill gradient, evenifcruise control or individual gears automatically when it is in DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. transmission position D.This automatic gearshifting behavior is determined by: Ra possible limitation of the shift range Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Automatic transmission 169
Program selector button Drive programs on AMG vehicles General notes C Controlled Comfortable, economical Efficiency driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gear shifting
i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 169).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
Program selector button on vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package Driving and parking X Press program selector button :. The letter M appears in the multifunction display.The manual drive program M is activated.
In the manual drive program you can change gears manually using steering wheel paddle shifters : and ;(Y page 171). In the automatic drive program, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using steering wheel paddle shifters : and ; (Y page 170). Program selector button on AMG vehicles i X Press program selector button : You can only change gear with the repeatedly until the letter for the desired steering wheel paddle shifters when the gearshift program appears in the transmission is in position D. multifunction display. The program selector button allows you to Automatic drive program choose between different driving characteristics. Drive program E (drive program C on AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following: i AMG vehicles: the automatic Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic transmission switches to automatic drive transmission settings program C each time the engine is started. Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up sooner
Z 170 Automatic transmission
Rthe vehicle pulling away moregently in Driving situations forward and reverse gears, unless the accelerator pedal is depressed fully = You can use the engine's braking effect. Rincreased sensitivity. This improves driving stability on slippery road surfaces, for 5 The braking effect of the engine can example be utilized on downhill gradients or Rthe automatic transmission shifting up when driving: sooner.This results in the vehicle being Ron steep mountain roads driven at lower engine speeds and the Rin mountainous terrain wheels being less likely to spin Rin arduous conditions Drive program S is characterized by the following: 4 The braking effect of the engine can Rsporty engine and transmission settings be utilized on extremely steep downhill gradients and long Rthe automatic transmission shifting up Driving and parking downhill stretches. later Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher as a result of the later automatic Restricting the shift range transmission shift points X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The automatic transmission shifts down Shift ranges one gear and restricts the shift range to the Introduction relevant gear. In transmission position D, you can use the i If the engine exceeds the maximum steering wheel paddle shifters to restrict or engine speed when shifting down, the derestrict the shift range for the automatic automatic transmission protects against engine damage by not shifting down. transmission (Y page 169). The shift range selected is shown in the i If the maximum engine speed for the shift multifunction display. The automatic range is reached and you continue to transmission shifts only as far as the selected accelerate, the automatic transmission gear. shifts up, even if the shift range is restricted. This prevents the engine from overrevving.
Derestricting the shift range
X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The shift range is derestricted. Automatic transmission 171
Clearing the shiftrange restriction Shifting up (AMG vehicles)
X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel ! In manual drive program M, the automatic paddle shifteruntil D is shown againinthe transmission does not shift up multifunction display. automatically even when the engine The automatic transmission shifts from the limiting speed for the current gear is current shift range directly to D. reached. When the engine limiting speed is or reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the the engine from overrevving. Always make transmission to position D. sure that the engine speed does not reach The automatic transmission shifts from the the red area of the tachometer. There is current shift range directly to D. otherwise a risk of engine damage.
Selecting the ideal shift range
X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle Driving and parking shifter and hold it in position. The automatic transmission shifts to the gear which allows optimum acceleration and deceleration. To do this, the automatic : Gear indicator transmission shifts down one or more ; Upshift indicator gears. Before the engine speed reaches the red area, an upshift indicator will be shown in the Manual drive program multifunction display. X If the color in the speedometer Switching on the manual drive program multifunction display changes to red and In manual drive program M, you can change the UP display message is shown, shift up gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters a gear. if the transmission is in position D.You can see the currently selected drive program and Downshifting which gear is engaged in the multifunction X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle display. shifter (Y page 169). X AMG vehicles: press the program selector The automatic transmission shifts down to button (Y page 169) until M appears in the the next gear. multifunction display. Maximum acceleration Shifting up (all vehicles except AMG X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle vehicles) shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear according to the speed. X Pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter (Y page 169). i If you slow down or stop without shifting The automatic transmission shifts up to the down, the automatic transmission next gear. automatically shifts down.
Z 172 Automatic transmission
Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the acceleratorpedal beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): if you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the nextgear when the maximum engine speed is Driving and parking reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M.
Switching off the manual drive program
X Press the program selector button (Y page 169) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display. Refueling 173
Problems with the transmission
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. Driving and parking X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Transfer case Refueling ! Performance tests may only be carried Important safety notes out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be G WARNING damaged. Contact a qualified specialist Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel workshop for a performance test. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. ! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the engine and ignition must be switched You must avoid fire, open flames, creating off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/ sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before electric parking brake is being tested on a refueling. brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds). G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Braking triggered automatically by ESP® There is a risk of injury. may seriously damage the brake system. You must make sure that fuel does not come ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing with either the front or the rear axle raised, and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel as doing so will damage the transmission. vapors. Keep fuel away from children. This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles.
Z 174 Refueling
If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the observe the following: fuel system. RWash away fuel from skin immediately ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted using soap and water. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, paintwork. immediately rinse them thoroughly with ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. clean water. Seek medicalassistance Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection without delay. system could be blocked by particles from RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical the fuel can. assistance without delay.Donot induce Do not get into the vehicle again during the vomiting. refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic RImmediately change out of clothing which charge could build up again. has come into contact with fuel. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray
Driving and parking out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. G WARNING Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the explosion. inside of the fuel filler flap. Always touch the vehicle body before opening For further information on fuel and fuel quality the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump (Y page 445). nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is thereby discharged. Refueling G WARNING Opening/closing the fuel filler flap Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel.
! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not : To open the fuel filler flap switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the ; To insert the fuel filler cap fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small = Fuel type to be used amounts of the wrong fuel could result in ? Tire pressure table damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked specialist workshop and have the fuel tank automatically when you open or close the and fuel lines drained completely. vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- GO. Refueling 175
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed For further information on warning and 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, next to the filling pump indicates the side of see (Y page 325). the vehicle.
Opening
X Switch the engine off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door. This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". The driver’s door can be closed again.
X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of Driving and parking arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it. X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, attach and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.
Closing
X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 325). Amessage appears in the multifunction display (Y page 301).
Z 176 Refueling
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 157). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run start. completely dry. Driving and parking X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 157). X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds (Y page 157). X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. cannot be opened. or The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 79). or X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 80).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Refueling 177
DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) Important safety notes on the refilling procedure Important notes on use DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust To function properly, BlueTEC exhaustgas gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: aftertreatment must be operated with the Rnot poisonous reducing agent DEF. Rcolorless and odorless When the supply of DEFis almost used up, the Check Additive See Operator's Rnot flammable Manual message is shown in the When you open the DEF container, small multifunction display. amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous in the multifunction display. membranes and to the eyes. You may If the Remaining Starts: 16 message experience a burning sensation in youreyes, appears in the multifunction display, you can nose and throat. Coughing and watering of Driving and parking start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is the eyes are possible. not refilled, you will subsequently be unable Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF to start the engine. Add DEF tank with tank only in well-ventilated areas. approximately 1gal (3.8l) DEF. Have the DEF DEF must not come into contact with your tankrefilled at a qualified specialist skin, eyes or clothing and mustnot be workshop. swallowed. Keep DEFaway fromchildren. i If you drive the vehicle faster than If you or other persons come into contact with 10 mph (16 km/h), the Check Additive DEF, observe the following: See Operator's Manual message goes RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with out after approximately one minute. soap and water. If the outside temperature is lower than RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes, 12 ‡ (Ò11) †, damage may occur when immediately rinse them thoroughly with adding DEF. If DEF is frozen and there is an clean water. Seek medical assistance active warning indicator, it may not be without delay. possible to add DEF. Park the vehicle in a RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your warmer place, e.g. in a garage, until DEF has mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of become fluid again. It will then be possible to water. Seek medical assistance without add DEF again. Alternatively, have the DEF delay. tank refilled at a qualified specialist RChange out of clothing contaminated with workshop. DEF immediately. Further information about BlueTEC exhaust ! Only use DEF in accordance with gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. ! The vehicle must be parked on level ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a level surface. This avoids false level readings. Filling the tank
Z 178 Refueling
is not permitted if the vehicle is not parked DEF refill bottle on a level surface. There is a danger of ! Only screw on the DEFrefill bottle hand- overfilling, which could result in damage to tight.Itcould otherwise be damaged. components of the BlueTECexhaustgas aftertreatment. ! Rinse surfaces that have come into contact with DEFimmediately with water or remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge and cold water to cleanit. DEF residues crystallize after time and contaminate the affected surfaces. ! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to Driving and parking X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill the fuel tank, this can lead to engine bottle :. damage. X Place DEFrefill bottle : on the filler neck For further information on DEF, see as shown and screw it on clockwise until (Y page 448). hand-tight. Opening the DEF filler cap X Press DEFrefill bottle : towards the filler neck. The DEFtank is filled. This may take up to one minute. i When DEFrefill bottle : is no longer pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be taken off again after being only partially emptied. X Release DEFrefill bottle :. X Turn DEFrefill bottle : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked bottle : again. automatically when you open or close the vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- DEFrefill bottles can be obtained at many gas GO. stations or at an authorized Mercedes-Benz X Switch the ignition off. Center.Refill bottles without a threaded cap do not provide overfill protection. DEF may X Press the fuel filler flap in the directionof arrow :. leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benzoffers special refill bottles with a threaded seal. The fuel fillerflap swings up. These are available at any authorized X Turn blue DEFfiller cap ; counter- Mercedes-Benz Center. clockwise and remove it. DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strip. Parking 179
Closing the DEF filler cap more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of the parking position P X Install DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck Rstarting the engine. and turn it clockwise. They could also operate the vehicle's
X To close the fuel fillerflap, press it in the equipment. There is a risk of an accident and Driving and parking direction of arrow :. injury. X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). When leaving the vehicle, always take the The Check Additive See Operator's SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Manual message goes out after leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. approximately one minute. ! i If the Check Additive See Always secure the vehicle correctly Operator's Manual message continues against rolling away.Otherwise, the vehicle to be shown in the multifunction display, or its drivetraincould be damaged. you must add more DEF. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Parking Rthe transmission must be in position P and Important safety notes the SmartKey must be removed from the ignition lock. G WARNING Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn If flammable materials such as leaves, grass the front wheels towards the curb. or twigs are exposed to prolonged contactto Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they front axle of an empty vehicle must be could ignite. There is a risk of fire. secured, for example with awheel chock. Park the vehicle so that no flammable Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the materials come into contact with parts of the rear axle of a laden vehicle must be vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not additionally secured, for example with a to park on dry grassland or harvested grain wheel chock. fields.
G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functionsare only available with limitations, or not at all.This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect.You will require considerably
Z 180 Parking
Switching off the engine Electric parking brake Important safety notes General notes G WARNING G WARNING The automatic transmission switches to If you leave children unsupervised in the neutral position N when you switch off the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for engine. The vehicle may roll away.There is a example: risk of an accident. Rreleasing the parking brake After switching off the engine, always switch Rshifting the automatic transmission out of to parking position P. Prevent the parked the parking position P vehicle from rolling away by applying the Rstarting the engine. parking brake. They could also operate the vehicle's equipment. There is a risk of an accident and
Driving and parking Using the SmartKey injury. X Apply the electric parking brake. When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Shift the transmission to position P. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ignition lock and remove it. i The immobilizer is activated. The electric parking brake performs a function test at regular intervals while the i If you turn off the engine with the engine is switched off. The sounds that can SmartKey and then remove it from the be heard while this is occurring are normal. ignition lock or open a front door, the automatic transmission shifts to P Applying/releasing manually automatically.
Using KEYLESS-GO
X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 158). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster go out. i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission shifts to N automatically. If you thenopen X To engage: push handle :. one of the frontdoors, the automatic When the electric parking brake is transmission shifts to P. engaged, the F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up i In the event of an emergency, the engine in the instrument cluster. can be turned off while the vehicle is in i motion by pressing and holding the Start/ The electric parking brake can also be Stop button for three seconds. applied when the SmartKey is removed. Parking 181
X To release: pull handle :. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada conditions must be fulfilled to automatically only) indicator lamp in the instrument release the electric parking brake: cluster goes out. Rthe driver's door is closed. i The electricparking brake can only be Ryou have shifted out of transmission released: position P or you have previously driven Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the faster than 2 mph (3 km/h) ignition lockor Rif the ignition was switched on using the Emergency braking Start/Stop button. To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake (Y page 160).
Applying automatically Driving and parking The electric parking brake is applied automatically: Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rif the HOLDfunction is keeping the vehicle X While driving, push handle : of the electric stationary parking brake. In addition, at least oneofthe following The vehicle can also be braked during an conditions must be fulfilled: emergency by using the electric parking Rthe engine is switched off. brake. Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt i The vehicle is braked for as long as the is not fastened. handle of the electric parking brake is Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy pressed. The longer the electric parking period. brake handle is depressed, the greater the The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada braking force. only) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster During braking: lights up. Ra warning tone sounds. Releasing automatically Rthe Release Park. Brake message appears The electric parking brake is released Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada automatically when all of the following only) indicator lamp in the instrument conditions are fulfilled: cluster flashes. Rthe engine is running. When the vehicle has been braked to a Rthe transmission is in position D or R. standstill, the electric parking brake is Rthe seat belt has been fastened. engaged. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. If the transmission is in position R, the trunk lid must be closed.
Z 182 Driving tips
Parking the vehicle for along period when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than before operating the telephone. four weeks, the battery may be damaged by Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph exhaustive discharging. (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers X Connecting a trickle charger. a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) i You can obtain information about trickle per second. chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Drive sensibly –save fuel If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than Observe the following tips to save fuel: six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. X Remove unnecessary loads.
Driving and parking X Remove roof carriers whenthey are not needed. Driving tips X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. General notes X Have all maintenance work carried out as Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service G WARNING interval display. If you switch off the ignitionwhile driving, Fuel consumption also increases when safety-relevant functions are only available driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, and in hilly terrain. for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect.You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Drinking and driving of an accident. G WARNING Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. G WARNING Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can If you operate mobile communication affect your reflexes, perceptions and equipment while driving, you will be judgment. distracted from traffic conditions. You could The possibility of a serious or even fatal also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk accident are greatly increased when you drink of an accident. or take drugs and drive. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow is stationary. anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a Emission control mobile phone while driving a vehicle. G WARNING If you make a call while driving, always use Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling Driving tips 183
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There drive train. This type of damage is not is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. the engine running in enclosed spaces Do not depress the brake pedal continuously withoutsufficient ventilation. while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the brakes to rub by constantly applying light Certain engine systems are designed to keep pressure to the pedal. This results in the level of poisonous components in exhaust excessive and premature wear to the brake fumes within legal limits. pads. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with Heavy and light loads the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on theengine must be carried G WARNING outby qualified and authorized Mercedes- If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while Benz technicians. driving, the braking system can overheat. This
The engine settings mustnot be changed increases the stopping distance and can even Driving and parking under any circumstances. Furthermore, all cause the braking system to fail. There is a specific service work must be carried out at risk of an accident. regular intervals and in accordance with the Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details depress the brake pedal and the accelerator can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. pedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Braking results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. Important safety notes If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy G WARNING load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Drive on for a short while. This allows the an attempt to increase the engine's braking airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and Wet roads accidents. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain Do not shift down for additional engine without braking, there may be a delayed braking on a slippery road surface. reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the Downhill gradients vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting You then have to depress the brake pedal early to a lower gear. This allows you to take more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from advantage of the engine braking effect and the vehicle in front. helps avoid overheating and excessive After driving on a wet road or having the wear of the brakes. vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying When you take advantage of the engine attention to the traffic conditions. This will braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them for some time, e.g. on a slippery road more quickly and protecting them against surface. This could cause damage to the corrosion.
Z 184 Driving tips
Limited braking performance on salt- All checks and maintenance work on the treated roads brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.Consult a If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. residue may formonthe brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly Have brake pads installed and brake fluid longer braking distance. replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible If the brake system has only been subject to salt residue. Make sure that you do not moderate loads, you should test the endanger other road users when doing so. functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the pedal when driving at a high speed. This beginning and end of a journey. improves the grip of the brake pads. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle You can find a description of Brake Assist ahead. (BAS) on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on
Driving and parking (Y page 67). Servicing the brakes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in have brake pads/linings installed on your the instrumentcluster and you hear a vehicle which have been approved for warning tone while the engine is running, Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond the brake fluid level may be too low. to an equivalent quality standard. Brake Observe additional warning messages in pads/linings which have not been approved the multifunction display. for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not The brake fluid level may be too low due to of an equivalent quality could affect your brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. vehicle's operating safety. Have the brake system checked Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only immediately. This work should be carried use brake fluid that has been specially out at a qualified specialist workshop. approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality ! A function or performance test should standard. Brake fluid which has not been only be carried out on a2-axle approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or dynamometer. If you are planning to have which is not of an equivalent quality could the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, affect your vehicle's operating safety. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further information first. High-performance brake system for Otherwise, you could damage the drive AMG vehicles train or the brake system. The high-performance brake system is ! ® Because ESP is an automatic system, installed only on the ML 63 AMG. the engine and ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/ The high-performance brake system is Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the designed for heavy loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This will depend on: electricparking brake is being tested on a brake dynamometer(maximum RSpeed 10 seconds). RBraking force Braking triggered automatically by ESP® REnvironmental conditions, such as may seriously damage the brake system. temperature and humidity Driving tips 185
The wear of individual components of the Driving on flooded roads brake system, such as the brake pads/linings ! Do not drive through flooded areas. or brake discs, depends on the individual Check the depth of any water before driving driving style and operating conditions. through it. Drive slowly through standing For this reason, it is impossible to state a water. Otherwise, water may enter the mileage that will be valid under all vehicle interior or the engine compartment. circumstances. An aggressive driving style This can damage the electronic will lead to high wear. You can obtain further components in the engine or the automatic information about this from your authorized transmission. Water can also be drawn in Mercedes-Benz Center. by the engine's air suction nozzles and this New and replaced brake pads and discs only can cause engine damage. reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: Compensate for this by applying greater force set the raised level before driving through standing water. to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and Driving and parking adapt your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period. Off-road fording Excessive heavy braking results in ! Under no circumstances should you correspondingly high brake wear. Observe accelerate before entering the water. The the # brake wear warning lamp in the bow wave could cause water to enter and instrument cluster and note any brake status damage the engine and other assemblies. messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is ! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors important to maintain and have the brake while fording. Otherwise, water could get system checked regularly. into the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle's electronics and interior equipment. Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur, you must drive in the following : Fording depth manner: Rlower your speed. Ravoid ruts. Rbrake carefully.
Z 186 Driving tips
Fording Do not shift down for additional engine depth braking on a slippery road surface.
Steel-sprung vehicles 20 in G DANGER (50 cm) If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate Vehicles with the ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases AIRMATIC package and such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the AMG vehicles vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of Raised level 20 in fatal injury. (50 cm) If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area REstablish how deep the wateris and the around the vehicle are clear of snow. To characteristics of the body of water before ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open
Driving and parking fording. a window on the side of the vehicle that is not RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package: facing into the wind. select the highest possible vehicle level. Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2. specialist workshop at the onset of winter. RAvoid high engine speeds. REnter and exit the water at a flat place and i Vehicles with adiesel engine: do not at a steady walking pace. cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective cover. The measuring function of the RDrive slowly and at an even speed through onboard diagnosis systemmay otherwise the water. provide inaccurate values.Some of these RDo not stop. values are required by law and must RWater offers a high degree of resistance, therefore always be accurate. and the ground is slippery and in some Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and section (Y page 400). dangerous to pull away in the water. REnsure that a bow wave does not form as Driving with summer tires you drive. RClean any mud from the tire tread after Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" fording. section (Y page 400). RApply the brakes to dry them after fording. Slippery road surfaces G WARNING Winter driving If you shift down on a slippery road surface in General notes an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. G WARNING There is an increased danger of skidding and If you shift down on a slippery road surface in accidents. an attempt to increase the engine's braking Do not shift down for additional engine effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. braking on a slippery road surface. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Driving tips 187
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be into the brakes. This could result in a reduced stopped when moving at low speed: braking effect or in total brake failure and also in increased wear and tear. The braking X Shift the transmission to position N. characteristics change depending on the i For more information on driving with material ingressing the brakes. Cleanthe snow chains, see (Y page 401). brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a Drive particularly carefully on slippery road reduced braking effect or grinding noises, surfaces.Avoid sudden acceleration, steering have the brake system checked in a qualified and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise specialist workshop as soon as possible. control or DISTRONIC PLUS. Adapt your driving style to the different braking characteristics. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device Driving off-road increases the likelihood of and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead Changes in the outside temperature are to failure of the mechanical assembly or displayed after a short delay. systems. Adapt your driving style to suit the Driving and parking terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have Indicated temperatures just above the damage to the vehicle rectified immediately freezing point do not guarantee that the road at a qualified specialist workshop. surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You Do not switch to transmission position N should pay special attention to road when driving off-road. You could lose control conditions when temperatures are around of the vehicle if you attempt to brake using freezing point. the service brake. If the gradient is too steep, drive backwards in reverse gear.
Off-road driving General notes Important safety notes Read this section carefully before driving your vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more G WARNING gentle off-road terrain first. If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or Familiarize yourself with the characteristics turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle of your vehicle and the gear shift operation could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is before driving through difficult terrain. a risk of an accident. The following driving systems are specially Always drive on a steep incline in the line of adapted to off-road driving: fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the ROff-road ABS (Y page 66) vehicle. RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level) (Y page 209) G WARNING RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center (Y page 246) of gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle to tip over more easily on uphill or Observe the following notes: downhill gradients. There is arisk of an RStop the vehicle before starting to drive accident. along an off-road route. Selectthe lowest possible vehicle level. RFor vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select a vehicle level that is When driving off-road, sand, mud and water, suitable for the off-road terrain. To avoid possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get
Z 188 Driving tips
damaging the vehicle, make sure there is Checklist before driving off-road always sufficient ground clearance. ! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up RCheck that items of luggage and loads are while the vehicle is in motion, stop the stowed safely and are well secured vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. (Y page 337). Check the engine oil level. The engine oil RAlways keep the engine running and in gear warning lamp warning must not be ignored. when driving on a downhill gradient. Continuing the journey while the symbol is Activate DSR(Ypage 246). displayed could lead to engine damage. RAlways keep the doors, tailgate, windows X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level and sliding sunroof closed while driving. and add oil if necessary. RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The When driving on steep gradients, the rougher, steeper or more ruts on the engine oil level must be sufficiently high to terrain, the slower your speed should be. ensure a correctoil supply in the vehicle. RDrive slowly and at an even speed through
Driving and parking X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the the water. Ensure that a bow wave does not fluid level and, if necessary, refill to the form as you drive. maximum (13 l) (Y page 177). RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off- X Wheel-changing tool kit: check that the road routes where visibility is poor. For jackis working and make sure you have the safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first lug wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding and survey the off-road route. spade in the vehicle. RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks, X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread holes, tree stumps and furrows. depth and tire pressure. RCheck the depth of water before fording X Check for damage and remove any foreign rivers and streams. objects, e.g. small stones, from the RWhen fording, do not stop and do not wheels/tires. switch off the engine. X Replace any missing valve caps. ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the X Replace dented or damaged wheels. rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could become stuckinloose X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a ground. loss of tire pressure and damage the tire bead. Therefore, check your rims before RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will driving off-road and replace them as interrupt the vehicle's propulsion. required. RAlways keep the engine running and in gear when driving on a slope. Checklist after driving off-road RDo not shift the automatic transmission to transmission position N. ! If you detect damage to the vehicle after driving off-road, have the vehicle checked i Do not use the HOLD function when immediately at a qualified specialist driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill workshop. gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle X Deactivate DSR (Y page 246). on such surfaces. X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: lower the vehicle to a ride height suitable for the road conditions, e.g. to the highway/high-speed level. Driving tips 189
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and Rdrive quickly to overcomethe rolling check for damage. resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels X Clean the frontand rearlicense plates. could become stuck in loose ground. X Clean the wheels/tires with a water jet and Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles if remove any foreign objects. possible. Make sure that: X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and the - the tire ruts are not too deep. vehicle underside with a water jet; check - the sand is sufficiently firm. for any foreign objects and damage. - the ground clearance of the vehicle is X Check whether twigs or other parts of sufficient. plants have become trapped. These increase the risk of fire and can damage Tire ruts and gravel roads fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber bellows of the axle joints and propeller ! Check that the ruts are not too deep and shafts. that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged Driving and parking X After the trip, examine without fail the or bottom out and get stuck. entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, bodywork structure, steering, chassis and Observe the following rules when driving exhaust system for damage. along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with X After driving for extended periods across loose gravel: sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package: conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, select a raised vehicle level. brake pads/linings and axle joints checked Ravoid high engine speeds. and cleaned. Rselect shift range 1. X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road Rdrive slowly. travel, check for foreign objects in the Rwhere ruts are too deep, drive with the wheels and drive train and remove themif wheels of one side on the center grassy necessary.Foreign objects can disturb the area, if possible. balance and cause vibrations. Driving over rough terrain places greater Crossing obstacles demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. After driving off-road, check ! Obstacles could damage the floor of the the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask promptly and reduce the risk of an accident passengers for guidance when driving over to yourself and other road users. large obstacles. The passenger should always keep a safe distance from the Driving on sand vehicle when doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of unexpected vehicle Observe the following rules when driving on movements. After driving off-road or over sand: obstacles, check the vehicle for possible Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package: damage, especially to the underbody and select a raised vehicle level. the components of the chassis. Ravoid high engine speeds. Rselect a shift range appropriate to the terrain.
Z 190 Driving tips
All vehicles (except vehicles with AMG bodystyling) : ; Steel-sprung 26° 25° vehicles Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package
Observe the following rules when driving over Highway level 23° 23° tree stumps, large stones and other Raised level 30° 28° obstacles: Vehicles with the RRaise the vehicle level. Driving and parking ON&OFFROAD RAvoid high engine speeds. package RSelect shift range 1. Highway level 23° 23° RDrive very slowly. RDrive straight over the center of obstacles. Off-road level 1 26° 25° Off-road level 2 30° 28° Traveling uphill Off-road level 3 31° 29° Approach/departure angle AMG vehicles G WARNING Highway level (in 19° 21° If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or sports mode with turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle the AMG adaptive could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is suspension system a risk of an accident. activated) Always drive on a steep incline in the line of Raised level 23° 24° fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the vehicle. Vehicles with AMG bodystyling : ; Steel-sprung 25° 25° vehicles Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package Highway level 22° 22° Raised level 28° 27° Driving tips 191
: ; Maximum gradient-climbing capability On good road surfaces the maximum Vehicles with the gradient-climbing capability of your vehicle is ON&OFFROAD 100%, which corresponds to an approach/ package departure angle of 45°. Note that the Highway level 22° 22° vehicle's gradient-climbing capability depends on the off-road conditions. Off-road level 1 25° 24° Accelerate carefully and make sure that the Off-road level 2 28° 27° wheels do not spin when driving on steep terrain. Off-road level 3 29° 29° i If the load on the front axle is reduced when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, RObserve the rules on off-road driving. the front wheels have a tendency to spin. RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines
4ETS recognizes this and brakes the Driving and parking or gradients, butinstead follow the direct wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque line of fall.The maximum gradient-climbing is increased, making it easier to drive off. capability of your vehicle is 100%, which corresponds to an approach/departure Hilltops angle of 45°. Note that the climbing ability of your vehicle depends on the terrain When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly conditions. reduce pressure on the accelerator RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, immediately before reaching the brow of the select shift range 1. hill. Use the vehicle's own impetus to drive RDrive slowly. over the top of the hill. RAvoid high engine speeds –drive at an This style of driving prevents: appropriate engine speed (maximum Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the 3,000 rpm). brow of a hill RWhen driving downanincline, make use of Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down the engine's braking effect. Observe the the other side engine speed; do not overrevthe engine. RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road Driving downhill driving. RDrive slowly. i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling RDo not drive at an angle down steep away on a hill. inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive For more information, see "Hill start assist" with the front wheels aligned straight. (Y page 161). Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. Do not switch to transmission position N when driving off-road. If you try to brake the RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, vehicle using the service brake, you could select shift range 1. lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in gently. When doing so, make sure that the reverse gear. vehicle is facing in the direction of the line of fall. RCheck that the brakes are working normally after a long downhill stretch.
Z 192 Driving systems
i The special off-road ABS setting enables on the brake system and prevents the brakes a precise, brief and repeated locking of the from overheating and wearing too quickly. frontwheels. This causes them to dig into Use cruise control only if road and traffic loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels conditions make it appropriate to maintain a easily skid across the ground surface if steady speed for a prolonged period. You can completely braked and therefore lose their store any road speed above 20 mph ability to steer. (30 km/h). i Cruise control should not be activated Driving systems during off-road driving. Cruise control Cruise control lever Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise Driving and parking control can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. Do not use cruise control: : To activate or increase speed Rin road and traffic conditions which do not ; To activate or reduce speed allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. = To deactivate cruise control in heavy traffic or on winding roads ? To activate at the current speed/last Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or stored speed accelerating could cause the drive wheels When you activate cruise control, the stored to lose traction and the vehicle could then speed is shown in the multifunction display skid for five seconds. In the multifunction display, Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, the segments between the stored speed and heavy rain or snow the maximum speed light up. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed stored. Activation conditions
General notes To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: Cruise control maintains a constant road Rthe electric parking brake must be speed for you. It brakes automatically in order released. to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and steep downhill gradients, especially if the Ryou are driving faster than 20mph vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must (30 km/h). select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By RESP® must be active, but not intervening. doing so, you will make use of the braking Rthe transmission must be in position D. effect of the engine, which relieves the load Driving systems 193
RDSR must be deactivated. Pay attention to the road and traffic Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated conditions before calling up the stored speed. (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). If you do notknow the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Storing, maintaining and calling up a speed
Storing and maintaining aspeed Driving and parking
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. X Remove your footfrom the accelerator X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired pedal. speed. The first time cruise control is activated, it X Briefly press the cruise control lever stores the current speed or regulates the up : or down ;. speed of the vehicle to the previously stored speed. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle Setting aspeed automatically maintains the stored speed. You can accept the current speed if you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). i Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing or calling up aspeed Keep in mind thatitmay take a briefmoment G WARNING until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to If you call up the stored speed and it differs the speed set. from the current speed, the vehicle X Press the cruise control lever up : for a accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a riskofan X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph accident. increments (1 km/h increments): briefly
Z 194 Driving systems
press the cruise control lever up : or Ryou activate DSR. down ; to the pressure point. Ryou shift the transmission to position N Every time the cruise control lever is while driving. pressed up : or down ; the last speed If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear stored is increased or reduced. a warning tone. You will see the Cruise X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph Control Off message in the multifunction increments (10 km/h increments): display for approximately five seconds. briefly press the cruise control lever i When you switch off the engine, the last up : or down ; to the pressure point. speed stored is cleared. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. DISTRONIC PLUS i Cruise control is not deactivated if you Important safety notes
Driving and parking depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if you accelerate briefly to G WARNING overtake, cruise control adjusts the DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: vehicle's speed to the last speed stored Rpeople or animals after you have finished overtaking. Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. Deactivating cruise control stopped or parked vehicles Roncoming and crossing traffic As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.
G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complex traffic situations. There are several ways to deactivate cruise In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may: control: Rgive an unnecessary warning and then X Briefly press the cruise control lever brake the vehicle forwards :. Rneither give a warning nor intervene or Raccelerate unexpectedly X Brake. There is a risk of an accident. Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: Continue to drive carefully and be ready to brake, in particular when warned to do so by Ryou engage the electric parking brake. DISTRONIC PLUS. Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h). G WARNING ® ® RESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP . DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this Driving systems 195
braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a warns you visually and audibly. There is a risk vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may of an accident. unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and stored speed. try to take evasive action. This speed may: Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function or an exit lane is activated, the vehicle brakes Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand automatically in certain situations. To lane that you overtake vehicles in the left- preventdamage to the vehicle, deactivate hand lane DISTRONICPLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand Rwhen towing the vehicle lane Rin the car wash If there is a change of drivers, advise the new Driving and parking If you fail to adapt yourdriving style, driver of the speed stored. DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor overridethe laws of physics. General notes DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and the road, traffic and weather conditions. automatically helps you maintain the DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are distance to the vehicle detected in front. responsible for the distance to the vehicle in DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good that the set speed is not exceeded. time and for staying in your lane. On long and steep downhill gradients, Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a Rin road and traffic conditions which do not trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in good time. By doing so, you will make use in heavy traffic or on winding roads of the braking effect of the engine, This Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or relieves the load on the brake system and accelerating could cause the drive wheels prevents the brakes from overheating and to lose traction and the vehicle could then wearing too quickly. skid If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order heavy rain or snow to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow in front. vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk vehicles driving on a different line. of a collision, you will be warned visually and In particular, the detection of obstacles can acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot be impaired if: prevent a collision without your intervention. An intermittent warning tone will then sound Rdirt on the sensors or anything else and the distance warning lamp will light up in covering the sensors the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in Rsnow or heavy rain order to increase the distance to the vehicle Rinterference by other radar sources in front or take evasive action provided it is Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in safe to do so. parking garages
Z 196 Driving systems
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when Any unauthorized modification to this driving, the radar sensorsystem mustbe: device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Ractivated (Y page 277) Roperational Cruise control lever If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control in the speed range between 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) and120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of d parking you, it operates in the speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on roads with steep gradients. Driving an As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it can resemble the radar detectors of the : To activate or increase speed responsible authorities. You can refer to the ; To activate or reduce speed relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions are asked about this. = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS ? To activate at the currentspeed/last i USA only: stored speed This device has been approved by the FCC A To set the specified minimum distance as a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive Activating DISTRONIC PLUS radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any Activation conditions warranties, and is not permitted by the In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in following conditions must be fulfilled: any non-approved way. Any unauthorized modification to this Rthe engine must be started. It may take up device could void the user’s authority to to two minutes after pulling away before operate the equipment. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Rthe electric parking brake must be i Canada only: This device complies with released. RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is R ® subject to the following two conditions: ESP must be active, but not intervening. 1. This device may not cause harmful Rthe transmission must be in position D. interference, and Rthe driver's door must be closed when you 2. this device must accept any interference shift from P to D or your seat belt must be received, including interference that may fastened. cause undesired operation of the device. Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors Removal, tampering, or altering of the must be closed. device will void any warranties, and is not Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use (vehicles with the ON&OFFROADpackage). in any non-approved way. RDSR must be deactivated. Rthe vehicle must notskid. Driving systems 197
Activating while driving i If you do notfully release the accelerator pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive message appears in the multifunction display. The set distance to a slower- moving vehicle in front will then not be maintained. You will be driving at the speed you determine by the position of the acceleratorpedal. Activating when driving towards a stationary vehicle X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. X Briefly pull the cruise control levertowards you ; or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. Driving and parking increments (1 km/h increments): briefly X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the press the cruise control lever up : to the pressure point for a higher speed or down pressure point for a higher speed or down = for a lower speed. = for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. is increased or reduced. or or X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher up : past the pressure point for a higher speed or down = for a lower speed. speed or down = for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. is increased or reduced. If the vehicle in frontofyou is stationary, you X Remove your foot from the accelerator can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your pedal. vehicle is stationary as well. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at vehicle in front, but only up to the desired under 20 mph (30km/h) if a vehicle in front stored speed. has been detected. Therefore, the If the vehicle in front has been detected and DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the is shown in the multifunction display, you can instrumentcluster should be activated also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when driving (Y page 272). at speeds below 20 mph (30km/h). If the i You can use the cruise control lever to set vehicle in front is no longer detected and the stored speed and the control on the displayed, for example because it has cruise control lever to set the specified changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is minimum distance (Y page 200). deactivated. You will hear awarning tone if this is the case.
Z 198 Driving systems
Activating at the current speed/last Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS storedspeed Pulling away and driving G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a riskofan accident. Pay attention to the road and traffic conditions before calling up the stored speed. If you do notknow the stored speed, store the desired speed again. X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove Driving and parking yourfoot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise control. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you :. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in front has slowed down, it brakes your X Remove your footfrom the accelerator vehicle. In this way, the distance you have pedal. selected is maintained. DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it is activated, the current speed is If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. speed to the previously stored value. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary. Changing lanes If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC PLUS supports you when: Ryou are driving faster than 40mph (60 km/h) RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance to a vehicle in front Driving systems 199
Ryou switch on the appropriate turnsignal approximately 1.5 secondswhendriving on RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger a traffic circle. of collision Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle a highway exit and approximately is accelerated. Acceleration will be 4seconds after the highway exit. interrupted if changing lanes takes too long Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to or if the distance between your vehicle and the set speed you specified. the vehicle in front becomes too small. Stopping i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS G WARNING monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked drive vehicles. only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in Vehicles with COMAND the voltage supply. Driving and parking RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupantorfrom outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Example: traffic circle There is a risk of an accident. i The following function is not operational If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off in all countries. DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle DISTRONIC PLUS uses additional information against rolling away. from your navigation system so that it can If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle react appropriately to certain traffic in front is stopping, it brakes yourvehicle until situations. This is the case if, while following it is stationary. a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains Rapproach or drive through a traffic circle stationary and you do not need to depress the Rapproach a T-intersection brake. Rturnoff at a highway exit After a time, the electric parking brake Even if the vehicle in front leaves the secures the vehicle and relieves the service detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS brake. temporarily maintains the current driving Depending on the specified minimum speed and does not accelerate. This is based distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill on the current map data in the navigation at a sufficientdistance behind the vehicle in system. front.The specified minimum distance is set The current speed is maintained: using the control on the cruise control lever. Rapproximately 10 seconds before the traffic circle/T intersection and
Z 200 Driving systems
The electric parking brake automatically i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is depress the accelerator pedal. If you activated and: accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last seat belt is unfastened. speed stored after you have finished overtaking. Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is automatically switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Setting the specified minimum distance Ra system malfunction occurs. Rthe power supply is not sufficient. On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is a malfunction, the transmission may also automatically be shifted into position P. Driving and parking Setting aspeed
You can set the specified minimum distance for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span between one and two seconds. With this function, you can set the minimum distance that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this distance in the multifunction display (Y page 202). Keep in mind thatitmay take a briefmoment X To increase: turn control ; in direction until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to =. the speed set. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater X Press the cruise control lever up : for a distance between your vehicle and the higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. vehicle in front. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph X To decrease: turn control ; in increments (1 km/h increments): briefly direction :. press the cruise control lever up : or DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter down ; to the pressure point. distance between your vehicle and the Every time the cruise control lever is vehicle in front. pressed up : or down ; the last speed i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently stored is increased or reduced. safe distance from the vehicle in front. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front if increments (10 km/h increments): necessary. briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. Driving systems 201
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards you in order to pull away and the front- passenger door or one of the rear doors is open Ryou activate DSR Ryou activate off-road program 2onvehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package Rthe vehicle has skidded If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five There are several ways to deactivate seconds. DISTRONIC PLUS:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever Displays in the instrument cluster Driving and parking forwards :. Displays in the speedometer or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. Whenyou deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds. i The last speed stored remains stored until you switch off the engine. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speedometer speed stored after you have finished When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or overtaking. two segments ; in the set speed range light DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically up. deactivated if: If DISTRONIC PLUS detects avehicle in front, Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if segments ; between speed of the vehicle in the vehicle is automatically secured with front : and stored speed = light up. the electric parking brake i For design reasons, the speed displayed Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph in the speedometer may differ slightly from (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP® Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position Ryou switch off the radar sensor system (Y page 277)
Z 202 Driving systems
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated activated
Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUSis Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activated deactivated in the multifunction display Driving and parking : Vehicle in front, if detected : DISTRONIC PLUS activated ; Distance indicator, current distance to ; Own vehicle the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable vehicle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected ? Own vehicle In the Assistance menu (Y page 272)of the In the Assistance menu (Y page 272) of the on-board computer, you can select the on-board computer, you can select the distance display. distance display. X Select the Distance display function X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer using the on-board computer (Y page 272). (Y page 272). You will see the stored speed for about five In the Assistance menu of the on-board seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. computer, you can also activate or deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 272). Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: Rcornering, going into and coming out of a bend Rvehicles traveling on a differentline Rother vehicles changing lanes Rnarrow vehicles Robstructions and stationary vehicles Rcrossing vehicles In such situations, brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. Driving systems 203
Cornering, going into and coming out of a DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the bend vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be too short. Narrow vehicles
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUSto detect
vehicles when cornering is limited. Your Driving and parking vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the Vehicles traveling on adifferent line vehicle in front on the edge of the road, because of its narrow width.The distance to the vehicle in front will be too short. Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in frontwill be too short. Other vehicles changing lanes DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.
Z 204 Driving systems
Crossing vehicles characteristics can be significantly impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away.
G WARNING Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event of an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions. There is a risk of an accident. DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect Always adapt your speed and driving style to vehicles that are crossing your lane. the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the Driving and parking Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights prevailing road and weather conditions. with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally. ! When driving on extremely rough terrain, select a high vehicle level in good time. Make sure there is always sufficient ground Level control (vehicles with the clearance. You will otherwise damage the ON&OFFROAD package) vehicle. Important safety notes RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. G WARNING Failure to operate this vehicle safely may When the vehicle is being lowered, people result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, could become trapped if their limbs are and severe or fatal injury. between the vehicle body and the wheels or RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is underneath the vehicle.There is a risk of significantly more likely to die than a injury. person wearing a seat belt. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle You and all vehicle occupants should or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel always wear your seat belts. arches when the vehicle is being lowered. Level control adapts the vehicle level G WARNING automatically to the current operating and driving situation. This results in reduced fuel When you drive with the vehicle raised, the consumption and improved handling. driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The Make changes to the vehicle level while the vehicle could rollover more easily, for vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle example on a bend. There is a risk of an to adjust to the new level as quickly as accident. possible. Always select as low a vehicle level as The vehicle level may change visibly if you possible and adjust your driving style. park the vehicle and the outside temperature changes. If the temperature drops, the G WARNING vehicle level is lower; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises. When you drive with the chassis lowered or raised, the vehicle's braking and driving Driving systems 205
If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has been closed. For information aboutdriving off-road, see : Selector wheel (Y page 187). ; To raise the level Basic settings = Indicator lamps
The extent to which the vehicle is raised or ? To lower the level Driving and parking lowered depends on the basic setting X Start the engine. selected. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press Select: selector wheel :. Rhighway/high-speed level for driving on Selector wheel : extends. normal roads If one or more indicator lamps = are on: Roff-road level 1for driving on easily negotiable off-road terrain X Turn selector wheel : counter- clockwise ? until all indicator lamps = Roff-road level 2 for driving on normal off- road terrain that are lit start to flash. The vehicle is lowered to highway level. As Roff-road level 3for freeing the vehicle in soon as the next lowest level is reached, particularly rough terrain at low speeds the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes only out. The individual vehicle levels differ from highway level as follows: Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm) Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm) Roff-road level 1: + 1.2 in (+30 mm) Roff-road level 2: + 2.3 in (+60 mm) Roff-road level 3: + 3.6 in (+ 90 mm)
Highway/high-speed level ! Make sure that there is enough ground clearance when the vehicle is being During the adjustment, the Lowering lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground, message, for example, appears in the damaging the underbody. multifunction display. If you press the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message
Z 206 Driving systems
will disappear.Once highway level has been Indicator lamps = for the desired off-road reached, all indicator lamps = go out. level flash: The vehicle automatically selects highway ROff-road level 1: the lower indicator lamp level if you are driving at a speed above flashes 70 mph (115km/h) or if you drive at a speed ROff-road level 2: the lower and center between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph indicator lamps flash (115 km/h) for approximately20 seconds. ROff-road level 3: all three indicator lamps The vehicle is lowered to high-speed level if flash you are traveling at higher speeds. The vehicle adjusts to the off-road level Off-road levels selected. As soon as an off-road level is reached, the corresponding indicator lamp General notes stops flashing and lights up constantly. ROnly select off-road level 3 for driving off- Raising the vehicle
Driving and parking road in particularly rough terrain. During the adjustment, the Vehicle RAdjust yourdriving style to the altered rising message, for example, appears in the handling characteristics. multifunction display. RDo not drive faster than 12 mph The vehicle rises from highwaylevel to off- (20 km/h). road level 1. If you press the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear. i Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the messages using the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel. Once off-road level 2has been reached, the lower and centerindicatorlamps of the selectorwheel are on.
Only select an off-road level when this is appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumptionincreases and handling may be affected. X Start the engine. X Selectorwheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. X To raise: turn selector wheel : clockwise ;. While the adjustment from off-road level 2to The vehicle is raised. off-road level 3is taking place, you will see a or message such as the following in the X To lower: turn selector wheel : counter- multifunction display: Vehicle rising clockwise ?. Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h). The vehicle is lowered. Driving systems 207
The Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h) You can select from the following: message draws your attention to the ROff-road level 1atspeeds up to 60 mph maximum speed permitted for off-road (100 km/h) level 3. ROff-road level 2atspeeds up to 40 mph Once off-road level 3has been reached, you (65 km/h) will see a message shown in white in the ROff-road level 3atspeeds up to 12 mph multifunction display, for example: Max. (20 km/h) Speed 12 mph (20 km/h). If you are driving above 50 mph (80 km/h) or If you drive above20 km/h at off-road level drive between 40 mph (65 km/h) and 3, you will see the following message in red 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than in the multifunctiondisplay: Vehicle 20 seconds, off-road level 2will be canceled. Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h). The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 1. i You cannot clear these messages. You will see a message in the multifunction display, for example: Lowering. You also hear a warning. The vehicle is Driving and parking lowered and off-road level 3is canceled. If you are driving above 70 mph (115 km/h) If you continue to increase your speed, the or drive between 62 mph (100 km/h) and red message continues to be shown in the 70 mph (115 km/h) for longer than multifunction display. The newly set level is 20 seconds, off-road level 1will be canceled. not displayed until the vehicle has been set Depending on the vehicle's speed and the to a level suitable for the current speed. ADSmode selected (Y page 209), the vehicle is automatically lowered to highway or high- Lowering the vehicle speed level. You will see a message in the multifunction display, for example: Lowering.
HOLD function Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away despite being braked by the HOLD function if: If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in see a message in white in the display while the voltage supply. the vehicle is being lowered, such as the Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by following: Vehicle Lowering Max. Speed pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake 12 mph (20 km/h). pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2. Rthe electrical system in the engine If you select an off-road level when driving at compartment, the battery or the fuses have too high a speed, the Please reduce been tampered with. speed message appears in the multifunction Rthe battery is disconnected display. There is a risk of an accident.
Z 208 Driving systems
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off Activating the HOLD function the HOLD function and secure the vehicle X Make sure that the activation conditions against rolling away. are met. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function X Depress the brake pedal. is activated, the vehicle brakes X Quickly depress the brake pedal further automatically in certain situations. To until ë appears in the multifunction prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate display. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in The HOLD function is activated. You can the following or other similar situations: release the brake pedal. Rwhen towing the vehicle i If depressing the brake pedal the first Rin the car wash time does not activate the HOLD function, wait briefly and then try again. Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 208).
Driving and parking General notes Deactivating the HOLD function The HOLD function can assist the driver in the The HOLD function is deactivated following situations: automatically if: R Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep you accelerate and the transmission is in slopes position D or R R Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes you shift the transmission to position P Rwhen waiting in traffic Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a certain amount of pressure until ë The vehicle is kept stationary withoutthe disappears from the multifunction display driver having to depress the brake pedal. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD parking brake function deactivated when you depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS i Do not use the HOLD function when i After a time, the electric parking brake driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill secures the vehicle and relieves the service gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. brake. The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle The electric parking brake automatically on such surfaces. secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is activated and: Activation conditions Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's You can activate the HOLD function if: seat belt is unfastened. R Rthe vehicle is stationary the engine is switched off. R Rthe engine is running a system malfunction occurs. R Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt the power supply is not sufficient. is fastened On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there Rthe electric parking brake is released is a malfunction, the transmission may also be automatically shifted into position P. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated Driving systems 209
AIRMATIC package X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports General notes suspension tuning is selected. The vehicle AIRMATIC regulates the level of your vehicle. is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm). As well as level control (Y page 210), your The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode vehicle can be equipped with ADS(Adaptive ensures even better contact with the road. Damping System) (Y page 209) and ACTIVE Select this mode when employing a sporty CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 209). driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Observe the notes on driving with a trailer Comfort tuning (Y page 253).
ADS (Adaptive Damping System)
General notes
ADS adapts the damping characteristics to Driving and parking the current operating and driving situation. This depends on: Ryour driving style Rthe road surface conditions Rthe ADS setting Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD Rthe vehicle level setting package Your selection remains stored evenifyou : Suspension tuning button remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. ; Indicator lamp for sports tuning Sports tuning = Indicator lamp for comfort tuning
X Press button :. Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning is selected. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in (15 mm). In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfortmode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD freeway. package : Suspension tuning button Active Curve System ; Indicator lamp for sports tuning The Active Curve System uses active = Indicator lamp for comfort tuning stabilizers to optimize both driving comfort X Start the engine. and vehicle agility. Depending on the ADS mode selected (Y page 209), the Active Curve System also changes the setting.
Z 210 Driving systems
If you select ADS comfort mode: the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road Rrolling movement is reduced in the event of conditions. There is a risk of an accident. changing surface undulations Always adapt your speed and driving style to Rthe roll angle when cornering is reduced the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the Rthe driving style is agile prevailing road and weather conditions. If you select ADS sport mode: ! When driving on extremely rough terrain, Rthe roll angle is reduced significantly select a high vehicle level in good time. Rthe driving style is even more agile Make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. You will otherwise damage the Level control vehicle. ! When you raise the vehicle in such a way Important safety notes that not all wheels have contact with the G WARNING ground, remove the SmartKey from the Driving and parking When the vehicle is being lowered, people ignition lock. could become trapped if their limbs are RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher betweenthe vehicle body and the wheels or rollover rate than other types of vehicles. underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of Failure to operate this vehicle safely may injury. result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle and severe or fatal injury. or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is arches when the vehicle is being lowered. significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. G WARNING You and all vehicle occupants should When you drive with the vehicle raised, the always wear your seat belts. driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The General notes vehicle could rollover more easily, for Further information about "Driving off-road" example on a bend. There is a risk of an (Y page 187). accident. Level control adapts the vehicle level Always select as low a vehicle level as automatically to the current operating and possible and adjust your driving style. driving situation. This results in reduced fuel consumption and improved handling. G WARNING If you select ADS comfort mode When you drive with the chassis lowered or (Y page 209), the vehicle is lowered to high- raised, the vehicle's braking and driving speed level as the speed increases. As the characteristics can be significantly impaired. vehicle speed decreases, the vehicle is raised You could also exceed the permissible vehicle back up to highway level. height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk If you select ADS sport mode (Y page 209), of an accident. the vehicle skips highway level and lowers Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away. directly to high-speed level depending on the basic setting (Y page 211). G WARNING Make changes to the vehicle level while the Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event of to adjust to the new level as quickly as an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when possible. Driving systems 211
The vehicle level may change visibly if you If indicator lamp ; is not lit: park the vehicle and the outside temperature X Press button :. changes. If the temperature drops, the Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle rises vehicle level is lower; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises. to raised level. If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the vehicle begins to compensate for load discrepancies while still parked. However, for significant level changes, such as after the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has
been closed. Driving and parking
Basic settings During the adjustment, the Vehicle The extentto which the vehicle is raised or rising message, for example, appears in the lowered depends on the basic setting multifunction display. selected. Select raised level for off-road If you press the % or a button on the driving or highway/high-speed level for multifunction steering wheel, the message normal roads. will disappear. The individual vehicle levels differ from Once the vehicle has reached raised level, highway level as follows: indicator lamp ; remains lit. The Vehicle Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm) rising message disappears from the Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm) multifunction display. Rraised level: +2.3 in (+60 mm) If you try to select raised level at a speed above 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More Raised level Slowly message appears in the multifunction display. Highway/high-speed level ! Make sure that there is enough ground clearance when the vehicle is being lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging the underbody.
Only select raised level if this is appropriate for the road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption may increase and handling may be affected. X Start the engine.
Z 212 Driving systems
The vehicle automatically adjusts to highway level when you: Rdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) or Rdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds Depending on the ADS mode selected (Y page 209), the vehicle is lowered to high- speed level at high speeds.
: Level control button ; Level control indicator lamp AMG adaptive sport suspension system X Start the engine.
Driving and parking Rear axle level control If indicator lamp ; is lit: The vehicle automatically sets the vehicle X Press button :. level at the rear axle. Rearaxle level control Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle is ensures the best possible suspension and adjusting to highway/high-speed level. that the ground clearance remains constant evenwhen the vehicle is loaded. This improves driving safety and fuel consumption.
Suspension tuning
General notes The electronically controlled damping system works continuously.This improves driving safety and ride comfort. The damping is tuned individually to each During the adjustment, the Lowering wheel and depends on: message, for example, appears in the Ryour driving style, e.g. sporty multifunction display. Rthe road surface condition,e.g. bumps If you press the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport+ will disappear. or Comfort Once highway level has been reached, If you select Sport or Sport + mode and indicator lamp ; goes out. The Lowering restart the engine, the suspension setting reverts to Comfort mode. message disappears from the multifunction display. Driving systems 213
Sport mode Comfort mode In Comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select comfortmode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of freeway. X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps = and ; go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The AMG Suspension System COMFORT The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode message appears in the multifunction ensures even better contact with the road. display.
Select this mode when employing a sporty Driving and parking driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. X Press the : button once. PARKTRONIC Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Sport mode. Important safety notes The AMG Suspension System SPORT PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with message appears in the multifunction ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and display. audibly the distance between your vehicle and an object. Sport + mode PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a The very firm setting of the suspension tuning replacement for your attention to your in Sport +mode ensures the best possible immediate surroundings. You are always contact with the road. Select this mode only responsible for safe maneuvering, parking when driving on race circuits. and exiting a parking space. When If indicator lamps = and ; are off: maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a X Press button : twice. parking space, make sure that there are no Indicator lamps = and ; light up. You persons, animals or objectsinthe area in which you are maneuvering. have selected Sport +mode. The AMG Suspension System SPORT + ! When parking, pay particular attention to message appears in the multifunction objects above or below the sensors, such display. as flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects If indicator lamp ; lights up: when they are in the immediate vicinity of X Press the : button once. the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle Second indicator lamp = lights up. You or the objects. have selected Sport +mode. The sensors may not detect snow and other The AMG Suspension System SPORT + objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. message appears in the multifunction Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic display. car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Z 214 Driving systems
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. Side view PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and four sensors in the rear bumper. Driving and parking
Top view The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking side (example) care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 373). Range of the sensors Front sensors General notes PARKTRONIC does nottake objects into Center Approx. 40in (approx. considerationthat are: 100cm) Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, Corners Approx. 24in (approx. animals or objects 60cm) Rabove the detection range, e.g. Rear sensors overhanging loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps. Center Approx. 48in (approx. 120cm) Corners Approx. 32in (approx. 80cm)
Minimum distance Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm) Corners Approx. 6in (approx. 15cm) Driving systems 215
If there is an obstacle within this range, the Transmission Warning display relevant warning displays lightup and a position warning tone sounds. If the distance falls below the minimum, the distance may no D Front area activated longer be shown. R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas is rolling activated Warning displays backwards P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Driving and parking Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an intermittent warning tone for approximately two seconds. Warning display for the frontarea Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a : Segments on the left-hand side of the warning tone for approximately two vehicle seconds. This indicates that you have now ; Segments on the right-hand side of the reached the minimum distance. vehicle Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance betweenthe sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center air vents. The warning display for the rear area is in the roof lamp in the rear compartment. The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. : Indicator lamp The selected transmission position and the ; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC direction in which the vehicle is rolling determine which warning display is active If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is when the engine is running. deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also deactivated. i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.
Z 216 Driving systems
Towing atrailer ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required.PARKTRONIC measures the minimumdetection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Driving and parking Driving systems 217
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button Driving and parking lights up.
Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
in the PARKTRONIC X Cleanthe PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 373). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or approximately five ultrasound waves. seconds. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not ! If unavoidable, you should drive over a replacement for your attention to your obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at immediate surroundings. You are always a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage responsible for safe maneuvering, parking the wheels or tires. and exiting a parking space. When Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking spaces which are not suitable for parking space, make sure that there are no parking, for example: persons, animals or objectsinthe area in Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited which you are maneuvering. Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits G WARNING Ron unsuitable surfaces The vehicle swings out when parking and in doing so could cross into the opposite lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users when parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or
Z 218 Driving systems
Parking tips: If there are objects above the detection range, ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. parking space as possible. Objects located above the height range of RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown Active Parking Assist will not be detected or partially occupied by trailer drawbars when the parking space is measured. These might be identified incorrectly or not at all. are not taken into account when the parking RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging space being measured inaccurately. loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC vehicles. In some circumstances, Active (Y page 215) warning messages during the Parking Assist may therefore guide you into parking procedure. the parking space too early. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Driving and parking RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has adirectinfluence on the parking characteristics of the : Detected parking space on the left vehicle. ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right General notes Active Parking Assist is switched on Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking automatically when driving forwards. The aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to system is operational at speeds of up to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).While in Asuitable parking space is indicated by the operation, the system independently locates parking symbol. Active steering intervention and measures parking spaces on both sides can assistyou during parking. of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below You may also use PARKTRONIC 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking (Y page 213). When PARKTRONIC is switched symbol as a status indicator in the instrument off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: displays parking spaces on the front- passenger side. Parking spaces on the Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn Rthat are on straight roads, not bends signal on the driver's side is activated. To park Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. on the driver's side, you must leave the not on the pavement driver's side turn signal switched on. This must remain switched on until you Detecting parking spaces acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the G WARNING multifunction steering wheel. If there are objects above the detection range, When a parking space has been detected, an Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely. arrow towards the right or the left also You may cause a collision as a result. There is appears. a risk of an accident. Driving systems 219
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking far as possible. When doing so, also spaces: observe the PARKTRONIC messages. Rthatare parallel to the direction of travel X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide continuous warning tone, if not before. Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than Maneuvering may be required in tight yourvehicle parking spaces. Aparking space is displayed while you are The Park Assist active Select D driving past it, and until you are Observe surroundings message appears in approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while Parking the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in G WARNING the other direction. Active Parking Assist merely aids you by
The Park Assist active Accelerate Driving and parking intervening actively in the steering. If you do and brake Observe surroundings not brake there is a risk of an accident. message appears in the multifunction Always apply the brakes yourself when display. maneuvering and parking. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in complete before pulling away. the instrument cluster. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all X Shift the transmission to position R. times. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the % message appears in the multifunction continuous warning tone, if not before. display. The Park Assist active Select R X To cancel the procedure: press the Observe surroundings message appears in % button on the multifunction steering the multifunction display. wheel or pull away. Further transmission shiftsmay be or necessary. X To park using Active Parking Assist: As soon as the parking procedure is press the a buttononthe multifunction complete, the Park Assist switched off steering wheel. message appears in the multifunction The Park Assist active Accelerate display. PARKTRONIC is still available. and brake Observe surroundings X Maneuver if necessary. message appears in the multifunction X Always observe the warning messages display. displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 215). X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Parking tips: X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the at all times. When backing up, drive at a parking space after parking is dependent speed below approximately 6mph on various factors. These include the (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist positionand shape of the vehicles parked will be canceled. in front and behind it and the conditions of i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the location. It may be the case thatActive the best parking results by backing up as Parking Assist guides you too far into a
Z 220 Driving systems
parking space, or not far enough into it. In message appears in the multifunction some cases, it may also lead you across or display. onto the curb. If necessary, you should X Let go of the multifunctionsteering wheel. cancel the parking procedure with Active X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being Parking Assist. ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed RYou can also engage forward gear a maximum speed of approximately prematurely. The vehicle redirects and 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking does not drive as far into the parking space. space.Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will Should the gear change occur too soon to be deactivated. achieve a sensible parking position, the X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the parking procedure will be aborted. continuous warning tone, if not before. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure X Shift the transmission to position D or R as to correct it at any time. Active Parking required while the vehicle is stationary. Assist will then be canceled. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in Driving and parking the other direction. Exiting aparking space i You will achieve the best results by G WARNING waiting for the steering procedure to Active Parking Assist doesnot monitor street complete before pulling away. traffic.Insome cases, the vehicle will also If you back up after activation, the steering take you onto sections of the oncoming lane wheel is moved to the straight-ahead when exiting a parking space. position. You are responsible for safety at all times and X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being must pay attention to any road users ready to brake at all times. approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the necessary or cancel Active Parking Assist. continuous warning tone, if not before. X Drive forwards and back up as instructed Active Parking Assist can only assist you with by the PARKTRONIC warning displays. exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle using Active Parking Assist. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheelis moved to X Start the engine. the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing and the message Park Assist Finished the street. appears in the multifunction display. You will X Shift the transmission to position D or R. then have to steer and merge into traffic on The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. % message appears in the multifunction display. Canceling Active Parking Assist X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. wheel or pull away. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at or once. The Park Assist Canceled X To exit aparking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunctionsteering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings Driving systems 221
message appears in the multifunction sure that there are no persons, animals or display. objects in the area in which you are or maneuvering. X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the Under the following circumstances, the rear center console (Y page 215). view camera will not function, or will function PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active in a limited manner: Parking Assist is immediatelycanceled. Rthe tailgate is open The Park Assist Canceled message Rin heavy rain, snow or fog appears in the multifunction display. Rat night or in very dark places d parking Active Parking Assist is canceled Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light automatically if: Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lighting (the display may flicker) longer possible. Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,
Ryou are driving faster than 6mph e.g. when driving into a heated garage in Driving an (10 km/h). winter Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails.The Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed ÷ warning lamp lights up in the Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged.In instrument cluster. this event, have the camera positionand Awarning tone sounds. The parking symbol setting checked at a qualified specialist disappears and the multifunction display workshop. shows the Park Assist Canceled message. General notes When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer again yourself.
Towing atrailer For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connectionis established between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. Rear view camera : is in the handle on the PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. tailgate. Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind Rear view camera your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND display. Important safety notes The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. a replacement for your attention to your i The text of messages shown in the immediate surroundings. You are always COMAND display depends on the language responsible for safe maneuvering and setting. The following are examples of rear parking. When maneuvering or parking, make
Z 222 Driving systems
view camera messages in the COMAND Displays in the COMAND display display. The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or Activating/deactivating the rear view not at all. The rear view camera does not show camera objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle
Driving and parking Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey Rthe rear section of an HGV is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Ra slanted post X Make sure that the function "show rear Use the guidelines only for orientation. view camera display" is selected in Approach objects no further than the COMAND. bottom-most guideline. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is showninthe COMAND display with guide lines.
X To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the COMAND controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see the separate COMAND operating instructions). The symbol of the selected function is : White guide line without turning the highlighted. steering wheel, vehicle width including To deactivate: the rear view camera is the exterior mirrors (static) deactivated if you: ; Yellow guide line at a distance of Rshift the transmission to position P approximately 13 ft (4.0m) from the rear Rdrive forwards 33 ft (10 m) of the vehicle Rshift the transmission from R to another = Red guide line for the vehicle width position (after 15 seconds) including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5mph (10km/h) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems 223
active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display.
Reverse parking function
Backing up straight into a parking space withoutturning the steering wheel
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) Driving and parking C Bumper D Red guide line at a distanceof approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle : White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including The guide lines are shown when the the exterior mirrors (static) transmission is in position R. ; Red guide line for the vehicle width The distance specifications only apply to including the exterior mirrors, for current objects that are at ground level. steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 222). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check Additional messages for vehicleswith whether the vehicle will fit into the parking PARKTRONIC space. : Front warning display X Using white guide line : as a guide, ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement carefully back up until you reach the end operational readiness indicator position. = Rear warning display Red guide line ? is then at the end of the Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if parking space. The vehicle is almost PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 215), an parallel in the parking space. additional operational readiness indicator will appear in COMANDdisplay ;. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also
Z 224 Driving systems
Reverse perpendicular parking with the X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly steering wheel at an angle in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.
Turning the steering wheel :
Driving and parking Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving to the final position ; Parking space marking : White guide line at current steering wheel angle X Make sure that the rearview camera is switched on (Y page 222). ; Parking space marking The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Turn the steering wheel to the center X Drive past the parking space and bring the position while the vehicle is stationary. vehicle to a standstill. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turnthe steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until red guide line : reaches parking space marking ;. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.
: Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space
X Back up carefully until you have reached Backing up with the steering wheel turned the final position. : Red guide line for the vehicle width Red guide line : is then at end of parking including the exterior mirrors, for current space =.The vehicle is almost parallel in steering wheel angle (dynamic) the parking space. Driving systems 225
"Coupling up a trailer" function ! The following distance specifications refer to trailer tow hitches with ball coupling that have been approved for this vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.Distances may differ if you use other ball couplings. In this case, take into account that actual distances will not match the following distance specifications. Otherwise you could damage the trailer and vehicle. : Ball coupling ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the ball coupling Driving and parking = Trailer drawbar marker assistant ? Trailer drawbar A Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function X Use the COMAND controllerto select symbol A, see the separate operating : Vehicle center point on the yellow guide instructions for COMAND. line at a distance of approximately 3ft The "Coupling up a trailer" function is (1 m) from the rear of the vehicle selected. The distance specifications now ; Trailer drawbar only apply to objects that are at the same = Ball coupling level as the ball coupling. This function is only available on vehicles with X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer a trailer tow hitch. drawbar marker assistant = points approximately in the direction of trailer X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that drawbar ?. it is slightly higher than ball coupling =. X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ? X Position the vehicle centrally in frontof reaches red guide line ;. trailer drawbar ;. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 253).
360° camera (surround view) Important safety notes The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or
Z 226 Driving systems
objects in the area in which you are General notes maneuvering. The 360° camera is a system consisting of The 360° camera may show a distorted view four cameras. of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at The system analyzes images from the all. It cannot show objects in the following following cameras: areas: Runder the front bumper RRear view camera Rvery close to the front bumper RFront camera Rvery close to the rear bumper RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors Runder the rear bumper The cameras capture the immediate Rin close range above the handle on the surroundings of the vehicle. The system trunk lid supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is Rvery close to the exterior mirrors restricted at an exit. Driving and parking You are always responsible for safety, and The 360° camera images can be shown in full must always pay attention to your screen mode or in seven different split-screen surroundings when parking and views on the COMAND display.Asplit-screen maneuvering. This applies to the areas view also includes a top view of the vehicle. behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You This view is calculated from the data supplied could otherwise endanger yourself and by the installed cameras (virtual camera). others. The seven split-screenviews are: The rear view camera will not function or will Rtop view and picture from the rear view function in a limited manner: camera (130° viewingangle) R if the doors are open Rtop view and picture from the front camera Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in (withoutdisplaying the maximum steering Rif the trunk lid is open wheel angle) Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rat night or in very dark places Rtop view and enlarged front view Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with light trailer tow hitch) Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED Rtop view and pictures fromthe rearward lighting (the display may flicker) facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view) Rif you exit a heated garage in winter, Rtop view and pictures from the forward resulting in a rapid change in temperature facing mirror cameras (front wheel view) Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered i The top view and trailer view are available Rif the vehicle components in which the for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow cameras are installed are damaged. In this hitch. event, have the camera position and setting When the function is active and you shift the checked at a qualified specialist workshop. transmission from position D or R to N, you Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You see the previous view in the COMAND can otherwise injure others or cause damage display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden. to objects or the vehicle. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Driving systems 227
Activation conditions Activating the 360° camerausing reverse gear The 360° camera imagecan be displayed if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° The 360° camera images can be camera automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate COMAND operating instructions X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position
2 in the ignition lock. rking Rthe 360° camera function is activated X Make sure that the Activation by R Activating the 360° camera using the gear setting is active in COMAND, see the SYS button separate COMAND operating instructions. X To show the 360° cameraimage: engage X Press and hold the W button for longer reverse gear. than 2seconds, see the separate COMAND The COMAND display shows the area operating instructions.
behind the vehicle in splitscreen: Driving and pa Depending on whether position D or R is Rvehicle with guide lines engaged, the following is shown: Rtop view of the vehicle Rfull screen display with the image from the front camera Selecting the split-screen and full Rfull screen display with the image from screen displays the rear camera X To switchbetween splitscreen views: Activating the 360° camerawith switch to the line with the vehicle icons by COMAND sliding ZV the COMAND controller. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and X Press the W button, see the separate selectone of the vehicle symbols. COMANDoperating instructions. X Select System by turning cVd the X To switchto full screen mode: select COMAND controller and press W to Full screen by turning cVd the confirm. COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select 360° camera and press W to confirm. Depending on whether position D or R is Displays in the COMAND display engaged, the following is shown: Important safety notes Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle For further information about the COMAND Rthe drawbar of a trailer Controller, see the separate COMAND Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch operating instructions. Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-mostguideline.
Z 228 Driving systems
Top view with picture from the rear view Top view with picture from the front camera camera
: Symbol for the split screen setting with : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rearview camera image top view and front camera image Driving and parking ; Yellow guide line at a distance of ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear approximately 13 ft (4.0m) from the front of the vehicle of the vehicle = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) steering wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately3ft (1.0m) from the front of the vehicle B Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle
A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle D Bumper The guide lines are shownwhen the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Driving systems 229
Top view and enlarged rear view Top view with trailer view
: Symbol for the split screen setting with : Symbol for the trailer view setting top view and rearview camera image ; Trailer drawbar marker assistant enlarged = Red guide line at a distanceof Driving and parking ; Red guide line at a distanceof approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the coupling rear of the vehicle This view assists you in estimating the Display with the PARKTRONIC display distance to the vehicle behind you. i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged frontview. Top view with picture from the mirror camera
Example:full screen mode with PARKTRONIC display : Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC and the function is active (Y page 215), : Symbol for the top view and forward- warning displays ; in the COMAND display facing mirror camera setting are also active or light up accordingly. ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width PARKTRONIC appears: including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle) Rin split screen view as red or yellow = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width brackets around the vehicle iconinthe top including the exterior mirrors (left side of view, or vehicle) Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon
Z 230 Driving systems
i The full screen display can also be Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style selected as frontview. with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Exiting 360° camera display mode Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of 112 mph (180 km/h) 19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activated, the function switches off.The Rif you are currently using COMAND or COMAND display switches back to the making a telephone call with it previously selected view. You can also switch Rif the time has been set incorrectly the display by selecting the & symbol in the Rin active driving situations, such as when display and pressing W the COMAND you change lanes or change your speed controller. Warning and display messages in the multifunction display Driving and parking ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- driver. board computer (Y page 273). ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, Symbol : appears in the multifunction monotonous journeys, such as on highways. display. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). X The Attention Assist: Take a Break! message appears in the If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical multifunction display. If necessary, take indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in a break. concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break. X Press the a or % button to confirm the message. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be the following criteria into account: warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. In addition to the message Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering shown in the multifunction display, you will characteristics then hear an intermittent warning tone twice. Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length On long journeys, take regular breaks in good of journey time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST restricted and warnings may be delayed or still detects increasing lapses in not occur at all: concentration, you will be warned again after Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the 15 minutes at the earliest. surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Driving systems 231
ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you General notes continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness againif: Ryou switch off the engine. Ryou take off yourseat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break.
Night View Assist Plus Important safety notes Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not In addition to the illumination provided by the a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Driving and parking responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up front, for vehicle speed and for braking in the infrared light and displays a monochrome good time. Drive carefully and always adapt image in COMAND. The image displayed in your driving style to suit the prevailing road COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by high- and traffic conditions. beam headlamps. This enables you to see the The system may be impaired or may not road's course and any obstacles in good time. function if: If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedestrians recognized by the system are Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus rain, fog or spray display. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or Light from the headlamps of oncoming covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist vicinity of the camera Plus display in the multifunction display.This Ron bends, on uphill gradientsordownhill is also the case if you cant switch on the high- gradients beam headlamps due to oncomingtraffic. Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or i Infrared light is not visible to the human inoperative if: eye and therefore does not glare. Night Rpedestrians are partially or entirely View Assist Plus can therefore remain obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles switched on even if there is oncoming Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night traffic. View Assist Plus display is incomplete or interrupted, e.g. by powerful light Activating Night View Assist Plus reflections Activation conditions Rpedestrians do not contrast adequately from the background You can only activate Night View Assist Plus if: Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Rit is dark.
Z 232 Driving systems
Rthe lightswitch is in the à or L = Framing position. ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition Rreverse gear has not been engaged. i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian Switching on NightView Assist Plus recognition. Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a silhouette in the shape of aperson. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on d parking automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated Ryou exceed a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) R
Driving an the surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without X Make sure that COMANDis switched on. street lighting X Press button :. If pedestrian recognition is active, The Night View Assist Plus display appears symbol ? appears. If pedestrians are in the COMAND display. detected, they are highlighted with framing You can read abouthow to adjust the =.Ifthe pedestrian recognition system has brightness of the COMAND display in the brought a pedestrian to your attention, look COMAND operating instructions. through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and i The infrared headlamps only switch on pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by when the vehicle is being driven at speeds looking at a screen. of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This It may be the case that objects are highlighted means that you do not have the full visual as well as pedestrians. range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Fogged up or dirtywindshield Plus is working. If the windshield in front of the camera is Pedestrian recognition fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected. X To defrost: check the automatic air conditioning settings (Y page 149)and fold down the camera cover (Y page 375). X To defrost the inside of the windshield: fold down the camera cover (Y page 375) and clean the windshield (Y page 372).
: Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognized Driving systems 233
Problems with Night View Assist Plus
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.
Night View Assist Plus X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 133). has deteriorated. The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash.
X Cleanthe windshield (Y page 372).
There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windshield.
The windshield is fogged up on the inside. Driving and parking X Defrost the windshield (Y page 149).
The windshield is iced up.
X De-ice the windshield (Y page 148).
There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.
X Cleanthe inside of the windshield (Y page 372).
Lane Tracking package Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for General notes attentive driving. The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind i USA only: Spot Assist (Y page 233) and Lane Keeping This device has been approved by the FCC Assist (Y page 235). as a "VehicularRadar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive Blind Spot Assist radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any Important safety notes warranties, and is notpermitted by the G WARNING FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Blind Spot Assist does not react to: any non-approved way. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Any unauthorized modification to this placing them in the blind spot area device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Rvehicles approaching and driving by with a speed difference of more than General notes approximately 6.8 mph (11 km/h) Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give to monitor the areas on both sides of your warnings in such situations. There is a risk of vehicle. It supports you from a speed of an accident. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning Always observe the traffic conditions display in the exteriormirrors draws your carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. attention to vehicles detected in the
Z 234 Driving systems
monitored area. If you then switch on the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may you will also receive a visual and audible be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses driving in the middle of their lane. This may sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring be the case if there are vehicles driving at the purposes. inner edge of their lanes. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when Due to the nature of the system: driving, the radarsensor system must be: Rwarnings may be issued in error when Ractivated (Y page 277) driving close to crash barriers or similar Roperational solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an Monitoring range of the sensors extended period next to long vehicles, such In particular, the detection of obstacles can as trucks. be impaired if: The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist Driving and parking Rdirt on the sensors or anything else are integrated into the sides of the rear covering the sensors bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. snow or spray The sensors must not be covered, for Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. bicycles Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the condition Rthe road has very wide lanes of the radar sensors checked at a qualified Rthe road has narrow lanes specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane otherwise not work properly. Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Indicator and warning display Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below indicated. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30km/h). 10 ft (3m) behind your vehicle and directly At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the nextto your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. Driving systems 235
indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 273) are activated in the on-board is operational. computer. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above ignition lock. 20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on the Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors corresponding side lights up red. This warning light up red for approximately is always emitted when a vehicle enters the 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. blind spot monitoring rangefrom behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, Towing atrailer the warning only occurs if the difference in When you attach a trailer, make sure you have speed is less than 7mph (12km/h). correctly established the electrical The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse connection. This can be accomplished by gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot checking the trailer lighting. In this event, Assist is no longer active. Blind SpotAssist is deactivated. The indicator
The brightness of the indicator/warning lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, Driving and parking lamps is adjusted automatically according to and the Blind Spot Assist Currently the ambient light. Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction Collision warning display. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the the exterior mirrors. corresponding turn signal, a double warning To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when: tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the are indicated by the flashing of red warning ignition lock lamp :.There are no further warning tones. Rthe engine is not running Rthe electrical connection to the trailer Switching on Blind Spot Assist has been established
Lane Keeping Assist
Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning X Make sure that the radar sensor system There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 277) and Blind Spot Assist Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
Z 236 Driving systems
G WARNING General notes The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in return the vehicle to the original lane. There front of your vehicle by means of a camera at is a risk of an accident. the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist You should always steer, brake or accelerate detects lane markings on the road and warns yourself, in particular if warned by Lane you before you leave your lane Keeping Assist. unintentionally.
If you fail to adapt yourdriving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are
Driving and parking responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. : Lane Keeping Assist camera The system may be impaired or may not If you select km on the on-board computer in function if: the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to function (Y page 274), Lane Keeping Assist insufficient illumination of the road, or due is active starting at aspeed of 60 km/h. If the to snow, rain, fog or spray miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road A warning may be given if a front wheel surface is wet) passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Switching on Lane Keeping Assist Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. the on-board computer; to do so, select lanes branch off, cross one another or Standard or Adaptive(Y page 273). merge Symbol : appears in the multifunction Rthe road is narrow and winding display. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, Driving systems 237
symbol : is shown in green. Lane Keeping Active Driving Assistance package Assist is ready for use. General notes Standard The Active Driving Assistance package If Standard is selected, no warning vibration consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194), occurs if: Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237) and Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 241). the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Active Blind SpotAssist Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor Adaptive system to monitor the side areas of your If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration vehicle which are behind the driver. Awarning
occurs if: display in the exterior mirrors draws your Driving and parking Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, attentionto vehicles detected in the the warnings are suppressed for a certain monitored area. If you then switch on the period of time. corresponding turn signal to change lane, you Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. will also receive an optical and audible ABS, BAS or ESP®. warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. avoid a collision. To support the course- Ryou brake hard. correcting brake application, Active Blind Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar obstacle or change lanes quickly. sensor system. The free space in the direction Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. of travel is then evaluated. In order that you are warned only when Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a necessary and in good time if you cross the speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). lane marking, the system recognizes certain For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you conditions and warns you accordingly. when driving, the radar sensor system must The warning vibration occurs earlierif: be: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a Ractivated (Y page 277) bend. Roperational Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a Important safety notes highway. Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may Rthe system recognizes solidlane markings. fail to detect some vehicles and is no The warning vibrationoccurs later if: substitute for attentive driving. Rthe road has narrow lanes. G WARNING Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles approaching and driving by with a speed difference of more than approximately 6.8 mph (11 km/h)
Z 238 Driving systems
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane neither give warnings nor intervene in such Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders situations. There is a riskofanaccident. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not Always observe the trafficconditions indicated. carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular RadarSystem". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.
Driving and parking Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up interference, and to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and 2. this device must accept any interference directly nextto your vehicle, as shown in the received, including interference that may diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot cause undesired operation of the device. Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. Removal, tampering, or altering of the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the device will void any warranties, and is not lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not in any non-approved way. driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner Any unauthorized modification to this edge of your lane. device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when Monitoring area driving close to crash barriers or similar In particular, the detection of obstacles can solid lane borders. be impaired if: Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving Rdirt on the sensors or anything else alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. covering the sensors trucks, for a prolonged time. Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are snow or spray integrated into the front and rear bumpers Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make bicycles sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The Rthe road has very wide lanes rear sensors must not be covered, for Rthe road has narrow lanes example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of Driving systems 239 damage to the bumpers, have the function of Visual and acoustic collision warning the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Indicator and warning display
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side
monitoring range, you receive a visual and Driving and parking acoustic collision warning.You then hear a double warning tone and red warning : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at detected vehicles are indicated by the speeds below approximately 20 mph flashing of red warning lamp :.There are no (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range further warning tones. are then not indicated. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, Course-correcting brake application indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights G WARNING up yellow at speeds of up to Acourse-correcting brake application cannot 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph always prevent a collision. There is a risk of (30km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and an accident. Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above you or makes a course-correcting brake 20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on the application. Always maintain a safe distance corresponding side lights up red. This warning at the sides. is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or G WARNING from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all the warning only occurs if the difference in traffic situations and road users. In very rare speed is less than 7mph (12km/h). cases, the system may make an inappropriate The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse brake application. There is a risk of an gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind accident. Spot Assist is no longer active. An inappropriate brake application may be The brightness of the indicator/warning interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in lamps is adjusted automatically according to the opposite direction or accelerate. Always the ambient light. make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
Z 240 Driving systems
Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles without the ON&OFFROADpackage). Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist Driving and parking
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a X Make sure that the radar sensor system collision. (Y page 277) and Active Blind Spot Assist If a course-correcting brake application (Y page 273) are activated in the on-board occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the computer. exterior mirror and a dual warning tone X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the sounds. In addition, display ; appears in the ignition lock. multifunction display. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors The course-correcting brake application is light up red for approximately available in the speed range between20mph 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. (30 km/h) and120 mph (200km/h). Towing atrailer Either no braking application, or a course- correcting brake application adapted to the When you attach a trailer, make sure you have driving situation occurs if: correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash checking the trailer lighting.Active Blind Spot barriers, located on both sides of your Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp vehicle. lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the Active Blind Spot Assist Currently side. Unavailable See Operator's Manual Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with message appears in the multifunction high cornering speeds. display. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Driving systems 241
Active Lane Keeping Assist In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: General notes Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
Active Lane Keeping Assistmonitors the area The system may be impaired or may not Driving and parking in front of your vehicle by means of function if: camera : at the top of the windshield. Active Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to Lane Keeping Assist detectslane markings on insufficient illumination of the road, or due the road and warns you before you leave your to snow, rain, fog or spray lane unintentionally. If you do notreact to the Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, warning, a lane-correcting application of the the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road brakes can bring the vehicle back into the surface is wet) original lane. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged If you select km on the on-board computer in or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer vicinity of the camera function (Y page 274), Active Lane Keeping Rthere are no, several or unclear lane Assist is activated starting at a speed of markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, construction work the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or Important safety notes covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the small and the lane markings thus cannot be risk of accidentnor override the laws of detected physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. account the road, traffic and weather lanes branch off, cross one another or conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an merge aid. You are responsible for the distance to Rthe road is narrow and winding the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for Rthere are highly variable shade conditions braking in good time and for staying in your on the roadway lane. Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot and there are broken lane markings continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. Warning vibration in the steering wheel G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always A warning may be given if a front wheel clearly detect lane markings. passes over a lane marking. It will warn you
Z 242 Driving systems
by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. display : appears in the multifunction The warning vibration occurs later if: display.
Driving and parking If you leave your lane, under certain Rthe road has narrow lanes. circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly Ryou cut the corner on a bend. on one side. This is meant to assist you in Lane-correcting brake application bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. This function is available in the range between G WARNING 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and A lane-correcting brake application cannot 200 km/h). always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, recognizable lane marking. Before this, a especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns warning must be given by means of you or makes a lane-correcting brake intermittentvibration in the steering wheel. application. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. The brake G WARNING application also slightly reduces vehicle Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect speed. traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate i A further lane-correcting brake brake application, e.g. after intentionally application can only occur after your driving over a solid lane marking. There is a vehicle has returned to the original lane. risk of an accident. No lane-correcting brakeapplication occurs An inappropriate brake application may be if: interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or the opposite direction. Always make sure that accelerate. there is sufficient distance on the side for Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. other traffic or obstacles. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Driving systems 243
RESP® is switched off. Ryou switch on the turnsignals.Inthis Rthe transmission is not in position D. event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connectionto the trailer has been Ra driving safety system intervenes, such correctly established. as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles If Adaptive is selected, no warning without the ON&OFFROAD package). vibration occurs if: Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). event, the warnings are suppressed for a Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated certain period of time. (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ® Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has ABS, BAS or ESP . been detected and displayed. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. R Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect you brake hard. Driving and parking traffic situations or road users. An Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid inappropriate brake application may be an obstacle or change lanes quickly. interrupted at any time if you: Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction Towing atrailer Rswitch on the turn signal When you attach a trailer, make sure you have Rclearly brake or accelerate correctly established the electrical Alane-correcting brake applicationis connection. This can be accomplished by interrupted automatically if: checking the trailer lighting. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. On-road programs (vehicles with the Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. ON&OFFROAD package) Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes The on-road programs assist you during on- road driving and the off-road programs when driving off-road (Y page 248). The following programmessages remain in the multifunction display until the corresponding vehicle level has been set. Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the program X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using messages using the % or a button on the on-board computer; to do so, select the multifunction steering wheel. Standard or Adaptive(Y page 273). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:
Z 244 Driving systems
AUTO program SPORT program Driving and parking
Select the AUTO program for a more Selectthe SPORT program for sporty, comfortable ride under all normal driving dynamic handling. conditions. Your selection remains stored even if you Your selection remains storedeven if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. Selector wheel : extends. X To select: turn selector wheel : until X To select: turn selector wheel : until indicator lamp ; comes on. indicator lamp ; comes on. SPORT indicator = appears in the AUTO indicator = appears in the multifunction display. multifunction display. RThe high-speed level of –15 mm when RHighway level is set. compared with highway level is set. RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts comfortable damping characteristics to sporty damping characteristics to the the current operating and driving current operating and driving conditions. conditions. RThe automatic transmission selects the RThe automatic transmission selects the automatic drive program for a sporty automatic drive program for a driving style. comfortable driving style that provides RThe sporty accelerator pedal curve is for optimumfuel consumption. selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal no Driving systems 245
longer has to be pressed as far to RHighway level is set. accelerate. RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts RThe sporty steering curve is selected, comfortable damping characteristics to e.g. greater force is required when the current operating and driving steering. conditions. R4ETS and the differential lock are i You cannot selectthe SPORT program if adapted for driving on snow-covered LOW RANGE has been selected. The roads. Drive Program SPORT Not in LOW RANGE message then appears in the RThe automatic transmission selects the multifunction display. automatic drive program for a comfortable driving style that provides Snow program for optimum fuel consumption. RThe soft accelerator pedal curve is selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal must be pressed significantly further to Driving and parking accelerate. RThe optimum gear for pulling away is engaged.
Trailer program
Select the snow program for driving in snow with or without snow chains. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. X To select: turn selector wheel : until indicator lamp ; comes on. Snow indicator = appears in the Select the trailer program when towing a multifunction display. trailer.
Z 246 Driving systems
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press otherwise damage the drive train or the selector wheel :. brake system. Selector wheel : extends. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are X To select: turn selector wheel : until permanently driven. Together with ESP® and indicator lamp ; comes on. 4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle Trailer indicator = appears in the whenever a drive wheel spins due to multifunction display. insufficientgrip. RHighway level is set. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if comfortable damping characteristics to you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow the current operating and driving chains if necessary. conditions. Further information about "Driving off-road" RThe automatic transmission selects the (Y page 187).
Driving and parking automatic drive program for a comfortable driving style that provides DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) for optimum fuel consumption, changing gear at optimum points. Important safety notes RWhile pulling away, the differential locks DSR assists you when driving downhill. It are engaged. keeps the speed of travel at the speed set on the on-board computer. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR Off-road driving systems braking effect on the vehicle.When driving on flat stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) the DSR braking effect is minimal or If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC nonexistent. can neither reduce the risk of accident nor DSR controls the set speed when it is active override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot and the automatic transmission is in the D, take account of road, weather and traffic R or N position. By accelerating or braking, conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are you can always drive at a higher or a lower responsible for the distance to the vehicle in speed than that set on the on-board front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good computer. time and for staying in your lane. Further information about "Driving off-road" (Y page 187). ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can Damage of this sort is not covered by the neither reduce the risk of accident nor Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take wheels must remain either on the ground account of road, weather and traffic or be fully raised. Observe the instructions conditions. DSR is only an aid. You are for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full responsible for the distance to the vehicle in contact with the ground. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. ! A function or performance test should You are always responsible for keeping only be carried out on atwo-axle control of the vehicle and for assessing dynamometer. Before you operate the whether the downhill gradient can be vehicle on such a dynamometer, please managed. DSR may not always be able to consult a qualified workshop.You could keep to the set speed, depending on road Driving systems 247 surface and tire conditions. Select a set If the current vehicle speed is too high, the speed suitable for the prevailing conditions à DSR symbol appears in the and when necessary, apply the brakes multifunction display with the Max. Speed manually. 25 mph message (Canada: 40 km/h). G WARNING i You cannot activate DSR if the SPORT on- If the speed driven and the set speed deviate road program is activated. The à DSR and you activate DSR on a slippery road symbol and the Not in Drive Program surface, the wheels may lose traction.Ifthe SPORT message then appearinthe wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no longer multifunction display. be steered. There is an increased danger of Deactivating DSR skidding and accidents. X Press button :. Never activate DSR on slippery road surfaces. Indicator lamp ; goes out. Activating DSR The à DSR symbol appears in the Driving and parking G WARNING multifunction display with the Off If you drive faster than the set speed and message. activate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate on DSR switches off automatically if you drive downhill gradients. If you do not know the set faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The speed, the vehicle could decelerate à DSR symbol appears in the unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. multifunction display with the Off message. Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed before The status indicator in the multifunction activating DSR. If you do not know what the display goes out. You also hear a warning. On stored set speed is, store the desired set vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package, if speed again. you select a different on-road/off-road program, DSR is also deactivated. Changing the set speed
Example: vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package : DSR button ; DSR indicator lamp
X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display. You can only activate DSR when driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Z 248 Driving systems
X To increase or decrease in 1 mph characteristics of the automatic transmission increments (Canada: 1 km/h are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and increments): briefly press the cruise 4ETSprograms especially adapted to off-road control lever up : for a higherset speed driving are activated.Agentle accelerator or down ; for a lower set speed. pedal curve is also selected, i.e. the The set speed appears in the multifunction accelerator pedal must be depressed much display with the à DSR symbol. It is also further in order to accelerate. displayed in status indicator =. Do not use the off-road program on roads that are snow-covered or icy or if you have When DSR is activated, you can change the mounted snow chains on your vehicle. set speed to a value between 1mph and 11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and For information about driving off-road, see 18 km/h). (Y page 187).
i The DSR set speed is always changed in Off-road programs (vehicles with the
Driving and parking 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h ON&OFFROAD package) increments). This is regardless of whether you press the cruise control lever to or General notes beyond the pressure point. The off-road programs assist you in driving off-road. The engine’s performance Off-road program (vehicles without the characteristics and the gearshifting ON&OFFROAD package) characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road driving are activated. An accelerator pedal curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must be depressed further to accelerate. Do not use the off-road programs on roads that are snow-covered or icy or if you have mounted snow chains on your vehicle. For information on driving off-road, see (Y page 187). : Off-road program button The following program messages are shown ; Off-road program indicator lamp in the multifunction display until the X To switch on: press button :. applicable vehicle level is set. Up to off-road Indicator lamp ; lights up. The Ç off- level 2, you can hide the program messages road indicator appears in the multifunction using the % or the a button on the display. multifunction steering wheel.
X To switch off: press button :. Indicator lamp ; and the Ç off-road indicator go out in the multifunction display. The off-road program assists you in driving off-road. The engine’s performance characteristics and the gearshifting Driving systems 249
Off-road program 1 Off-road program 2 Driving and parking
X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. Selectorwheel : extends. X To select: turn selector wheel : until X To select: turn selector wheel : until indicator lamp ; comes on. indicator lamp ; comes on. Off-road indicator = appears in the Off-road indicator = appears in the multifunction display. multifunction display. Off-road level 1 is set to +1.2 in (+ 30 mm) ROff-road level 1 is set to +2.4 in above the highway level. (+60 mm) above the highway level. If you drive at a speed above 70 mph RDSR is switched on. (110 km/h), off-road program 1 switches to RThe differential lock is closed. AUTO program. Off-road program 2automatically switches to Select off-road program 1 for gentle off-road off-road program 1 if you drive faster than terrain, e.g. for gravel or sand surfaces or 30 mph (45 km/h). tracks. The engine's torque is restricted to a Select off-road program 2 for rough terrain, limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. e.g. for steep and/orrough terrain or driving The spinning wheels produce acutting effect on rocky terrain. for better traction. You can only activate off-road program 1 i Your vehicle has an automatically when driving at speeds below 60 mph activated differential lock for the transfer (100 km/h). The Drive Program OFFROAD case. It controls the balance between the 1 Max Speed 60 mph (100 km/h) message front and rear axles. appears in the multifunction display.
Z 250 Driving systems
The differential lock improves the vehicle’s General notes traction. 4ETS (Y page 70) controls the balance between both wheels on an axle. You can only activate off-road program 2 when driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).
LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)
Important safety notes G WARNING : LOW RANGE off-road gear button If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on ; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose Driving and parking traction: HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on- Rif you remove your foot from the road driving conditions accelerator pedal when driving LOW RANGE Off-road position for Rif off road ABS intervenes when braking driving off-road and If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no fording longer be steered. There is an increased The transmission ratio danger of skidding and accidents. between the engine and Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear wheels is only when driving on slippery road surfaces. approximately one third of that in the HIGH RANGE G WARNING road position. Drive torque If you do not wait for the transfer case gear is thus proportionately change process to complete, the transfer higher. case could remain in the neutral position. The Do not use LOW RANGE: power transmission to the driven wheels is Ron slippery road then interrupted. There is a danger of the surfaces, e.g. in the case vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is of slush a risk of an accident. Ron snow or ice-covered Wait until the transfer case shift process is roads completed. Rif you have mounted Do not turn off the engine while changing gear snow chains to your and do not shift the automatic transmission vehicle to another position. The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you in driving off-road and when fording. When LOW RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. Driving systems 251
Further information about "Driving off-road" While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can (Y page 187).You will find information about cancel the gear change by pressing LOW driving safety systems in conjunction with RANGE button : again. LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section (Y page 65). From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE ! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE if: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position N Ryou are driving at a speed below 40 km/h X Press LOW RANGE button :. Driving and parking Indicator lamp ; flashes. When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicator appears in the multifunction display and in the status indicator. While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can cancel the gear change by pressing LOW RANGE button : again. i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the SPORT on-road program is activated. The LOW RANGE Not in Drive Program SPORT message then appears in the multifunction display. From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE ! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE if: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position N Ryou are driving at a speed below 70 km/h X Press LOW RANGE button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes. When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction display, the LOW RANGE Off message appears and status indicator = goes out.
Z 252 Driving systems
Messages in the multifunction display If a gearchange process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the multifunction display: Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions LOW RANGE Max. You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the Speed 40 km/h indicator lamp on the button in the center console blinks. X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.
LOW RANGE Shift to The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below Position N Briefly 40 km/h. X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.
Driving and parking LOW RANGE Shifting The gear change process was not carried out. Canceled Please X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out Reactivate the gear change process again.
LOW RANGE Stop Awarning tone also sounds. The gear change processhas notbeen Apply Parking Brake completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position.There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels. ! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehicle's drive train. X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions when doing this. X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 180). X Carry out the gear change process again. If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.
ON&OFFROAD menu in the COMAND You can display some driving systems, driving display (vehicles with the programs and additional information in the ON&OFFROAD package) COMAND display. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that COMAND is activated, see the separate COMAND operating instructions. X Press function button :. The corresponding displays appearinthe COMAND display: Rlevel control Rsteering angle Rvehicle's angle of inclination Towing atrailer 253
Ruphill or downhill gradientinpercentage cause the braking system to fail. There is a Ron-road/off-road program selected risk of an accident. Rcondition of the differential lock for the Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.Never transfer case depress the brake pedal and the accelerator Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected pedal at the same time. Rcondition of the LOW RANGE off-road gear G WARNING Rthe on-road trailer program is selected When the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehicle/trailer combination could even d parking rollover. There is a risk of an accident. Towing atrailer On no account should you attempt to Notes on towing atrailer straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle Important safety notes speed and do not countersteer.Apply the Driving an G WARNING brake as necessary. If you install a ball coupling other thanthe one ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly delivered with the vehicle, the trailer tow hitch results in excessive and premature wear to and the rear axle may be overloaded. This the brake pads. applies especially if the ball coupling in question is longer or angled differently. This Please observe the manufacturer's operating could seriously impair the driving instructions for the trailer coupling if a characteristics and the trailer can come detachable trailer coupling is used. loose. There is a risk of an accident. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If Only install the ball coupling delivered with you do not couple the trailer to the towing the vehicle or a ball coupling that is designed vehicle correctly, the trailer could become to meet your trailer towing requirements. Do detached. not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow Make sure that the following values are not hitch. exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight G WARNING Rthe permissible trailer load If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing not secured with the bolt provided and the vehicle corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the Always install and secure the ball coupling as trailer described. Before every journey, ensure that the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and The applicable permissible values, which the corresponding spring cotter. must not be exceeded, can be found: Rin the vehicle documents G WARNING Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while hitch, the trailer and the vehicle driving, the braking system can overheat. This If the values differ, the lowest value applies. increases the stopping distance and can even You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification
Z 254 Towing atrailer
plates and those for the towing vehicle under vehicle for a maximum load; see the tire "Technical data" (Y page 455). pressure table in the fuel filler flap When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling (Y page 419). characteristics will be differentincomparison You will find installation dimensions and loads with when driving without atrailer. in the "Technical data" section The vehicle/trailer combination: (Y page 454). Ris heavier The maximum noseweight of the trailer Ris restricted in its acceleration and drawbar on the ball coupling is gradient-climbing capability 575 lbs(261 kg) for all models (except the d parking model ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY). Rhas an increased braking distance The maximum noseweight of the trailer Ris affected more by strong crosswinds drawbar on the ball coupling is 529 lbs Rdemands more sensitive steering (240 kg) for the model Rhas a larger turning radius ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY. Driving an This could impair the handling The actual noseweight may not be higher than characteristics. the value which is given. The value can be When towing a trailer, always adjust your found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer speed to the current road and weather identification plates. The lowest weight conditions. Do not exceed the maximum applies. permissible speed for yourvehicle/trailer Please note that when towing a trailer, combination. PARKTRONIC (Y page 213) and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 233) are only available with General notes limitations, or not at all. RDo not exceed the legally prescribed i On vehicles without level control, the maximum speed for vehicle/trailer height of the ball coupling will alter combinations in the relevant country. according to the load placed on the vehicle. This lowers the risk of an accident. If necessary, use a trailer with a height- adjustable drawbar. ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on your vehicle. Driving tips Further information on availability and on installation is available from any authorized i Observe the information on ESP® trailer Mercedes-Benz Center. stabilization (Y page 72) and on pulling RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not away with a trailer (Y page 160). suitable for installing detachable trailer The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ couplings. trailer combinations depends on the type of RDo not install hired trailer couplings or trailer. Before beginning the journey, check other detachable trailer couplings on the the trailer's documents to see what the bumpers of your vehicle. maximum permissible speed is. Observe the RIf you no longer need the ball coupling, legally prescribed maximum speed in the remove it from the ball coupling recess. relevant country. This will reduce the risk of damage to the For certain Mercedes-Benzvehicles, the ball coupling. maximum permissible rear axle load is i When towing a trailer, set the tire increased when towing a trailer. See pressure on the rear axle of the towing "Technical data" to find out whether this applies to your vehicle (Y page 455). If you Towing atrailer 255 utilize any of the added maximum rear axle Installing the ball coupling load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer combination may not exceed a maximum G WARNING speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons If the ball coupling is not installed and secured concerning the operating permit.This also correctly it can become detached while the applies in countries in which the permissible vehicle is in motion and fall onto the road. maximum speed for vehicle/trailer There is a risk of accident and injury. combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h). Always install and secure the ball coupling as When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling described. Before every journey, ensure that characteristics will be different in comparison the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and d parking with when driving without atrailer. the corresponding spring cotter. On long and steep downhill gradients, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. G WARNING If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or i This also applies if you have activated
not secured with the bolt provided and the Driving an cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may This will use the braking effect of the engine, come loose. There is a risk of an accident. so that less braking will be required to Always install and secure the ball coupling as maintainthe speed, This relieves the load on described. Before every journey, ensure that the brake system and prevents the brakes the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and from overheating and wearing too quickly. If the corresponding spring cotter. you need additional braking, depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather than G WARNING continuously. If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly the trailer may come loose. There is Driving tips a risk of an accident. If the trailer swings from side to side: Install and secure the ball coupling as X Do not accelerate. described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling X Do not counter-steer. is installed and secured correctly before every X Brake if necessary. journey. RMaintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient- climbing capability, decreases with Cover cap increasing altitude.
Z 256 Towing atrailer
X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the X Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball arrow, out of the ball coupling recess. coupling recess and the ball coupling to the X Place protective cap : in the ball coupling stop. recess. d parking
Driving an Bolt and spring cotter Ball coupling recess X Secure the bolt using spring cotter B.
Holes in the ball coupling and ball coupling recess Correctly installed and secured ball coupling X Insertthe ball coupling horizontally into ball X Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring coupling recess ; in the direction of the cotter for correct installation. arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are If the ball coupling cannot be correctly in line with the holes in ball coupling mounted, remove the ball coupling. Under recess ?. these circumstances, the ball coupling must not be used for trailer towing. If the ball coupling cannot be locked and the key cannot be removed, remove the ball coupling and clean it. If the ball coupling can still not be installed (locked) after it has been cleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailer tow hitch must then not be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation cannot be guaranteed. Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Bolt Towing atrailer 257
Coupling up a trailer be fastened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not to the bumper or the axle. ! Do notconnectthe trailer's brake system Leave enough play in the chains to make (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system tight cornering possible. of the towing vehicle, as the latter is equipped with an anti-lock brake system. RAseparate brake system for certain types Doing so will result in a loss of function of of trailer. the brake systems of both the vehicle and RAsafety switch for braked trailers. Check the trailer. the specific legal requirements applicable to your state.
X Make sure that the automatic transmission d parking is set to position P. If the trailer detaches from the towing vehicle, the safety switch applies the X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake. trailer's brakes. X Start the engine. X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package:
select highway level. Towing atrailer Driving an X Vehicles with ADS: set ADS to AUTO or There are numerous legal requirements COMF. concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g.speed X Switch off the engine. restrictions. Make sure that your vehicle/ X Close all doors and the tailgate. trailer combination complies with the local X Couple up the trailer. requirements not only in your area of residence but also at any location to which X Establish all electrical connections. you are traveling. The police and local X Check that the trailer lighting system is authorities can provide reliable information. working. Please observe the following when towing a i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: trailer: with a trailer attached, the vehicle will RTo acquaint yourself with driving with a always remain at highway level. When trailer and with the resulting changes to coupling up a trailer, please observe the handling, you should practice cornering, following: stopping and backing up in a traffic-free RUnless highway level has been set location. manually, the vehicle is automatically RBefore driving, check: lowered to highway level. This is the case - Trailer tow hitch if a speed of 5mph (8 km/h) is reached. - Safety switch for braked trailers RHigh-speed level is not available. - Safety chains These restrictions apply to all accessories powered through a connectionto the trailer - Electrical connections power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle - Lights carrier. - the wheels Observe the maximum permissible trailer RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an dimensions (width and length). unobstructed view of the rear section of the Most U.S. states and all Canadianprovinces trailer. require by law: RIf the trailer features electronically controlled brakes, pull away the vehicle/ RSafety chains between the towing vehicle trailer combination carefully, manually and the trailer. The chains should be cross- wound under the trailer drawbar. They must
Z 258 Towing atrailer
brake using the brake controller, and check blower fan and the interior temperature to the brakes for correct function. maximum. RSecure any objects on the trailer to prevent RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is to the extended length of your vehicle/ in motion. trailer combination. RIf you couple up a trailer, regularly check Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer the cargo for secure fastening and make combination, you will have to travel an sure that the trailer lamps and (if additional distance beyond the vehicle you applicable) the trailer brakes are are overtaking before returning to the
d parking functioning correctly. previous lane. RBear in mind that the handling will be less stable when towing a trailer than when driving without one. Avoid sudden steering Decoupling atrailer movements. G WARNING Driving an RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun accelerates more slowly, has a decreased brake engaged, you could trap your hand gradient climbing capability and a longer between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. braking distance. There is a risk of injury. It is more susceptible to side winds and Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrunbrake requires more careful steering. is engaged. RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress the brake pedal moderately at first, so that G WARNING the trailer can activate its own brakes. Then Vehicles with level control: increase the pressure on the brake pedal. The vehicle is lowered as soon as you RIf the automatic transmission continues to disconnect the trailer cable. This could result shift back and forth between two gears in yourlimbs or those of other people that are when driving up or downhill, restrict the betweenthe vehicle body and tires or shift range. Select shift range 4, 3, 2, or 1. underneath the vehicle being trapped. There Alower gear and lower speed reduce the is a risk of injury. risk of engine failure. Make sure that nobody is in the immediate RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear vicinity of the wheel housings or under the to utilize the engine's braking effect. vehicle when you disconnectthe trailer cable. Avoid continuous brake application as this may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an installed, the trailer brakes. engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your RIf the coolant temperature increases vehicle could be damaged by the dramatically while the air-conditioning rebounding of the overrun brake. system is switched on, switch off the air- X Make sure that the automatic transmission conditioning system. is set to position P. Coolant heat can additionally be dissipated X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake. by opening the windows and by setting the X Start the engine. X Close all doors and the tailgate. X Apply the trailer's parking brake. Towing atrailer 259
X Detach the trailer cable and decouple the pay attention to the respective lowest trailer. values. X Switch off the engine. RThe trailer drawbarload on the ball coupling must be added to the rear axle load to avoid exceeding the permissible gross axle Permissible trailer loads and drawbar weight. The permissible gross vehicle loads weight is indicated on the identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of Weight specifications the vehicle. Maximum permissible gross vehicle i Mercedes-Benz recommends atrailer d parking weight rating load where the trailer drawbar noseweight The gross trailer weight is calculated by accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's adding the weight of the trailer to the weight permissible gross weight. of the load and equipment on the trailer. i
The weight of additional accessories, Driving an Permissible gross weight (all models except passengers, and cargo reduces the the ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY): 7,198 lbs permissible trailer load and drawbar load (3,265 kg). for yourvehicle. Permissible gross weight (ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY): 6,613 lbs Checking the vehicle and trailer weight (3,000 kg). RTo checkthat the weights of the towing Permissible noseweight vehicle and the trailer comply with the The maximum permissible trailer drawbar maximum permissible values, have the noseweightis the maximum weight with vehicle/trailer combination (including the which the trailer drawbarcan be loaded. driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated All models (exceptthe weighbridge. ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY: 575 lbs (261 kg). RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY: 529 lbs (240 kg). front and rear axles, the gross weight of the Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer trailer and trailer drawbarload. couplings.
Loading atrailer Removing the ball coupling
RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that X Remove the spring cotter. neitherthe permissible gross weight of the X Remove the bolt from the ball coupling trailer nor the gross vehicle weight is recess. exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle X Remove the ball coupling from the ball weight is indicated on the identification coupling recess. plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty. You can find the maximum permissible Information on cleaning and care of the trailer values on the type plates of your vehicle tow hitch can be found at (Y page 374). and the trailer. When calculating how much weight the vehicle and trailer may carry,
Z 260 Towing atrailer
Storing the ball coupling G WARNING Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle interior if it is not secured. Otherwise, you and others could be injured by the ball coupling being thrown around if you: Rbrake sharply Rchange direction suddenly d parking Rare involved in an accident
Trailer power supply
Driving an ! You can connect accessories with a maximum power consumption of 240 W to the permanent powersupply. You must notcharge a trailer battery using the power supply. The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at the factory with apermanentpower supply. The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. Aqualified specialist workshop can provide more information about installing the trailer electrics. 261
Useful information ...... 262 Important safety notes ...... 262 Displays and operation ...... 263 Menus and submenus ...... 266 Display messages ...... 282 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ...... 316 On-board computer and displays 262 Important safety notes
Useful information multifunction display.You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at i This Operator's Manual describes all all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not models and all standard and optional operating safely may cause an accident. equipment of your vehicle available at the For an overview, see the instrument panel time of publication of the Operator's illustration (Y page 33). Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety- related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 27).
Important safety notes On-board computer and displays G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situationpermits.Ifyou are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the Displays and operation 263
Displays and operation Instrument cluster On-board computer and displays
Instrument cluster: miles : Speedometer with segments (Y page 264) ; Fuel gauge = Tachometer (Y page 264) ? Coolant temperature (Y page 263) A Multifunction display (Y page 265) B Instrumentcluster lighting (Y page 263)
Instrument cluster lighting In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. The lighting in the instrumentcluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness Coolant temperature display control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the G WARNING bottom left of the instrument cluster Driving when your engine is overheated can (Y page 33). cause some fluids which may have leaked into X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise the engine compartment to catch fire. You or counter-clockwise. could be seriously burned. If the light switch is set to Ã, T or Steam from an overheated engine can cause L, the brightness is dependent upon serious burns which can occur just by opening the brightness of the ambientlight. the engine hood. Stay away fromthe engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. i The light sensor in the instrumentcluster Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from automatically controls the brightness of other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the the multifunction display.
Z 264 Displays and operation
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until One or two segments in the set speed the engine has cooled down. range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detectsavehicle in front: ! Adisplay message is shown if the coolant The segments between the speed of the temperature is too high. vehicle in frontand the stored speed light If the coolant temperature is over up. 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. The coolanttemperature gauge is in the Operating the on-board computer instrument cluster on the right-hand side Overview (Y page 33). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
On-board computer and displays Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protectthe engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display : Multifunctiondisplay You should pay special attention to road ; Switches on the Voice Control System; conditions when temperatures are around see the separate operating instructions freezing point. = Right control panel The outside temperature display is in the ? Left control panel multifunction display (Y page 265). A Back button Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. X To activatethe on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. Speedometer with segments You can control the multifunction display and The segments in the speedometer indicate the settings in the on-board computer using which speed range is available. the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. RCruise control activated (Y page 192): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 194): Displays and operation 265
Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume X = RCalls up the menu and menu bar ; 8 RMute 9 Press briefly: Back button : RScrolls in lists RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:
RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack ter and displays stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control a video scene System; see the separate RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: operating instructions compu switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function rd number used 9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial
memory On-boa : RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/nextstation or selects % Press and hold: an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in using rapid scrolling the Trip menu RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open Multifunction display a RConfirms a selection/display message RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station
Right control panel
~ RRejects or ends a call RExits phone book/redial memory
6 RMakes or accepts a call : Time RSwitches to the redial memory ; Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 274) = Description field ? Menu bar
Z 266 Menus and submenus
A Drive program (Y page 165) Menus and submenus B Transmission position(Ypage 165) Menu overview X To show menu bar ?: press the = Press the = or ; button on the or ; button on the steering wheel. steering wheel to call up the menu bar and Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds. selectamenu. Text field = shows the selected menu or Operating the on-board computer submenu as well as display messages. (Y page 264). Depending on the equipment installed in the i You can set the time using the audio vehicle, you can call up the following menus: system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. RTrip menu (Y page 266) The following messages may appear in the RNavi menu (navigationinstructions) multifunction display: (Y page 268) R XjY Active Parking Assist Audio menu (Y page 269) R (Y page 217) Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 270) R On-board computer and displays CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 192) DriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 272) fDSR DSR (Y page 246) RServ. menu (Y page 273) Ç Off-road program (vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD RSett. menu (Y page 274) package) (Y page 248) RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 278) Ç Off-road program (vehicles with RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 278) the ON&OFFROADpackage) (Y page 248) LOW LOW RANGE off-road gear Trip menu RANGE (Y page 250) Standard display _ Adaptive high-beam Assist (Y page 126) À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 230) ¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 161) à Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 235) X Press and hold the % button on the à Active Lane Keeping Assist steering wheel until the Trip menu with (Y page 241) trip odometer : and odometer ; is ë HOLD function (Y page 207) shown. Ä Distance warning function (Y page 68) Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73) Menus and submenus 267
Trip computer "From Start" or "From Displaying the range and current fuel Reset" consumption
Example: trip computer "From Start" : Approximate range : Distance ; Current fuel consumption (not for AMG ; Time vehicles) = Average speed X Press the = or ; button on the ? Average fuel consumption steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X X Press the = or ; button on the Press the 9 or : button to select the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles) and the approximate range. On-board computer and displays X Press 9 or : to select From Start or From Reset. The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current The values in the From Start submenu are driving style. If there is only a small amount calculated fromthe start of a journey, while of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows the values in the From Reset submenu are a vehicle being refueled C instead of the calculated from the last time the submenu range. was reset (Y page 268). The From Start trip computer is Digital speedometer automatically reset when: RThe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles. : Digital speedometer X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer.
Z 268 Menus and submenus
Resetting values Route guidance not active
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start" : Direction of travel X Press the = or ; button on the ; Current street steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Route guidance active function that you wish to reset. No change of direction announced X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. On-board computer and displays You can reset the values of the following functions: Rtrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer : Distance to the destination R"FromReset" trip computer ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current street Navigation system menu ? Symbol "follow the road's course" Displaying navigation instructions Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information, see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on the audio system with Becker® MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the : Road into which the change of direction steering wheel to select the Navi menu. leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction icon When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of direction =.This shortens from the bottom Menus and submenus 269 to the top of the display as you approach the Audio menu point of the announced change of direction. Selecting aradio station Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation
: Waveband ; Station frequency with memory position : Road into which the change of direction leads i Station ; is displayed with the station ; Distance to change of directionand visual frequency or station name. The memory distance display position is only displayed along with = Lane recommendation station ; if this has beenstored. On-board computer and displays ? New lane during a change of direction X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; see A Uninterrupted lane the separate operating instructions. B Change-of-direction icon X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation = for the next change X To select astoredstation: briefly press of direction. During the change of direction, the 9 or : button. additional lanes may be displayed. X To select a station from the station Lane recommendations are only displayed if list: press and briefly hold the 9 the relevant data is availableonthe digital or : button. map. If no stationlist is received: X To select astation using the station Other status indicators of the search: press and briefly hold the 9 navigation system or : button.
RO:you have reached the destination or an i For informationonswitching waveband intermediate destination. and storing stations; see the separate RNew Route... or Calculating Route: operating instructions. calculating a new route i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a R Off Map or Off Mapped Road:the vehicle normal radio. position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position). For more informationonsatellite radio operation, see the separate operating RNo Route:no route could be calculated to instructions. the selected destination.
Z 270 Menus and submenus
Operating an audio player or audio Video DVD operation media
Display CD/DVD changer (example) Display CD/DVD changer (example) : Current DVD in the CD/DVD changer : Current CD in the CD/DVD changer ; Current scene ; Current title X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; Audio data from various audio devices or see the separate operating instructions. media can be played, depending on the X Press the = or ; button on the equipment installed in the vehicle. steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X Switch on COMAND and activate audio X To selectthe next/previous scene: On-board computer and displays CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the briefly press the 9 or : button. separate operating instructions. X To selectascene from the scene list X Press the = or ; button on the (rapid scrolling): press and hold the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. 9 or : buttonuntil desired X To select the next/previous track: scene ; has been reached. briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the Telephone menu 9 or : button until desired Introduction track ; has been reached. If you press and hold 9 or :, the G WARNING rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all The driver's attentionto the road must always audio drives or data carriers support this be his/her primary focus when driving. For function. your safety and the safety of others, we If track information is stored on the audio recommend that you pull over to a safe device or medium, the multifunction display location and stop before placing or taking a will show the number and title of the track. telephone call. If you choose to use the The currenttrack does not appear in audio telephone while driving, please use the hands- AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external free device and only use the telephone when audio source connected). road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Menus and submenus 271
X Switch on the mobile phone (see the Dialing a number from the phone book separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the X Switch on COMAND (see the separate steering wheel to select the Tel menu. operating instructions). X Press the 9, : or a button to X ® Establish a Bluetooth connection to switch to the phone book. COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold You will see one of the following display the 9 or : button for longer than messages in the multifunction display: one second. RPhone READY or the name of the network Rapid scrolling stops whenyou release the provider: the mobile phone has found a button or reach the end of the list. network and is ready to receive. X If only one telephone number is stored RTelephone No Service: there is no for a name: press the 6 or a button network available or the mobile phone is
to start dialing. On-board computer and displays searching for a network. or X If there is more than one number for a Accepting acall particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or Example: incoming call X To exit the telephone book: press the If someone calls you whenyou are in the ~ or % button. Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. Redialing X Press the 6 button on the steering The on-board computer saves the last names wheel to accept an incoming call. or numbers dialed in the redial memory. You can accept a call even if you are not in X Press the = or ; button on the the Tel menu. steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the Rejecting or ending acall redial memory. X Press the ~ button on the steering X Press the 9 or : button to select the wheel. desired name or number. You can end or reject a call even if you are not X Press the 6 or a button to start in the Tel menu. dialing. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button.
Z 272 Menus and submenus
Assistance menu Switching the distance warning function on and off Introduction X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select Dist. Warning. X Press the a button. The currentselection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a In the DriveAssist menu, you have the button again. following options: When the distance warning function is Rshowing the distance display activated, the multifunction display shows (Y page 272) the Ä symbol if the HOLD function is not Ractivating/deactivating thedistance activated (Y page 207). warning function (Y page 272) Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if
On-board computer and displays Ractivating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE® PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving Brake (Y page 272) at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the j Ractivating/deactivating ATTENTION Active Parking Assist symbol is shown instead ASSIST(Ypage 273) of the Ä symbol (Y page 217). Ractivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Further information on the distance warning or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 273) function (Y page 68). Ractivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® (Y page 273) Brake PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles Showing the distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select X Press the 9 or : button to select Distance Display. PRE-SAFE Brake. X Press the a button. X Press the a button. The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display The currentselection is displayed. appears in the multifunction display X To activate/deactivate: press the a (Y page 202). button again. If the Sensors Deactivated message When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the appears, the radar sensorsystem is multifunction display shows the Ä symbol deactivated. as long as the HOLD function is not activated X Activate the radarsensor system (Y page 207). (Y page 277). Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the j Active Parking Assist symbol is shown instead of the Ä symbol (Y page 217). Menus and submenus 273
If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors For further information about Blind Spot Deactivated message appears, the radar Assist, see (Y page 233). sensor system is deactivated. For further information about Active Blind X Activate the radarsensor system Spot Assist, see (Y page 237). (Y page 277). Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, Assist see (Y page 73). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Activating/deactivating ATTENTION to select the DriveAssist menu. ASSIST X Press the 9 or : button to select X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Lane Keep. Asst. to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select The currentselection is displayed. Attention Asst. X Press a to confirm. X Press the a button. X Press : or 9 to set Off, Standard
The currentselection is displayed. or Adaptive. On-board computer and displays X To activate/deactivate: press the a X Press the a button to save the setting. button again. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the Keeping Assist is activated, the à symbol À symbol appears in the multifunction appears in the multifunction display when the display when the ignition is on. ignition is on. For further information about ATTENTION For further information about Lane Keeping ASSIST, see (Y page 230). Assist, see (Y page 235). For further information about Active Lane Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Keeping Assist, see (Y page 241). Assist
X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Maintenance menu to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Asst.. X Press the a button. The currentselection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors In the Serv menu, you have the following Deactivated or Active Blind Spot options: Assist Sensors Deactivated message Rcall up display messages in message appears, the radar sensor system is memory (Y page 282) deactivated. Rrestart the tire pressure loss warning X Activate the radar sensor system system (Y page 406) (Y page 277).
Z 274 Menus and submenus
Rcheck the tire pressure electronically X Press the : or 9 button to select the (Y page 406) Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: Rcall up service due date (Y page 369) function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. Settings menu X Press the a button to save the setting. Introduction The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Rthe odometer and the trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu In the Sett. menu, you have the following options: Rcruise control On-board computer and displays RDISTRONIC PLUS Rchanging the instrument cluster settings R (Y page 274) ASSYST PLUS service interval display Rchanging the light settings (Y page 274) Selecting the permanent display function Rchanging the vehicle settings You can determine whether the multifunction (Y page 276) display permanently shows your speed or the Rchanging the convenience settings outside temperature. (Y page 277) X Press the = or ; button on the Rrestoring the factory settings steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. (Y page 278) X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. Cluster submenu. Instrumentcluster submenu X Press a to confirm. Selecting the unit of measurement for X Press the : or 9 button to select the distance Permanent Display: function. The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: You will see the selected setting: Outside function allows you to choose whether Temperature or Speedometer km/h certain displays appear in kilometers or miles (USA)/Speedometer mph (Canada). in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph kilometers. (Canada). X Press the = or ; button on the Light submenu steering wheel to selectthe Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Setting the daytime running lamps Inst. Cluster submenu. i This function is not available in Canada. X Press a to confirm. Menus and submenus 275
X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. brightness to any level from Off to Level X Press the : or 9 button to select the 5 (bright). Lights submenu. X Press the a or % button to save the X Press a to confirm. setting. X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime Setting the ambient lighting color Running Lights: function. X Press the = or ; button on the If the Daytime Running Lights: have steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display X Press the : or 9 button to select the are shown in red. Lights submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press a to confirm. Further information on daytime running X Press the : or 9 button to select the Ambient Light Color function. lamps (Y page 120). X Press a to confirm. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ X Press the : or 9 button to set the off On-board computer and displays color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR. X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the a or % button to save the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. Surround lighting and exterior lighting X Press a to confirm. delayed switch-off X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the Adaptive Highbeam function. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. If the Adaptive Highbeam function has X Press the : or 9 button to select the been switched on, the cone of light and the Light submenu. _ symbol in the upper multifunction X Press a to confirm. display are shown in red. X Press : or 9 to select the X Press the a button to save the setting. Surround Lighting function. For further information about Adaptive When the Surround Lighting function is Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 126). activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in Setting the brightness of the ambient the multifunction display. lighting X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the X Press a to confirm. SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Press the : or 9 button to select the ignition lock. Amb. Light +/-. function. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is You will see the selected setting. deactivated. X Press a to confirm.
Z 276 Menus and submenus
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is displayed in red in the multifunction reactivated the next time you start the display. engine. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you have activated the Surround Lighting functionand the light switch is set Vehicle submenu to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Activating/deactivating the automatic RSurround lighting: the exteriorlighting door locking mechanism remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking If you activate the Automatic Door Lock with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, function, the vehicle is centrally locked above the surround lighting is switched off and a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). the automatic headlamp mode is activated X Press the = or ; button on the (Y page 120). steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle exterior lighting remains lit for submenu. 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the tailgate, X Press a to confirm. On-board computer and displays the exterior lighting goes off after X Press : or 9 to select the 5seconds. Automatic Door Lock function. When the Automatic Door Lock function i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed when the surround lighting and delayed in red in the multifunction display. switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: X Press the a button to save the setting. RParking lamps For further information on the automatic RDaytime running lamps locking feature, see (Y page 86). RSide marker lamps Activating/deactivating the acoustic RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors locking verification signal Activating/deactivating the interior If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, lighting delayed switch-off an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. If you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remains X Press the = or ; button on the on for 20seconds after you remove the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle X Press the = or ; button on the submenu. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. Acoustic Lock function. X Press a to confirm. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction X Press : or 9 to select the display lights up red. Interior Lighting Delay function. When the Interior Lighting Delay X Press the a button to save the setting. function is activated, the vehicle interior is Menus and submenus 277
Activating/deactivating the radarsensor X Press a to confirm. system X Press : or 9 to select the Easy X Press the = or ; button on the Entry/Exit function. steering wheel to selectthe Sett. menu. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle activated, the vehicle steering wheel is submenu. displayed in red in the multifunction X Press a to confirm. display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT You will see the selected setting: Enabled feature (Y page 112). or Disabled. Switching the belt adjustment on/off X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the The following systems are switched off when steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. the radar sensor system is deactivated: X Press the : or 9 button to select the RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194) Convenience submenu. RBAS PLUS (Y page 67) X Press a to confirm. On-board computer and displays RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73) X Press the : or 9 button to select the RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 233) Belt Adjustment function. RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 237) When the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed Convenience submenu in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 57). G WARNING You must make sure no one can become Switching the fold-in mirrors when trapped or injured by the moving steering locking feature on/off wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is This function is only available on vehicles with activated. the memory function (Y page 116). To stop steering wheel movement, move When you activate the Auto. Mirror steering wheel adjustment lever or press one Folding function, the exterior mirrors are of the memory position buttons. folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you Do not leave children unattended in the unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. exterior mirrors fold out again. Children could open the driver's door and X Press the = or ; button on the unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. feature, which could result in an accident X Press the : or 9 button to select the and/or serious personal injury. Convenience submenu. X X Press the = or ; button on the Press a to confirm. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu.
Z 278 Menus and submenus
X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. ON&OFFROAD menu Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting.
Multifunction display (example) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu. You can set the following currentsettings to appear in the ON&OFFROAD menu: ROn-road program (Y page 243) ROff-road program (Y page 248) On-board computer and displays
: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out AMG menu in AMG vehicles If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Folding on and you fold the exterior mirrors AMG displays in using button : , they will not fold out automatically (Y page 114). You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button :.
Restoring the factory settings
X Press the = or ; button on the : Digital speedometer steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. ; Gear indicator X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. = Upshift indicator X Press a to confirm. ? Engine oil temperature The Reset All Settings? message A Coolant temperature appears. B ECO start/stop function status indicator X Press the : or 9 button to select (Y page 161) No or Yes. X Press the = or ; button on the X Press a to confirm the selection. steering wheel to select the AMG menu. If you select Yes, the multifunction display Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the shows a confirmation message. engine has reached the overrevving range For safety reasons, the Daytime Running when in the manual gearshift program. Lights function in the Lights submenu is Upshift indicator UP= fades out other only reset if the vehicle is stationary. messages until you have shifted up. When the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †) the oil temperature is shownin Menus and submenus 279 blue. Avoid driving at full engine output during You can start the RACETIMER when the this time. engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. SETUP X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time : Drive program (C/S/M) ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) = Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/ SPORT+) SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the On-board computer and displays suspension tuning. X Press the = or ; button to select X Press the = or ; button on the Interm. Time. steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until The intermediate time is displayed for five SETUP is displayed. seconds.
RACETIMER Starting a new lap
Displaying and starting RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads.
: RACETIMER ; Fastest lap time (best lap) = Lap
X Press a to confirm New Lap. : Lap i It is possible to store a maximum of ; RACETIMER sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap.
Z 280 Menus and submenus
Stopping the RACETIMER Overall statistics
X Press the % button on the steering : RACETIMER overall evaluation wheel. ; Total time driven X Press a to confirm Yes. = Average speed The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you ? Distance covered stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to A Maximum speed position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the This function is shown if you have stored at SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. a to confirm Start, timing is continued.
On-board computer and displays X Press the = or ; button on the Resetting the current lap steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the X Press the = or ; button to select overall evaluation is shown. Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Lap statistics
Deleting all laps
: Lap ; Lap time If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are = Average lap speed deleted. ? Lap length You cannot delete individual stored laps. If A Top speed during lap you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Menus and submenus 281
This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. On-board computer and displays
Z 282 Display messages
Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in themultifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified forminthe Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
RHOLD function (Y page 207) RParking (Y page 179)
Hiding display messages On-board computer and displays X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.
Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory.You can call up the display messages: X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high- priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Display messages 283
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill Currently start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily Unavailable See unavailable. Operator's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. On-board computer and displays G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. !÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrumentcluster also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING
Z 284 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lockifyou brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. Currently COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and Unavailable See ® On-board computer and displays Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 285
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps lightup in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE- SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer ÷ stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z 286 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicatorlamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 180). only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. Please Release X Release the electric parking brake manually. Parking Brake The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are using the electric parking brake for emergency braking (Y page 180).
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. only)!(Canada To apply: only) On-board computer and displays X Switch the ignition off. Parking Brake See Operator's Manual X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 180). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 287
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicatorlamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: X Do not drive on.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 422). On-board computer and displays X Shift the transmission to P. X Turn the frontwheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:
X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 180). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Z 288 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parkingbrake, the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop.
F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or only) released. It then goes out or remains lit. Parking Brake The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of Inoperative overvoltage or undervoltage.
On-board computer and displays X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the only) ignition was switched off. Turn On the X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. Ignition to X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. Release the Parking Brake Display messages 289
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$(USA There is notenough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp only)J(Canada lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. only) G WARNING Check Brake Fluid Level The braking effect may be impaired. There is a riskofanaccident. X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. On-board computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pad Wear G USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace system are malfunctioning. mbrace Inoperative Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAID system are malfunctioning. X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at aqualified specialist workshop. X Canada only: have the TELEAIDsystem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE Important functionsof PRE-SAFE® have failed.All other occupant Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Z 290 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive Functions Brake Assistis temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Limited Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. See Operator's Rthe sensor in the bumper is dirty. Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.
On-board computer and displays If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Cleanthe bumpers (Y page 373). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 71). Display messages 291
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package: Functions PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Limited Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. See Operator's Rthe sensors in the radiatorgrill and the bumper are dirty. Manual Rthe radarsensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear: On-board computer and displays X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 373). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 71).
PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive Functions Limited Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning function may also have See Operator's failed. Manual Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package: PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning function may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). SRS Malfunction The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Further information on occupant safety (Y page 43).
Z 292 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster. Front Left Malfunction G WARNING Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be or Front Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not Malfunction be triggered. Service Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 SRS has malfunctionedat the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Left Malfunction G WARNING Service Required The airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be
On-board computer and displays or Rear Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not Malfunction be triggered. Service Required There is an increased riskofinjury. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop. 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Center Malfunction G WARNING Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the Left Side Curtain instrument cluster. Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING or Right Side The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered Curtain Airbag unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be Malfunction triggered. Service Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 293
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even Airbag Enabled See though: Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an objectweighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat. or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied. The system may detectobjects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. On-board computer and displays X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detectthe additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the ^a indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe ^a indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 48). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appearinthe multifunction display.
Z 294 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again.Whether the ^a indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even Airbag Disabled though: See Operator's Ran adult Manual or Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front- passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may
On-board computer and displays interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the ^a indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe ^a indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 48). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appearinthe multifunction display. Display messages 295
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again.Whether the ^a indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appearifall LEDs have failed.
Displaymessages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. b On-board computer and displays X Checkwhether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left (Y page 129). Cornering Light or Check Right or Cornering Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Low (Y page 129). Beam or Check Right Low Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. Check Trailer Left Turn Signal or or Check Trailer X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Right Turn Signal b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Rear Left (Y page 129). Turn Signal or Check Rear Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z 296 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Checkwhether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 129). Turn Signal or Check Front Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. Check Left Mirror X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Turn Signal (Y page 129). or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.
On-board computer and displays X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Center Brake (Y page 129). Lamp or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Brake (Y page 129). Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Tail (Y page 129). and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail or and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left High (Y page 129). Beam or Check Right High Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 297
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The leftorright-hand license plate lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself License Plate Lamp (Y page 129). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 129). Parking Lamp or Check Front or Right Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Backup Light On-board computer and displays (Y page 129). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 129). Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front or Right Sidemarker X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lamp b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. or Check Left Tail Lamp or Check The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. Right Tail Lamp X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 129). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Daytime (Y page 129). Running Light or Check Right or Daytime Running X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Light
Z 298 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The active lightfunction is defective. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop. Active Headlamps Inoperative b The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.
X Check the fuses (Y page 394). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The light sensoris defective.
On-board computer and displays b X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auto Lamp Function Inoperative b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Cleanthe windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Display messages 299
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine Level See cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Operator's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 367). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures under248 ‡(120 †), drive to the next qualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in On-board computer and displays mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. Awarning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING Engine Off Do notdrive when yourengine is overheated. Thiscan cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartmentto catch fire. Steamfrom the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Waituntil the engine has cooled down. X Make sure thatthe air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Z 300 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is notbeing charged. Awarning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Openthe hood. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
On-board computer and displays X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. Awarning tone also sounds. Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling X Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 366). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 366). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only). Display messages 301
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. X Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at the latest Check Engine Oil (Y page 366). Level (Add 1 quart) X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 366). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// www.mbusa.com (USA only). 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Fuel Level Low On-board computer and displays C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 8 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. Ultra Low-sulfur X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Diesel Fuel Only X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace Air Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Check Fuel Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z 302 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ø The DEF tank is almost empty. X Have the DEFtank filled as soon as possible at aqualified Check Additive See specialist workshop (Y page 177). Operator's Manual Ø The DEFlevel has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a further 16 times. Remaining Starts: X Have the DEFtank filled immediately at a qualified specialist 16 workshop (Y page 177). i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEFis not added, it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Fill the DEF tank with about 1 gal (3.8 l) of DEF (Y page 177).
Driving systems On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or alack of concentration on thepart of thedriver. A warning tone Attention Assist: also sounds. Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop. Attention Assist Inoperative Á You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are: R Drive More Slowly you are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. Ryou are towing a trailer. Rthe trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack. X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again. RVehicles with the ON&OFFROADpackage (Y page 204) RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 210) X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 253). Display messages 303
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs to cool down because of frequentlevel changes. Compressor Is X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level. Cooling X Make sure that there is sufficientground clearance. X Allow the compressorto cool down. When the compressor has cooled down, the display message disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level. Á AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level, but Malfunction no faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. On-board computer and displays Á You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road level. Max. Speed 12 mph In addition, the vehicle level display appears between the vehicle icon and the display message, and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The vehicle could tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident. X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics. X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering movements. X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) until off-road level 2 has been reached.
ACTIVE CURVE The Active Curve Systemis faulty. The vehicle's handling SYSTEM characteristics may be affected. Malfunctioning X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Z 304 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ACTIVE CURVE The Active Curve Systemis faulty. The vehicle's handling SYSTEM Malfunction characteristics are severely impaired.Awarning tone also sounds. See Operator's G WARNING Manual There is a riskofanaccident. X Drive on carefully. X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics. X Avoid suddenacceleration in tightbends and fast steering movements. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Á The vehicle is being adjusted to off-road level 3. The display message informs you of the maximum speed permissible for off- Raising Max. Speed road level 3. On-board computer and displays 12 mph X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h). g The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3to off-road level 2. The display message informs you of the maximum speed Lowering Max. permissible for off-road level 3. Speed 12 mph X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) until off-road level 2 has been reached. 8 The differential lockis malfunctioning. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h). Different. Lock Sys. Malfunction X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 8 The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged. X Drive on carefully. Different. Locking Sys. Cooling Down X Allow the differential lock to cool down. Please Wait The differential lock reengages as soon as it has cooled down. LOW RANGE Stop Agearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the Apply Parking Brake neutral position.There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Repeatthe gearshift process. Display messages 305
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions LOW RANGE LOW RANGE is malfunctioning. Malfunction To X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h). Park Apply Brake X Whenparking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshiftprocess. Speed 25 mph X Drive more slowly. The gearchange is made.
LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process. Speed 40 mph X Drive more slowly. The gear change is made.
LOW RANGE Shift to You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic Position N Briefly transmission is not in position N. On-board computer and displays X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.
LOW RANGE Shifting The gearshift process has been canceled. Canceled Please X Repeatthe gearshift process. Reactivate à DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Inoperative X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. Awarning tone also sounds. Off X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 207).
Radar Sensors The radar sensor system is deactivated. Deactivated See X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 277). Operator's Manual
Z 306 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Lane Keeping AssistorActive Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. or Active Lane Keeping Assist Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Currently Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Unavailable See When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display Operator's Manual message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
On-board computer and displays X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. Assist X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily Currently inoperative. Unavailable See You have established the electrical connection between the trailer Operator's Manual and your vehicle. or Active Blind X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display Spot Assist message. Currently Unavailable See Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while Operator's Manual towing a trailer. Display messages 307
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors are dirty. Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radarsensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. On-board computer and displays If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Clean the sensors (Y page 373). X Restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior Active Blind Spot mirrors. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been Canceled fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 217).
Z 308 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking Inoperative maneuvers. Active Parking Assistwill become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 217). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist The vehicle is parked. Awarning tone also sounds. On-board computer and displays Finished The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUShas been deactivated (Y page 194). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUSis operational againafter having been Available temporarily unavailable.You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194). DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Unavailable See Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty. Operator's Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Awarning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does notdisappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 373). X Restartthe engine. Display messages 309
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Inoperative BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be inoperative as well. Awarning tone also sounds. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no Inactive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. --- mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194).
Cruise Control Cruise control is defective. On-board computer and displays Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control Acondition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. --- mph You have tried to store aspeed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 192).
Z 310 Display messages
Tires
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire The tire pressure loss warningsystem has detected a significant Pressure Soon loss in pressure. Awarning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a riskofthe following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. On-board computer and displays There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 381). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 406).
Check Tire The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display Pressure Then message and has not been restarted since. Restart Run Flat X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. Indicator X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 406).
Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Correct Tire The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 406). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 409). Display messages 311
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. Awarning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a riskofthe following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking On-board computer and displays maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 381). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 406). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning Tire The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. RYou could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build- up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 381).
Z 312 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Due to a source of radiointerference, no signals can be received Monitor Currently from the wheel sensors.The tire pressure monitor is temporarily Unavailable malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved.
TirePress. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. On-board computer and displays Inoperative No X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. Wheel Sensors The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.
Tire Press. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. Monitor X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in 'N' to Start Engine position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer Malfunction being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).
Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Display messages 313
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Transmission Not The driver's dooris open and the transmission is in position R, N in P Risk of or D. Vehicle Rolling Awarning tone also sounds. Away X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).
Service Required You cannotchange the transmission position due to a malfunction. Do Not Shift Gears Awarning tone also sounds. Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. On-board computer and displays Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving. when Vehicle is X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. A The tailgate is open. G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. X Close the tailgate. ? The hood is open. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. Awarning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors.
Z 314 Display messages
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ð The powersteering is malfunctioning. Awarning tone also sounds. Power Steering Malfunction See G WARNING Operator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a riskofanaccident. X Check whetheryou are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range.
On-board computer and displays X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 368).
Wiper The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. Malfunctioning X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty. Flashers X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunctioning
SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. Take Your Key from Ignition  The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key Display messages 315
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged. X Change the batteries (Y page 81). Replace Key Battery  This display message is displayed foramaximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle.  The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds. Key Not Detected (red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lockthe vehicle centrally or start the engine.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying On-board computer and displays attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. Awarning tone also sounds. X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Â The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO Key Not Detected functions in the vehicle. (white display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock. Â The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. Key Detected in X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. Vehicle
Z 316 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. Remove 'Start' X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the Button and Insert desired position. Key X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  At leastone door is open. Awarning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lockthe vehicle again. Close Doors to Lock Vehicle
Warning and indicator lamps in the % Diesel engine: preglow instrument cluster (Y page 159) h Tire pressure monitor
On-board computer and displays Overview (Y page 329) L Low-beam headlamps (Y page 121) T Parking lamps (Y page 122) K High-beam headlamps (Y page 124) #! Turn signal (Y page 123) ü Seat belts (Y page 317) $ (USA) Brakes (Y page 318) J (Canada)Brakes (Y page 318) ! ABS (Y page 319) ÷ ESP®(Y page 321) å ESP® OFF (Y page 321) F (USA) Electric parking brake (red) (Y page 324) ! (Canada)Electric parking brake (red) (Y page 324) ! Electric parking brake (yellow) (Y page 324) 6 SRS (Y page 324) ; Check Engine (Y page 325) 8 Reserve fuel (Y page 325) ? Coolant (Y page 326) · Distance warning function (Y page 328) Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 317
Safety Seat belts
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and frontpassenger After starting the to fasten their seat belts. engine, the red seat X Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 56). belt warning lamp lights up for 6seconds.
ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56). engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases. belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds On-board computer and displays for up to six seconds.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56). warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out. after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat. or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.
ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You The red seat belt are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven warning lamp flashes faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). and an intermittent X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56). audible warning The warning lamp goes out and the intermittentwarning tone sounds. ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.You are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittentwarning tone ceases.
Z 318 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Safety systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$ (USA only) G WARNING J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking The red brake system characteristics may be affected. warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident. while the engine is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying running. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving also sounds. under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
On-board computer and displays $ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. J (Canada only) G WARNING The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired. warning lamp comes on while the engine is There is a risk of an accident. running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 319
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a The yellow ABS warning malfunction. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, lamp is lit while the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® engine is running. Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. On-board computer and displays If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
Z 320 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, The yellow ABS warning EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, lamp is lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD engine is running. function, hill start assist, and ESP® trailer stabilization, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete. RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.
On-board computer and displays The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 321
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, The yellow ABS warning PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, lamp is lit while the the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization, engine is running. A for example, are not available either. warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. On-board computer and displays X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, J (Canada only) PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, ÷å! the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization, The red brake warning for example, are also not available. lamp, the yellow ESP® ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. and ESP® OFF warning G WARNING lamps and the yellow The brake system continues to function normally, but without the ABS warning lamp are functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lit while the engine is lock if you brake hard, for example. running. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z 322 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. warning lamp flashes Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. while the vehicle is in X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as motion. necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.
å ESP® is deactivated. ® The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷å ESP®,BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE® Brake,COLLISION The yellow ESP® and PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® OFF warning ESP® trailer stabilization are not available due to a malfunction. lamps are lit while the ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. engine is running. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 323
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill start assist and The yellow ESP® and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable. ESP® OFF warning COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and lamps are lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. On-board computer and displays X Carefully drive a short distance on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z 324 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction ! (Canada only) display. The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or lights up and/or ! warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up.
6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint The red SRS warning System). lamp is lit while the G WARNING
On-board computer and displays engine is running. The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 325
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a malfunction, for example: The yellow Check Rin the engine management Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with a gasoline engine) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the enginemay be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified
specialist workshop as soon as the yellow CheckEngine warning On-board computer and displays lamp lights up.This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 176). X Start the engine three to four times after refueling. If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.
8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station. warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking. warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler motion. cap. In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist Check Engine warning workshop. lamp may light up.
Z 326 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is The red coolant defective. warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, temperature gauge is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue at the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 327
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant level is too low. The red coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine warning lamp comes on cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. while the engine is running. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179).
X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until On-board computer and displays the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 367). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level warning lamp comes on may be too low. while the engine is G WARNING running. A warning tone also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive whenyour engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury.
Z 328 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 367). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the next
On-board computer and displays qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in yourline The red distance of travel at too high a speed. warning function X Be prepared to brake immediately. warning lamp comes on X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to while the vehicle is brake or take evasive action. moving. A warning tone also sounds. Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 194). Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73). Further information on the distance warning function (Y page 68). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 329
Tires
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at USA only: leastone of the tires. The yellow tire pressure G WARNING monitor warning lamp With tire pressures which aretoo low, there is a risk of the (pressure loss/ following hazards: malfunction) is lit. Canada only: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly (pressure loss) is lit. impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 381). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 406). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h The tire pressure monitor is faulty. USA only: G WARNING The yellow tire pressure The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire monitor warning lamp pressure. (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for There is a risk of an accident. approximately one X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction minute and then display. remains lit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Z 330 331
Useful information ...... 332 Stowage areas ...... 332 Features ...... 343 Stowage and features 332 Stowage areas
Useful information never be exceeded. The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified on the vehicle i This Operator's Manual describes all identification plate on the B-pillar of the models and all standard and optional driver's door (Y page 410). equipment of your vehicle available at the The load must also be distributed so that the time of publication of the Operator's weight on each axle never exceeds the gross Manual. Country-specific differences are axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and possible. Please note that your vehicle may rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and not be equipped with all features GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate described. This also applies to safety- on the B-pillar of the driver's door related systems and functions. (Y page 410). i Read the information on qualified Observe the notes on the loading the vehicle (Y page 410). specialist workshops: (Y page 27). The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of Stowage areas the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when Loading guidelines transporting a load: G WARNING RNever exceed the maximum permissible Stowage and features If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or gross vehicle weight or the gross axle not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip weight rating of the vehicle (including over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants). occupants. There is a risk of injury, RThe cargo compartment is the preferred particularly in the eventofsudden braking or place to carry objects. a suddenchange in direction. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as Always store objects so that they cannot be possible and as low down in the cargo flung around. Secure objects, luggage or compartmentas possible. loads against slipping or tipping before the RThe load must not protrude above the journey. upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load against the rear or G WARNING front seat backrests. Make sure that the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust seat backrests are securely locked into gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate place. is open when the engine is running, RAlways place the load behind unoccupied particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust seats if possible. fumes could enter the passenger RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. nets to transport loads and luggage. Turn off the engine before opening the RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. materials appropriate for the weight and The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle size of the load. weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare RHook in the cargo net when loading. wheel, installed accessories, vehicle RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and occupants and luggage/cargo. wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges The gross load limit and the gross vehicle for protection. weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must Stowage areas 333
Stowage space Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be 1 Glove box unlocked thrown around in such situations. 2 Glove box locked RAlways make sure that objects do not The glove box can be locked and unlocked protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets using the mechanical key. or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy,
hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too Stowage and features large in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332).
Glove box
Partition : for stowing flat objects is located in the upper section of the glove box. It can be removed to increase the stowage space in the glove box. X To remove: pull partition : forwards and out X To install: insert partition : and push it back until it engages.
X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. i The glove box can be cooled (Y page 152).
Z 334 Stowage areas
Stowage compartment under the X To open: press marking :. armrest The eyeglasses compartmentopens downwards. X To close: press marking : again and eyeglasses compartment returns upwards and engages. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.
Stowage compartment in the front center console
X To open: pull handle : up. The armrest folds out. In the stowage compartment, there is a stowage tray. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a
Stowage and features USB connection and an AUX IN connection or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® X To open: slide cover : forwards. or MP3 Player. Stowage compartment ; appears. X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will i There is a removable stowage tray in the go. storage compartment, in which objects such as an iPod® can be stored. Stowage compartment in the rear Eyeglasses compartment center console
X To open: briefly press the stowage compartment marking. The stowage compartment opens. Stowage areas 335 i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be open stowage spaces above and below the stowage compartment.
Stowage net G WARNING Vehicles with the Occupant Classification System(OCS): If the gross weight of the objects in the stowage net on the back of the front- The through-loading facility is opened from passenger seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), the cargo compartment. OCS cannot correctly assess the occupant's X Release the seat backrests in the second weight category. The front-passenger front air row of seats and tilt them in the cargo/load bag could deploy without cause, or may fail to position (Y page 106). deploy in the event of an accident. This poses X Fold down the rear seat armrest. an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. X Pull the center head restraint on the rear Never exceed the permissiblegross weight of bench seat into the uppermost position 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects (Y page 104). Stowage and features in the cargo compartment. X Slide release catch : to the left and swing Stowage nets are located in the front- flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear passenger footwell and on the back of the side of the rear bench seat. driver's and the front-passengerseat. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 333).
Through-loading facility in the rear If objects or loads are not secured when being transported in the through-loading facility, they could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. X Push cover = forward until it is lying on the Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332) and the safety notes regarding stowage rear seat armrest. spaces (Y page 333).
Cargo compartment enlargement Important safety notes G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold
Z 336 Stowage areas
forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the i If the driver's or front-passenger seat is event of an accident. set for a larger person, it may not be RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be possible to fold the rear bench seat pushed into the seatbelt by the rear bench forwards. In this case, move the frontseats seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The as far forward as possible. seat belt can no longer offer the intended X Move the head restraints to the lowest level of protection and could even cause position (Y page 106). injuries. X Fold seat cushion : upwards. RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. There is an increased risk of injury. Before every trip, make sure that the seat backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged.
! Fold the seat cushion upwards before folding the rear bench seat forward. Otherwise, the backrests may be damaged. Stowage and features When the backrest is folded forwards, the X Pull release handle ; upwards in the frontseats should not be moved to their direction of the arrow until the backrest is rearmost position.Otherwise, the front fully released. seats and the rearbench seat could be X Fold the backrest forwards until it reaches damaged. the cargo compartment position. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 332). The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests can be folded forwards separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity.
Folding the rear bench seat forwards ! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care when folding it down. Make sure that the head restraints are pushed all the way in so that the backrests and seat cushions are not damaged. X Guide seat belts ; under respective clips :. Stowage areas 337
Folding the rearbench seat back RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection. Cargo compartment
X Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages. Make sure notto trap the seat belt while doing so. X Swing seat cushion : back. There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if cargo compartment. necessary (Y page 106). Before using the cargo tie-down rings on the
front right-hand side of the cargo Stowage and features compartment, the stowage net must be Securing cargo pushed down. Cargo tie-down rings Bag hook General notes G WARNING G WARNING The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a or items of luggage. Objects or items of load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether luggage could be flung around and thereby hit anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes changing directions. There is a risk of injury. in direction or in the event of an accident.The Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. load could slip, tip over or be flung around and Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk objects on the bag hooks. of injury. Only use the cargo tie down rings when ! The bag hook can bear a maximum load securing a load. of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to secure a load. Observe the following notes on securing loads: RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie down rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads.
Z 338 Stowage areas
of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the cargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure that you do not stack the load in the cargo compartment higher than the lower edge of There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment the side windows. Do not place heavy on the left-hand side. objects on top of the cargo compartment X Press bag hook marking :. cover. X Turn bag hook : until it engages. A cargo compartment cover or a combined cargo cover and net (cargo compartment Securing hooks cover with cargo net) is installed, depending on equipment, behind the rear bench seat backrest. Stowage and features Extending/retracting the cargo compartment cover
There are two securing hooks : on each side of the cargo compartment. Only secure lightweight luggage items on the mounting hooks to a maximum of 9 lbs (4 kg). X To extend: pull the cargo compartment cover back by grab handle : and clip it Cargo compartment cover into retainers ; on the left and right. X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment Important safety notes cover from left-hand and right-hand G WARNING retainers ;. On its own, the cargo compartment cover X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, by grab handle : until it is completely items of luggage and heavy loads. You could rolled up. be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event Stowage areas 339
Removing/installing the cargo Removing/installing the combined compartment cover(withoutintegrated cargo cover and net (cargo cargo net) compartment cover with integrated cargo net)
X To remove: make sure that cargo compartment cover : is rolled up. You can install and remove the combined X Push end cap = of cargo compartment cargo cover and net from the cargo cover : in the direction of the arrow on compartment. the right or left-hand side. X Make sure that the cargo net and the cargo compartment cover are rolled up. Stowage and features X Push cargo compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;. X To remove: press button ;. X Remove cargo compartment cover :. X Swing the combined cargo cover and net in the direction of the arrow. X To install: if installed, remove the protective caps from the side panels of the X First, detach the combined cargo cover and seat row in which the cargo compartment net from left-hand catch : and then cover is to be installed. Use a suitable remove it from right-hand fixture =. objecthere, e.g. a coin. X To install: push the combined cargo cover X Install the protective caps to the side and net up to the stop into right-hand panels of the other seat row. fixture =. X Place cargo compartment cover : into X Place the combined cargo cover and net anchorage ; on the right or left-hand side. into the left-hand fixture and push it into catch : until the combined cargo cover X Push in opposite end cap = of cargo and net engages audibly. compartment cover : in the direction of the arrow and insert cargo compartment cover : into opposite anchorage ;.
Z 340 Stowage areas
X Make sure that red lock status Coat hooks on the tailgate indicator ? is no longer visible. The combined cargo cover and net will otherwise not be locked in place.
Cargo net in combined cargo cover and net Important safety notes G WARNING On its own, the cargo net cannot secure or : Coat hook restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There EASY-PACK load-securing kit is an increased risk of injury or even fatal Components and storage injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you Stowage and features flung around. Secure objects, luggage or to use your cargo compartment for a variety loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by of purposes. The accessory parts are located using tie downs, even if you are using the under the cargo compartment floor. cargo net. X Open the cargo compartment floor (Y page 342). It is important to use a cargo net if you load the vehicle with small objects above the seat backrests.For safety reasons, always use a cargo net when transporting loads.
Attaching the cargo net
EASY-PACK load-securing kit accessory parts : Bag containing the brackets and luggage holder ; Telescopic rod
X Pull the cargo net up by tab : and hook it into eyelets ; using both hands. Stowage areas 341
Inserting the brackets intothe loading X To install: insert two brackets A into the rail left or right loading rail (Y page 340). X Press release button : of the luggage holder and pull the strap out slightly. X Insert luggage holder ; into brackets A and, while doing so, press release button = and push the luggage holder downwards until it engages. X Press release button : of the luggage holder and pull the strap out in the direction of the arrow. X Place the load between the strap and the X Insert bracket : into the center of loading cargo compartmentside wall. rail ?. X Using one hand, press locking button : of the luggage holder. X Press release button ; and push bracket : into the desired position in X With your other hand, let the strap go slowly loading rail ?. until the load is secured. X Make sure that locking button ? on X Let go of release button ;. brackets A is pressed. Stowage and features X Press locking button =. This keeps brackets A in place on the Bracket : is locked in loading rail ?. loading rail. X If necessary, fold cargo tie-downring A X To remove: press release button = on upwards. respective bracket A and remove luggage holder ; by pulling upwards and out. Luggage holder ! Only use the luggage holder to secure Telescopic rod cargo with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs (7 kg) and with dimensions that the luggage holder can safely and securely contain.
The telescopic rod can be used to secure the load against the rear seats to prevent it from moving around. The luggage holder can be used to secure light loads against the side wall of the cargo compartment to prevent them from moving around.
Z 342 Stowage areas
X To install: insert one bracket ; into both X To open: holding the ribbing, press the left and the right loading rails and slide handle : downwards ;. it to the desired position(Ypage 340). Handle : folds up. X Insert telescopic rod : into brackets ; X Swing the cargo compartment floor and, while doing so, press release upwards using handle : until it rests button ? and push the rod downwards against the cargo compartment cover. until it engages. X Make sure that locking button = on brackets ; is pressed. This keeps brackets ; in place on the loading rail. X To remove: press release button ? on respective bracket ; and remove telescopic rod : by pulling it upwards and out.
X Fold out hook = on the underside of the Stowage well under the cargo cargo compartment floor in the direction of
Stowage and features compartment floor the arrow. G WARNING If you drive when the cargo compartment floor is open, objects could be flung around, thus striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey.
X Attach hook = to the cargo compartment's upper seal ?. X To close: detach hook = from the cargo compartment's upper seal ?. X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the underside of the cargo compartment floor. X Fold the trunk floor down. X Press the cargo compartment floor A removable insert under the cargo down ; until it engages. compartment floor contains the parts of the EASY-PACK load-securing kit. The tire- i To remove the cargo compartment floor, change tool kit is stored beneath this insert. undo the press studs below the cargo compartment floor. When you re-install the Features 343
cargo compartment floor, fasten it with the Attaching the roof carrier press studs.
Roof carrier Important safety notes G WARNING Whenyou load the roof, the center of gravity of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a doing so, observe the manufacturer's risk of an accident. installation instructions. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. Features ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use roof carriers that have been tested Cup holder Stowage and features and approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Important safety notes This helps to prevent damage to the vehicle. G WARNING Position the load on the roof carrier in such If objects in the passenger compartment are a way that the vehicle will not sustain stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be damage even when it is in motion. thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Depending on the vehicle equipment, There is a risk of injury, particularly in the ensure that when the roof carrier is event of sudden braking or a sudden change installed you can: in direction. Rraise the sliding sunroof fully RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel fully RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets Ropen the tailgate fully or stowage nets. The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg). RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles with a capacity of up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter).
Z 344 Features
The bottles are not secured or prevented from The temperature-controlled cup holder can tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open be used to keep cold drinkscool and warm drink containers in the stowage drinks warm. compartments. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. Cup holder in the front-compartment X To switch on the cooling function: press center console and hold button = until the blue indicator lamp on the button lights up. X To switch on the heating function: press and hold button = until the red indicator lamp on the button lights up. X To switch off the function: press and hold button = until the indicator lamp on the button goes out. When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain temperature is reached, residual heat : Cup holder indicator lamp ; lights up. This means that
Stowage and features ; Cover the metal insert of the cup holder is hot. For this reason, you must not reach into the cup X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost holder metal insert. position. Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it. go. You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat Cup holder in the rear seat armrest for cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only. ! Do not sit on or support your body weight on the rear seat armrest when it is folded Temperature-controlled cup holder in down, as you could otherwise damage it. the front-compartment center console
X Fold down the rear seat armrest. : Cup holder Cup holder : is located in the rear seat armrest. ; Residual heat indicator lamp = Switch Features 345
Sun visors X Fold down sun visor :. X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =. Overview X Swing sun visor : to the side. G WARNING X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required. If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be windshield. blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an accident. Always keep the mirror cover folded down Roller sunblinds on the rear side while driving. windows ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this would damage the automatic roller mechanism. ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller sunblind hooked in and the side windows opened simultaneously.The roller sunblind
can jump out of the retainers and spring Stowage and features back suddenly when driving at high speeds, e.g. when driving on the freeway. This could : Mirror light damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either ; Bracket close the side window or retract the roller sunblind before driving at high speeds. = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror A Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up.
Glare from the side X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the back of the window.
Z 346 Features
X Lift insert = up ; and out. X To re-install the insert: place insert = into the holder and press it down on the right until it engages. X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.
Rear-compartment ashtray ! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and before you fold the rear seats forward. You The roller sunblind can be hooked back into can otherwise damage the ashtray. place should it pop out from the top of the guide rail. X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated. X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide rail =. X Straighten up pull-out profile : again. Stowage and features Ashtray Front ashtray X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top. ! The holder under the ashtray is not heat The ashtray opens. resistant.Before placing lit cigarettes in the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is X To remove the insert: push into recess properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder = from the right. could be damaged. Ashtray insert : slides out slightly to the right. X Lift insert : up and out. X To re-install the insert: place insert : into the holder and press down on the right until it engages. Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment System have an ashtray in the center console in the rear compartment.
X To open: slide cover : to its foremost Cigarette lighter position. G WARNING X Fold cover = of the insert upwards. You can burn yourself if you touch the hot X To remove the insert: push insert = to heating element or the socket of the cigarette the left ?. lighter. Insert = slides out slightly to the right. Features 347
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: 12 Vsockets Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls General notes Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 157). There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. With the exception of the socket in the front Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is center console, all socketscan be used for out of reach of children. Never leave children accessories with a maximum currentdraw of unsupervised in the vehicle. 240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center console can be used for accessories with a ! The cigarette lighter in the center console maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A). in the front compartment is not intended Accessories include such items as lamps or for operating the tire inflation compressor. chargers for mobile phones. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may discharge. i An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-board voltage does not drop too low.If
the on-board voltage is too low, the power Stowage and features to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures thatthere is sufficient power to start the engine.
Socket in the front-compartment center Yourattention must always be focused on the console traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter when road and trafficconditions ! The socket is not suitable for operating permit. the tire inflation compressor. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). X To open: slide cover : to its foremost position. X Press in cigarette lighter ;. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is red-hot. X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go. X To open: slide cover : to its foremost position. X Lift up the cover of socket ;. X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.
Z 348 Features
Socket in the rear-compartment center RUse only connector cables that are dry and console free of damage. RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. RHave the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 Vpower socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.
G DANGER X Lift up the cover of socket :. If you reach into the power socket or plug Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment inappropriate devices into the power socket, System have two sockets in the center you could receive an electric shock. There is console in the rear compartment. a risk of fatal injury. Only connect appropriate devices to the Socket in the cargo compartment power socket. Stowage and features ! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V power socket should only be carried out by qualified specialist personnel.
General notes 115 V power socket provides an alternating voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, should not consume more than a X Lift up the cover of socket :. maximum of 150 watts altogether. Requirements for operation of these devices: Rthe electronic device that you connect has 115 Vsocket a suitable connector and conforms to Important safety notes standards specific to the country you are in. G DANGER Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged When a suitable device is connected, the correctly into 115 V power socket. 115Vpower socket will be carrying a high Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be voltage. You could receive an electric shock connected must not exceed 150 watts. if the connector cable or the 115 V power Rthe on-board power supply is within a socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged permissible voltage range. or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury. Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and the cargo compartment are operational. Features 349
Using the 115 Vpower socket
X To switch on: switch the ignitionon. X Openflap =. X Insert the plug of the electronic device into 115 V power socket :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X To turn off: disconnect the plug from 115 V power socket :. Stowage and features Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
Z 350 Features
Problems with the 115 Vpower socket
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The warning lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak. the 115Vpower socket X Start the engine. is not lit. or X Charge the battery (Y page 387). If the indicator lamp still does not light up: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high. X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket. X Let the DC/AC converter cool down. If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the converter: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Stowage and features You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high switch-on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 Vpower socket will not supply it with power. X Connect a suitable device.
mbrace Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID Important safety notes and password will be sent to you by post. USA ! You must have a license agreement to only: you can use this password to log onto activate the mbrace service. Make sure the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at that your system is activated and ready for http://www.mbusa.com. use. To register, press the ï MB Info call The mbrace system is available if: button. If any of the steps mentioned are Rit has been activated and is operational not carried out, the system may not be Rthe corresponding mobile phone network activated. is available for transmitting data to the If you have questions about the activation, Customer Center contact one of the following telephone Ra service subscription is available hotlines: Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at i Determining the location of the vehicle on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes a map is only possible if: (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RGPS reception is available. RCanada: Customer Service at Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to 1-888-923-8367 the Customer Assistance Center. Features 351
The mbrace system If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as To adjustthe volume during an mbrace call, expected. In the event of an emergency, help proceed as follows: will have to be summoned by other means. X Press the W or X button on the Have the system checked at the nearest multifunction steering wheel. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact or the following service hotlines: X Use the volume controller of the audio RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system/COMAND. Center at The mbrace system provides various 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) services, e.g.: or 1-866-990-9007 Rautomatic and manual emergency call RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call Emergency call USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under Important safety notes "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. ! You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure System self-test that your system is activated and ready for Stowage andres featu After you have switched on the ignition, the use. To register, press the ï MB Info call system carries out a self-diagnosis. button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be Amalfunction in the system has been activated. detected if one of the following occurs: If you have questions about the activation, RThe indicator lamp in the SOSbutton does contact one of the following telephone not come on during the system self-test. hotlines: RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance buttondoes not light up during Assistance Center at self-diagnosis of the system. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 button does not light up during self- RCanada: Customer Service at diagnosis of the system. 1-888-923-8367 RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red General notes after the system self-diagnosis: An emergency call is dialed automatically if - SOS button an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is - the F Roadside Assistance call triggered. button i You cannot end an automatically - the ï MB Info call button triggered emergency call yourself. RThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace An emergency call can also be initiated Service Not Activated message manually. appears in the multifunction display after As soon as the emergencycall has been the system self-diagnosis. initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOSbutton
Z 352 Features
flashes. The Connecting Call message Making an emergency call appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING The audio outputis muted. It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, Once the connection has been made, the even if you have pressed the SOS button in an Call Connected message appears in the emergency if: multifunction display. Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the All important information on the emergency vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an is transmitted, for example: accident RCurrent location of the vehicle (as Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of determined by the GPS system) road RVehicle identification number Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be RInformation on the severity of the accident seen by other road users, particularly when Shortly after the emergency call has been dark or in poor visibility conditions initiated, a voice connection is automatically There is a risk of an accident and injury. established between the Mercedes-Benz Leave the vehicle immediately in this or Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle similar situations as soon as it is safe to do occupants. so. Move to a safe location along with other RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure
Stowage and features Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance the vehicle in accordance with national Center attempts to get more information regulations, e.g. with a warning triangle. on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. The mbrace system has not been able to initiate an emergency call if no voice connection to the Response Center has been established.This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the X To initiate an emergency call multifunction display and must be confirmed. manually: press cover : briefly to open. In this case, seek assistance by other means. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomerAssistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :.
i If the mobile phone network is not available, mbrace is not able to make an emergency call. If you leave the vehicle Features 353
immediately after pressing the SOS button, Assistance center can ascertain the nature of you do not know if mbrace has successfully the problem (Y page 357). made the emergency call. In this situation, The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance seek additional assistance by other means. Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- Benz technician or arranges for your vehicle Roadside Assistance button to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. i The mbrace system failed to initiate a Roadside Assistance call if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- X Press Roadside Assistance button :. Benz Customer Assistance Center was This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz established.
Customer Assistance Center. The indicator This may be because the corresponding Stowage andres featu lamp in Roadside Assistance button : mobile phone network is not available. flashes while the call is active. The The Call Failed message appears in the Connecting Call message appears on multifunction display. the multifunction display. The audio output X To end acall: press the ~ button on the is muted. multifunctionsteering wheel. If a connection can be made, the Call or Connected message appears in the X Press the corresponding button for ending multifunction display. a phone call on the audio systemoron If a cellular phone network is available and COMAND. there is sufficientGPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz MB Info call button Customer Assistance Center, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle RVehicle identification number i The display of the audio system or COMAND shows that an mbrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. Avoice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Z 354 Features
X Press MB Info call button :. The Call Failed message appears in the This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz multifunction display. Customer Assistance Center. The indicator X To end acall: press the ~ button on the lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while multifunctionsteering wheel. the connection is being made. The or Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio system X Press the corresponding button for ending is muted. a phone call on the audio systemoron COMAND. If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the Call priority multifunction display. If a cellular phone network is available and When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz call can still be initiated. In this case, an Customer Assistance Center, for example: emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. RCurrent location of the vehicle The indicator lamp of the respective button RVehicle identification number flashes until the call is ended. An emergency i The display of the audio system or call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-
Stowage and features COMAND shows that an mbrace call is Benz Customer Assistance Center. active. During the call, you can change to All other calls can be ended by pressing: the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI Rthe ~ button on the multifunction button on COMAND, for example. steering wheel Voice output is not available. Rthe corresponding buttononthe audio Avoice connection is established between system or on COMAND for ending a the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance telephone call Center and the vehicle occupants. You can obtain information on how to operate your i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output vehicle's systems, on the location of the is muted. The mobile phone is no longer nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, connected to COMAND. However, if you and on further products and services offered would like to use your mobile phone, do so by Mercedes-Benz USA. only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. USA only: you can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Downloading destinations in COMAND i The mbrace system failed to initiate an Downloading destinations MB Info call if: Destination Download gives you access to a Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call data bank with over 15 million Points of button : is flashing continuously. Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- know the destination, the address can be Benz Customer Assistance Center was downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the established. location of Points of Interest (POIs)/ This may be because the corresponding importantdestinations in the vicinity. mobile phone network is not available. Features 355
Furthermore, you can download routes with mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation up to 20 way points. system. You are prompted to confirmroute guidance Specifying and sending the destination to the address entered. address The system calculates the route and X Go to the website http:// subsequently starts the route guidance with www.maps.google.com and enter a the address entered. destination address into the entry field. i If you select No, the address can be stored X To send the destination address to the in the address book. e-mail address of your mbrace i The Destination Download function is account: click on the corresponding available if the corresponding mobile button. phone network is available and data i Example: transfer is possible. If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address i You can only use the Destination will be sent to your vehicle. Download function if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: In the relevant field, enter the e-mail Route Assistance address which you specified when This service is part of the mbrace PLUS activating your mbrace account. Stowage andres featu Package and cannot be purchased X Click "Send". separately. i You can also use the Route Assistance i Information on specific commands such function if your vehicle is not equipped with as "Address entry" or "Sending" can be a navigation system. found on the website. Within the framework of this service, you Calling up destination addresses receive a professional and reliable form of X Switch on the ignition. navigation support without having to leave The destination address is loaded into the your vehicle. vehicle's navigation system. The customer service representative finds a Adisplay message appears, asking suitable route depending on your vehicle's whether navigation should be started. current position and the desired destination. X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turning You will then be guided live through the cVd the COMAND controller and press current route section. W to confirm. The system calculates the route and Search &Send subsequently starts the routeguidance General notes with the address entered. i To use "Search &Send", your vehicle i If you select No, the address can be stored must be equipped with mbrace and a in the address book. navigation system. You must also have an i mbrace service subscription. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual "Search & Send" is a destination entry destination must be confirmed separately. service. Adestination address which is found on Google Maps® can be transferred via i Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were
Z 356 Features
sent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz Vehicle remote closing vehicles with mbrace and active mbrace The remote closing feature can be used when accounts: you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you if multiple vehicles are registered under the are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be same e-mail address, the destination will locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer be sent to all the vehicles. Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely Vehicle remote opening locked within four days of the ignition being You can use the vehicle remote opening if you turned off. After this time, the remote closing have unintentionally locked your vehicle and may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After a replacement SmartKey is not available. The 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz remotely. Customer Assistance Center. X Contact the following service hotlines: The vehicle can be immediately opened RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer remotely within four daysofthe ignition being Assistance Center at turned off. After this time, the remote opening 1-800-FOR-MERCedes may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened RCanada: Customer Service at remotely.
Stowage and features 1-888-923-8367 X Contact the following service hotlines: You will be asked for your PIN. RUSA: Mercedes-BenzCustomer The next time you are inside the vehicle and Assistance Centerat you switch on the ignition, the Doors 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Locked Remotely message appears in the (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 multifunction display. RCanada: Customer Service at USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be 1-888-923-8367 locked via: You will be asked for yourpassword. Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed section upon with the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®, Blackberry) USAonly:alternatively, the vehicle can be To do this, you will need your identification opened via: number and password. Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section i The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone Rthe telephone application (e.g.iPhone®, network is available and data connection is Blackberry) possible. To do this, you will need your identification number and password. i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible. Features 357
Stolen vehicle recovery service X Press Yes to confirm the message. If your vehicle has been stolen: X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please switch on ignition. message appears: X Notify the police. turn the key to position 2 in the ignition The police will issue a numbered incident lock. report. X If the Please follow the X This number will be forwarded to the instructions received by phone and Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance move your vehicle to a safe Center together with your PIN. position. message appears: follow the The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance instructions of the customer service Center then attempts to locate the mbrace representative. system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer The message in the display disappears. Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote is located. However, only the law malfunction diagnosis is canceled enforcement agency is informed of the completely. location of the vehicle. The vehicle operating state check begins. Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated activated message appears. for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- When the check is finished, the Sending Benz Customer Assistance center is Stowage and features vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice automatically informed. connection may be interrupted during data transfer.) message Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to With the vehicle remote malfunction the Customer Assistance center. diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the X Press OK to confirm the message. Customer Assistance center can provide The voice connection with the Customer improved support for problems with your Assistance center is terminated. vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data The Vehicle Diagnosis: is transferred to the Customer Assistance Transferring data... appears. center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind The vehicle data is sent to the Customer of assistance is required. You are then, for Assistance center. example, guided to the nearest Mercedes- Depending on what the customer service Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle is representative agreed with you, the voice called. connection is re-established after the transfer If vehicle data needs to be transferred during is complete. If necessary, you will be an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, contacted at a later time by another means, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance e.g. by E-Mail or telephone. center. You will see the Roadside Further functions of the vehicle remote Assistance Connected message in the malfunction diagnosis include, for example: COMAND display.Ifthe vehicle remote Rtransfer of service data to the Customer malfunction diagnosis is able to be started, Assistance center. If aservice is overdue, the Request for vehicle diagnosis the COMAND display shows a message received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the display.
Z 358 Features
about various special offers at your Speed alert workshop. You can define the upper speed limit, which Rmonthly status informationE-Mail on oil must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this level, airpressure, maintenance, brakes, selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a etc. If applicable, you will receive message will be sent to the Customer information on special offers in the E-Mail. Assistance center. The Customer Assistance USA only: this information can also be center then forwards this information to you. called up under "Owners Online" at http:// You can select the way in which you receive www.mbusa.com. this information beforehand. Possible options Information on the data stored in the vehicle include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call. (Y page 28). The data which is sent to the Customer Information on roadside assistance Assistance center contains the following (Y page 25). information: Rthe location where the speed limit was Downloading routes exceeded Downloading routes allows you to transfer Rthe time at which the speed limit was and save predefined routes in the navigation exceeded system. To do this, an SD memory card must Rthe selected speed limit which was
Stowage and features be inserted into the COMAND system. If no exceeded SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND Geo fencing system before saving. Geo fencing allows you to select areas which Aroute can be prepared and sent either by a the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will customer service representative or via the be informed if the vehicle crosses the mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can boundaries of the selected areas. You can include up to 20 way points. When a route has select the way in which you receive this been received by the navigation system, the information beforehand. Possible options 'Route name' has been saved to include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call. memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? message appears on the The area can be determined as either a circle COMAND display.The route is saved to the or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. SD memory card. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously.Differentsettings are X To start route guidance: select Yes. possible for each area. An overview of the route is shown in the USA only: these settings can be called up display. under "Owners Online" at http:// i If you select No, the saved route can be www.mbusa.com. called up later in the navigation menu. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call X Select Start. and inform the customer service Route guidance is started. representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. i Downloaded and saved data can be called up again in COMAND. Currently inactive areas can be activated by SMS. You can find further information in the separate COMAND operating instructions. Features 359
Triggering the vehicle alarm door opener. If you have difficulty programming the integrated garage door With this function, you can triggerthe opener, contact an authorized Mercedes- vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm Benz Center. sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm Alternatively, you can call the following lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the telephone assistance services: alarm switches off. RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Garage door opener RCanada: Customer Service at Important safety notes 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 G WARNING (free of charge) When you operate or program the garage door More information on HomeLink® and/or with the integrated garage door opener, compatible products is also available persons in the range of movement of the online at http://www.homelink.com. garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is arisk of injury. i Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 27). When using the integrated garage door Stowage and features opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage Programming door. Programming buttons G WARNING Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 359). Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbonmonoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.
The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Only operate garage doors using the Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view integrated garage door opener if: mirror Rthey are equipped with a safety stop and Garage door remote control A is not part of reverse feature, and the integrated garage door opener. Rthey conform to the current U.S. safety X The first time before programming, clear standards. the integrated garage door opener memory When programming a garage door opener, (Y page 361). park vehicle outside the garage. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the i Certain garage door drives are ignition lock. incompatible with the integrated garage
Z 360 Features
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on Synchronizing the rolling code the integrated garage door opener. Observe the "Important safety notes" After a short time, indicator lamp : lights (Y page 359). up yellow. Your vehicle must be within reach of the i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure as button ;, = or ? is programmed for that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ the first time. If the selected button has objects are present within the sweep of the already been programmed, indicator door or gate. lamp : will only light up yellow after ten X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the seconds have elapsed. ignition lock. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator X Press the program button of the door or lamp : flashes yellow. gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under X Point garage door remote control A "programming of additional remote towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view controls"). mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to i Usually, you now have 30seconds to 20 cm). initiate the next step. i The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door X Press previously programmed button ;, Stowage and features opener depends on the garage door drive = or ? of the integrated garage door system. Several attempts might be opener until the door closes. necessary. You should test every position The rolling code synchronization is then for at least 25 seconds before trying complete. another position. Notes on programming the remote X Press and hold button B on remotecontrol control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. Canadianradio frequency laws require a If indicator lamp : lights up green or "break" (or interruption) of the transmission flashes, then programming has been signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. successful. Therefore, these signals may notlast long X Release button B on remote control A for enough for the integrated garage door the garage door drive system. opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat law, some U.S.garage door openers also the programming procedure for the feature a "break". corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance Proceed as follows: between remote control A and the rear- Rif you live in Canada view mirror. Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where i If the indicator lamp flashes green after you live) when using the programming successful programming, the garage door steps system is using a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronize the garage door opener integrated in the rear- view mirror with the receiver of the garage door system. Features 361
X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on same programming steps with this remote the integrated garage door opener. control. Before performing these steps, After a short time, indicator lamp : lights make sure that new batteries have been up yellow. installed in garage door drive remote control A. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the X Press button B of garage door remote indicator lamp on the remote control goes control A for two seconds, then release it out). Press button B on remote control for two seconds. A again before transmission ends. X Press button B again for two seconds. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door X Repeat this sequence on button B of opener unit. This can improve signal remote control A until indicator lamp : reception/transmission. lights up green. If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the Opening/closing the garage door process. After it has been programmed, the integrated X Continue with the other programming garage door opener performs the function of steps (see above). the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions Problems when programming Stowage and features for the garage door system. If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of ignition lock. the following instructions: X Press button ;, = or ? which you have RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage programmed to operate the garage door. door drive remote control A.This can Garage door system with a fixed code: usually be found on the back of the remote indicator lamp : lights up green. control. Garage door system with a rolling code: The integrated garage door opener is indicator lamp : flashes green. compatible with devices that have units i The transmitter will transmit a signal as which operate in the frequency range of long as the button is pressed. The 280to 433MHz. transmission is halted after a maximum of RReplace the batteries in garage door ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights remote control A.This increases the up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again likelihood that garage door remote control if necessary. A will transmit a strongand precise signal to the integrated garage door openerinthe Clearing the memory rear-view mirror. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the RWhen programming, hold remote control ignition lock. A at varying distances and angles from the X Press buttons ; and ?. button that you are programming. Try The indicator lamp lights up yellow. various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the but at varying distances. indicator lamp turns green. RIf another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the
Z 362 Features
i Make sure that you clear the memory of X To remove: pull the floormat from the integrated garage door opener before retainers ;. selling the vehicle. X Remove the floormat.
Compass Infrared reflective windshield Calling up the compass Information on operating the compass can be found in the separate COMAND Operating Instructions.
Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct adepressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle The infrared reflecting glass prevents the is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. vehicle interior frombecoming too hot. It also Stowage and features Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter range. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats To enable operation of radio-controlled securely and as specified in order to ensure equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas sufficientclearance for the pedals. Do not use on the windshield are permeable to radio loose floormats. waves :.Inthese areas, you can install radio-controlled systems. These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windshield.
Floormat on the driver's side (example) X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back. X Rear seats: slide the respective seat forwards. X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;. 363
Useful information ...... 364 Engine compartment ...... 364 Maintenance ...... 368 Care ...... 369 Maintenance and care 364 Engine compartment
Useful information G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is i This Operator's Manual describes all overheated or when there is a fire in the models and all standard and optional engine compartmentcould expose you to hot equipment of your vehicle available at the gases or other service products. There is a time of publication of the Operator's risk of injury. Manual. Country-specific differences are Let an overheated engine cool down before possible. Please note that your vehicle may opening the hood. If there is a fire in the not be equipped with all features engine compartment, keep the hood closed described. This also applies to safety- and contact the fire department. related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified G WARNING specialist workshops: (Y page 27). The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start Engine compartment again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. Hood If you need to do any work inside the engine Important safety notes compartment, Rswitch off the ignition G WARNING Rnever reach into the area where there is a If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when Maintenance and care risk of danger from moving components, the vehicle is in motion and block your view. such as the fan rotation area There is a risk of an accident. Rkeep clothing away from moving parts Never unlatch the hood while driving. WARNING G WARNING G The ignition system and the fuel injection When opening and closing the hood, it may system work under high voltage. If you touch suddenly fall into the closed position.There is components which are under voltage, you a risk of injury to persons within range of could get an electric shock. There is a risk of movement of the hood. injury. Open and close the hood only when no one is Never touch components of the ignition within its range of movement. system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator Opening the hood and parts of the exhaust system, can become G WARNING very hot. Working in the engine compartment When the hood is open and the windshield poses a risk of injury. wipers are set in motion,you can be injured Where possible, let the engine cool down and by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. touch only the components described in the Always switch off the windshield wipers and following. the ignition before opening the hood. Engine compartment 365
! Make sure that the windshieldwipers are Radiator not folded away fromthe windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield Vehicles with adiesel engine: do not cover wipers or the hood. the radiator, for example with a winter front or bug cover. The readingsofthe on-board- diagnostic system may otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times.
Engine oil General notes Depending on the driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qts (0.8 l) of oil over X Make sure that the windshield wipers are a distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil turned off. consumption may be higher than this when X Pull release lever : on the hood. the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at The hood is released. high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location.
When checking the oil level: Maintenance and care Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait about 30 minutes X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch before carrying out the measurement. handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood approximately 15 inches (40cm) the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled struts.
Closing the hood
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.
Z 366 Engine compartment
Checking the oil level using the oil and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the dipstick components before starting the engine.
H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Example:vehicles with a gasoline engine Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system R
Maintenance and care replacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacementspecified by the service system has been exceeded Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Rusing engine oil additives. X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much tube. engine oil can result in damage to the X Wipe off oil dipstick :. engine or to the catalytic converter. Have X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide excess engine oil siphoned off. tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.
Adding engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down Engine compartment 367
Example: engine oil cap X Park the vehicle on a level surface. X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove Only checkthe coolant level when the it. vehicle is on a level surface and the engine X Add engine oil. has cooled down. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ignition lock (Y page 157). of engine oil. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn Start/Stop button twice (Y page 158). clockwise. X Check the coolant temperature gauge in Ensure that the cap locks into place the multifunction display. securely. The coolant temperature must be below
X Check the oil level againwith the oil 158 ‡ (70 †). Maintenance and care dipstick (Y page 366). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock. Further information on engine oil (Y page 449). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter- clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. Additional service products X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. Checking coolant level If the coolant is at the level of marker bar G WARNING = in the filler neck when cold, there is The engine cooling system is pressurized, enough coolant in coolant expansion particularly when the engine is warm. When tank ;. opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in coolantspraying out. There is a risk of injury. (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel Let the engine cool down before opening the filler neck when warm, there is enough cap. Wear eye and hand protection when coolant in expansion tank ;. opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a X If necessary, add coolant that has been turn to allow pressure to escape. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 451).
Z 368 Maintenance
Adding washer fluid to the windshield Maintenance washer system/headlamp cleaning system ASSYST PLUS G WARNING Service message Windshield washer concentrate is highly The ASSYST PLUS service interval display flammable. If it comes into contact with hot informs you of the nextservice due date. engine components or the exhaust system it Information on the type of service and service could ignite. There is a riskoffire and injury. intervals (see the separate Maintenance Make sure that no windshield washer Booklet). concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display does not show any informationonthe engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 365). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RNext Service A in .. Days RService A Due Maintenance and care Example: washer fluid reservoir RService A Exceeded by ... Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Example: washer fluid reservoir in AMG vehicles does not take into accountany periods of X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. time during which the battery is disconnected. X Add the premixed washer fluid. Maintaining the time-dependent service X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck schedule: until it engages. X Note down the service due date displayed The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the in the multifunctiondisplay before windshield washer system and the headlamp disconnecting the battery. cleaning system. or Further information on windshield washer X After reconnecting the battery, subtract fluid/antifreeze (Y page 452). the battery disconnection periods fromthe service date shown on the display. Care 369
Hiding aservice message Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces X Press the % or a button on the steering wheel. Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for Displaying service messages example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter X Switch on the ignition. replaced or changed more frequently. Under X Press the = or ; button on the arduous operating conditions, the tires must steering wheel to selectthe Serv. menu. be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist X Press the 9 or : button to select the workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by Center. pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the Driving abroad multifunction display. An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can Information about Service obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval Care display has been inadvertently reset, this General notes setting can be corrected at a qualified Maintenance and care specialist workshop. H Environmental note Have service work carried out as described Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning in the Maintenance Booklet. This may cloths in an environmentally responsible otherwise lead to increased wear and manner. damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any Aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. an of the following: authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter, will reset Rdry, rough or hard cloths the ASSYST PLUS service interval display Rabrasive cleaning agents after the service work has been carried out. Rsolvents You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Special service requirements Do not touch the surfaces or protective The specified maintenance interval takes only films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice the normal operation of the vehicle into scraper. You could otherwise scratch or account. Under arduous operating conditions damage the surfaces and protective film. or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended frequently, for example: period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel Rregular city driving with frequent cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause intermediate stops increased corrosion of the brake discs and Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel brake pads/linings. For this reason, you short distances
Z 370 Care
should drive for a few minutes after is in transmission position N, otherwise the cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and vehicle could be damaged. the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. RVehicles with a SmartKey: The vehicle can then be parked. Do not remove the SmartKey from the Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for ignition lock. Do not open the driver's retaining the quality in the long term. door or front-passenger door when the Use care products and cleaning agents engine is switched off.Otherwise, the recommended and approved by Mercedes- automatic transmission selects park Benz. position P automatically and locks the wheels.You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N Washing the vehicle and cleaning the beforehand. paintwork RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Automatic car wash Do not open the driver's door or front- passenger door when the engine is G WARNING switched off. Otherwise, the automatic Braking efficiency is reduced after washing transmission selects park position P the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. automatically and locks the wheels. After the vehicle has been washed, brake Observe the following to make sure that the carefully while paying attention to the traffic automatic transmission stays in position N: conditions until full braking power is restored. X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the Maintenance and care ignition is switched off. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function X Turn the SmartKey to position is activated, the vehicle brakes 2 (Y page 157) in the ignition lock. automatically in certain situations. To Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/ prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similarsituations: X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen towing the vehicle position N. Rin the car wash X Release the brake pedal. ! Neverclean your vehicle in a Touchless X Release the electric parking brake. Automatic Car Wash as these use special X Switch off the ignition and leave the cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can SmartKey in the ignition lock. damage the paintwork or plastic parts. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car ! Make sure that: wash from the very start. Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before are fully closed. cleaning it in an automatic car wash. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off After using an automatic car wash, wipe off (the OFF button has been pressed). wax from the windshield and the wiper Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position blades. This will prevent smears and reduce 0. wiping noises caused by residue on the Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. windshield. ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission Care 371
Washing by hand Do not aim directly at any of the following: In some countries, washing by hand is only Rtires allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Observe the legal requirements in all Relectrical components countries concerned. Rbattery X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rconnectors vehicle in direct sunlight. Rlights X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rseals X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Rtrim shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rventilation slots X Thoroughly hose downthe vehicle with a gentle jet of water. Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlets. Cleaning the paintwork X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. ! Do not affix: X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry Rstickers thoroughly with a chamois. Rfilms X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the Rmagnetic plates or similar items paintwork. to painted surfaces. You could otherwise When using the vehicle in winter, remove all damage the paintwork. Maintenance and care traces of road salt deposits carefully and as Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected soon as possible. by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely Powerwashers repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified G WARNING specialist workshop. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, blasters) can cause invisibleexterior damage while avoiding rubbing too hard. to the tires or chassis components. X Soak insect remains with insect remover Components damaged in this way may fail and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. unexpectedly.There is a risk of an accident. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse Do not use power washers with circular jet off the treated areas afterwards. nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, tires or chassis components replaced oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently immediately. with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. ! Always maintain a distance of at least X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about X Use silicone remover to remove wax. the correct distance is available from the If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint equipment manufacturer. surface, use the paint care products Move the power washer nozzle around recommended and approved by Mercedes- when cleaning your vehicle. Benz.This is the case approximately every
Z 372 Care
three to five months, depending on the i Use only insect remover and car shampoo climate conditions and the care product used. from the range of recommended and If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if approved Mercedes-Benz care products. the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes- Benz should be used. Cleaning the vehicle parts Do not use these care products in the sunor Cleaning the wheels on the hood while the hood is hot. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to to remove brake dust. This could damage the paintwork quickly and provisionally. wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended Matte finish care period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause wheels. Polishing causes the finish to increased corrosion of the brake discs and shine. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you ! The following may cause the paint to should drive for a few minutes after become shiny and thus reduce the matte cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and effect: the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable
Maintenance and care materials. Cleaning the windows RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or wipers if they start moving while cleaning the polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of wax. These products are only suitable for injury. high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable Always switch off the windshield wipers and surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. solvents or cleaning agents containing ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax solvents to clean the inside of the windows. treatment under any circumstances. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or Observe these notes if your vehicle has a ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid the windows. damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the These notes also apply to light alloy wheels windshield and the rear window at regular with a clear matte finish. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain i The vehicle should preferably be washed circumstances prevent water from draining by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Care 373
away. This can lead to corrosiondamage Mirror turn signals and damage to electronic components. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning X Clean the inside and outside of the cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning product that is recommended and cloths could scratch or damage the plastic approved by Mercedes-Benz. lenses of the mirror turnsignals. X Clean the plasticlenses of the mirror turn Cleaning wiper blades signals in the exterior mirror housing using G WARNING a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benzcar shampoo or cleaning You could become trapped by the windshield cloths. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.There is a risk of injury. Cleaning the sensors Always switch off the windshield wipers and ! If you clean the sensorswith a power the ignition before cleaning the windshield or washer, make sure that you keep a wiper blades. distance of at least 11.8in(30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, Information about the correct distance is the wiper blade could be damaged. available from the equipment ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and manufacturer.
do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the Maintenance and care graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning X Clean sensors : of the driving systems cloths which are suitable for plastic light with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage Cleaning the rear view camera the plastic light lenses. ! X Cleanthe plastic lenses of the exterior Do not cleanthe camera lens and the area lighting using a wet sponge and a mild around the rear view camera with a power cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benzcar washer. shampoo or cleaning cloths.
Z 374 Care
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean The ball coupling must be cleaned if it camera lens :. becomes dirty or corroded. X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, Cleaning the exhaust pipe e.g. with a wire brush. ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or based cleaning agents such as sanitary a brush. cleansers or wheel cleaners. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. Impurities combined with the effects of road grit and corrosive environmental factors may X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is cause flash rust to form on the surface. You working properly. Maintenance and care can restore the original shine of the exhaust i You can also have the maintenance work pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch winter and after washing. carried out by a qualified specialist X Cleanthe exhaust pipe with a chrome care workshop. product tested and approved by Mercedes- Benz. Interior care Cleaning the trailer tow hitch Cleaning the display H Environmental note ! For cleaning, do not use any of the Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an following: environmentally responsible manner. Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a Rabrasive cleaning agents power washer. Do not use solvents. Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents ! Observe the note on care provided by the trailer manufacturer. These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. Care 375
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that it is switched off and hascooled down. X Clean the display surface using a commercially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD display cleaner. X Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber cloth.
Cleaning Night View Assist Plus G WARNING X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in Always remember that your primary front of camera ;. responsibility is to drive the vehicle. The driver must always concentrate on the road. For your safety and the safety of others, stop the Cleaning the plastic trim vehicle before trying to clean fogged-up G WARNING windows or to clean the window in front of the Night View Assist Plus camera. Care products and cleaning agents containing solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph become porous. As a result, plastic parts may (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers come loose in the event of air bag a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) per deployment. There is a risk of injury. second. Do not use any care products and cleaning Maintenance and care ! Never clean the camera lens. When agents to clean the cockpit. cleaning the field of vision of the driving systems, make sure that you do not spray ! Do not affix the following to plastic glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the surfaces: camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified Rstickers specialist workshop. Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You can otherwise damage the plastic. ! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of the surfaces. X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. Mercedes-Benz. The surface may change color temporarily. Wait until the surface is dry again.
Z 376 Care
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or Genuine leather seat covers selector lever ! To retain the natural appearance of the X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use leather, observe the followingcleaning leather care agents that have been instructions: recommended and approved by Mercedes- RClean genuine leathercovers carefully Benz. with a damp cloth and then wipe the covers down with a dry cloth. Cleaning genuine wood and trim RMake sure that the leather does not elements become soaked. It may otherwise become rough and cracked. ! Do notuse solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, ROnly use leather care agents that have polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk been tested and approved by Mercedes- of damaging the surface. Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified specialist workshop. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. Leather is a natural product. The trim pieces have a chrome look but are mostly made of anodized aluminum and It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for can lose their shine if chrome polish is example: used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead RDifferences in the texture when cleaning the trim pieces. RSigns of stretching and marking If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very RSlight nuances of color
Maintenance and care dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you These are characteristics of leather and not are unsure as to whether the trim pieces material defects. are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Seat covers of other materials ! X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with Observe the following when cleaning: a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth cloth. moistened with a solution containing X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning 1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). products recommended and approved by RClean cloth covers with a microfiber Mercedes-Benz. cloth moistened with a solution containing 1% detergent (e.g. dish Cleaning the seat covers washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving General notes visible lines. Leave the seat to dry ! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean afterwards. Cleaning results depend on genuine leather, artificial leather or the type of dirt and how long it has been Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can there. damage the cover. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth. Make sure that you wipe entire i Note that regularcare is essential to seat sections to avoid leaving visible ensure that the appearance and comfort of lines. the covers is retained overtime. Care 377
Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This posesanincreased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seatbelts.
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents.Do not dry the seat belts by warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) or placing them in direct sunlight. X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the roof lining and carpets
X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile
cleaning agents recommended and Maintenance and care approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Z 378 379
Useful information ...... 380 Where will I find...? ...... 380 Flat tire ...... 381 Battery(vehicle) ...... 385 Jump-starting ...... 389 Towing and tow-starting ...... 391 Fuses ...... 394 Breakdown assistance 380 Where will I find...?
Useful information changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which i This Operator's Manual describes all tools are required to perform a wheel models and all standard and optional change on your vehicle, consult a qualified equipment of your vehicle available at the specialist workshop. time of publication of the Operator's Tools required for changing awheel may Manual. Country-specific differences are include, for example: possible. Please note that your vehicle may RJack not be equipped with all features RWheel chock described. This also applies to safety- related systems and functions. RLug wrench RRatchet wrench i Read the information on qualified RAlignment bolt specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Vehicles with aTIREFIT kit Where will I find...? First-aid kit Breakdown assistance
Vehicle tool kit (example) : Lug wrench ; Jack X Open the tailgate. = Alignmentbolt X Remove first-aid kit : from the parcel net. ? Tire inflation compressor i Check the expiration date on the first-aid A Tire sealant filler bottle kit at least once a year. Replace the B Folding wheel chock contents if necessary, and replace missing items. C Towing eye D Ratchet wrench
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 383). Vehicle tool kit General notes The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. i Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit.Some tools for Flat tire 381
Vehicles with a"Minispare" emergency X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and spare wheel level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 179). X If possible, bring the frontwheels into the straight-ahead position. X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: make sure that highway level is selected (Y page 209). X Switch off the engine. Example:vehicles with AIRMATIC and trailer tow X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove hitch the SmartKey from the ignition lock. : Folding wheel chock X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the ; Lug wrench driver's door. = Alignment bolt The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the key having been ? Ball coupling of the trailer tow hitch removed. A Towing eye X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the B Jack Start/Stop button from the ignition lock C Ratchet wrench (Y page 158). X Lift the cargo compartment floor up X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.
(Y page 342). Make sure that they are not endangered as Breakdown assistance they do so. X Remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel (Y page 437). X Make sure that no one is near the danger area while a wheel is being changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting in the Flat tire wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. Preparing the vehicle X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to Your vehicle may be equipped with: traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat X properties) (Y page 382) Unload heavy luggage. Vehicle preparation is not necessary on i Only operate the tire inflation compressor vehicles with MOExtended tires. using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 380) turned off (Y page 347). Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- countries) (Y page 436) board voltage does not drop too low. If the Information on changing/mounting a wheel on-board voltage is too low, the power to (Y page 421). the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures that there is sufficient power to start the engine. 382 Flat tire
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat You must not exceed a maximum speed of properties) 50 mph (80 km/h). General notes i When replacing one or all tires, make sure that you use only tires: With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat Rof the size specified for the vehicle and characteristics), you can continue to drive yourvehicle even if there is a total loss of Rmarked "MOExtended" pressure in one or more tires. The affected If a tire has gone flat and cannot be tire must not show any clearly visible damage. replaced with a MOExtended tire, a You can recognize MOExtended tires by the standard tire may be used as a temporary MOExtended marking which appears on the measure. Make sure that you use the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking proper size and type (summer or winter nextto the tire size designation, the load- tire). bearing capacity and the speed index i Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not (Y page 415). equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. MOExtended tires may only be used in It is therefore recommended that you conjunction with an active tire pressure loss additionally equip your vehicle with a warning system or with an active tire pressure TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not monitor. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. If the pressure loss warning message A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a appears in the multifunction display: qualified specialist workshop. RObserve the instructions in the display Important safety notes messages (Y page 310). RCheck the tire for damage. Breakdown assistance G WARNING RIf driving on, observe the following notes. When driving in emergency mode, the driving The maximum driving distance is characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the cornering, accelerating quickly and when vehicle is partially laden and approximately braking. There is a risk of an accident. 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. laden. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, In addition to the vehicle load, the driving and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, distance possible depends upon: off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Rspeed Stop driving in emergency mode if: Rroad condition Routside temperature Ryou hear banging noises. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode Rthe vehicle starts to shake. may be reduced by extreme driving Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased RESP® is intervening constantly. through a moderate style of driving. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. The maximum permissible distance which After driving in emergency mode, have the can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist the moment the tire pressure loss warning workshop with regard to their further use. The appears in the multifunction display. defective tire must be replaced in every case. Flat tire 383
TIREFITkit X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out of the housing. Using the TIREFIT kit X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire TIREFIT is a tire sealant. sealant bottle :. TIREFIT can be used to seal small punctures X Place tire sealant bottle : head of up to 0.16 inches (4 mm), particularly on downwards into recess ; of the tire the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside inflation compressor. temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).
X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty TIREFIT sticker, 2-part tire. X Do not remove any foreign objects which X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails. X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket in X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the your vehicle. Breakdown assistance accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire Observe the notes on sockets inflation compressor from the stowage well (Y page 347). underneath the cargo compartment floor X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the (Y page 380). ignition lock (Y page 157). X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within X Press on/off switch = on the tire inflation the driver's field of vision. compressor to I. X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the The tire inflation compressor is switched valve on the wheel with the defective tire. on. The tire is inflated. i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compressor during this phase. X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run for five minutes. The tire should then have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi). If atire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has beenattained after five minutes: (Y page 384).
Z 384 Flat tire
If atire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) ! Residue fromthe tire sealant may come has not beenattained after five minutes: out of the filler hose after use. This could (Y page 384). cause stains. i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry.It Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic can then be removed like a layeroffilm. bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, H Environmental note have themcleaned with perchloroethylene Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of at a dry cleaner as soon as possible. professionally, e.g. at aqualified specialist workshop. Tire pressure not reached If a tire pressure of 180kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) If apressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has has been attained after five minutes: not beenachieved afterfive minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of X Unscrew the filler hose fromthe valve of the faulty tire. the faulty tire. X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse inflation compressor. approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Pull away immediately. X Pump up the tire again. The maximum speed for a tire sealed with After a maximum of five minutes the tire tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed 26 psi). to the instrument cluster in the driver's G WARNING field of vision. Breakdown assistance If the required tire pressure is not reached X Stop after driving for approximately ten after the specified time, the tire is too badly minutes and check the tire pressure with damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the the tire inflation compressor. tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire The tire pressure must now be at least pressure that is too low can significantly 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). impair the vehicle's braking and driving G WARNING characteristics. There is a risk of accident. If the required tire pressure is not reached Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified after driving for a short period, the tire is too specialist workshop. badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a Tire pressure reached tire pressure that is too low can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving G WARNING characteristics. There is a risk of accident. Atire temporarily sealed with tire sealant Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified impairs the driving characteristics and is not specialist workshop. suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least You should therefore adapt your driving style 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values, accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed see the Tire and Loading Information the specified maximum speed with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. Battery (vehicle) 385
placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side can disrupt driving safety systems such as or tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap). ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® X To increase the tire pressure: switch on (Electronic Stability Program). the tire inflation compressor. RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock during braking. This limits the steerability of the vehicle when braking and the braking distance may increase. There is a risk of accident. RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be stabilized if it starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
E Pressure release button G WARNING F Pressure gauge Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation X To reduce the tire pressure: press of sparks, which could ignite the highly pressure release button E on the filler explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of hose. an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire body to remove any existing electrostatic inflation compressor. build-up. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist
workshop and have the tire changed there. The highly flammable gas mixture forms when Breakdown assistance X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as charging the battery as well as when jump- soon as possible at a qualified specialist starting. workshop. Always make sure that neither you nor the X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every battery is electrostatically charged. There is four years at a qualified specialist a build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.: workshop. Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic fibers Rdue to friction between clothing and seats Battery(vehicle) Rif you push or pull the battery across the Important safety notes carpet or other synthetic materials Special tools and expert knowledge are Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth. required when working on the battery, e.g. G WARNING removal and installing. You should therefore During the charging process, a battery have all work involving the battery carried out produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit at a qualified specialist workshop. occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen G WARNING gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit and damage your vehicle's electronic system. This
Z 386 Battery (vehicle)
RMake sure that the positive terminal of a Observe the service intervals in the connected battery does not come into Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified contact with vehicle parts. specialist workshop for more information. RNever place metal objects or tools on a ! You should have all work involving the battery. battery carried out at aqualified specialist RIt is important that you observe the workshop. In the exceptional case that it is described order of the battery terminals necessary for you to disconnect the battery when connecting and disconnecting a yourself, make sure that: battery. Ryou switch off the engine and remove the RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS- battery poles with identical polarity are GO, ensure that the ignition is switched connected. off.Check that all the indicator lamps in RIt is particularly important to observe the the instrumentcluster are off.Otherwise, described order when connecting and electroniccomponents, such as the disconnecting the jumper cables. alternator, may be damaged. RNever connect or disconnect the battery Ryou first remove the negative terminal terminals while the engine is running. clamp and then the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. G WARNING Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. system may be damaged. R Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. the transmission is locked in position P Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean after disconnecting the battery. The over the battery. Keep children away from vehicle is secured against rolling away. batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with You can then no longer move the vehicle. Breakdown assistance water and seek medical attention. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be installed securely H Environmental note during operation. Batteries contain dangerous Comply with safety precautions and take substances. It is against the protective measures when handling law to dispose of them with batteries. the household rubbish. They WARNING must be collected separately and recycled to protect the environment. Fire, open flames and smoking are Dispose of batteries in an prohibited when handling the environmentally friendly battery. Avoid creating sparks. manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified Battery acid is caustic. Avoid specialist workshop or a contact with the skin, eyes or special collection point for clothing. used batteries. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and ! Have the battery checked regularly at a a face mask. qualified specialist workshop. Battery (vehicle) 387
Immediately rinse acid splashes Charging the battery off with clean water. Consulta doctor if necessary. G WARNING Wear eye protection. During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating Keep children away. sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. Observe this Operator's Manual. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean recommends that you only use batteries over the battery. Keep children away from which have been tested and approved for batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.These water and seek medical attention. batteries provide increased impact protection to prevent vehicle occupants from G WARNING suffering acid burns should the battery be damaged in the event of an accident. Adischarged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point.When In order for the battery to achieve the jump-starting the vehicle or charging the maximum possible service life, it must always battery, gases can escape from the battery. be sufficiently charged.
There is a risk of an explosion. Breakdown assistance The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before discharge over time if you do not use the charging it or jump-starting. vehicle. In this case, have the battery disconnected at a qualified specialist ! Only use battery chargers with a workshop. You can also charge the battery maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. with a charger recommended by Mercedes- Benz.Contact a qualified specialist workshop ! Only charge the battery using the jump- for further information. starting connection point. Have the battery charge level checked more Never charge a battery still installed in the frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for vehicle unless a battery charger unit short trips or if you leave it standing idle for approved by Mercedes-Benzis being used. A a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist battery charger unit specially adapted for workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and parked for a long period of time. approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the i Remove the SmartKey if you park the battery in its installed position. Contact an vehicle and do not require any electrical authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further consumers. The vehicle will then use very information and availability. Charge the little energy, thus conserving battery battery in accordance with the separate power. instructions for the battery charger. The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 389).
Z 388 Battery (vehicle)
Read the battery charger'soperating instructions before chargingthe battery. X Open the hood (Y page 364). X Connect the battery charger to the positive terminal and ground point in the same order as when connecting the donor battery in the jump-starting procedure (Y page 389). Breakdown assistance Jump-starting 389
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.
G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. Breakdown assistance RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNING Adischarged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point.When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
G WARNING Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
Z 390 Jump-starting
Do not start the vehicleusing a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or ajump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficientcross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it (Y page 157). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 158). All indicator lamps
Breakdown assistance in the instrument cluster must be off. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the hood (Y page 364).
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. Towing and tow-starting 391
X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always beginwith positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donorvehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connectnegative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the enginerun for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checkedataqualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting There is a risk of an accident. Important safety notes When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the
G WARNING permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Breakdown assistance Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function Rthe engine is not running. or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, Rthe brake system or the power steering is deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the malfunctioning. vehicle is to be towed. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake If your vehicle is being towed, much more is released. If the electric parking brake is force may be necessary to steer or brake. faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is a risk of an accident. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could make sure that the steering moves freely. be damaged.
G WARNING ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- recover the vehicle with acrane. started is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle: ! When towing, pull away slowly and Rthe towing eye could detach itself smoothly.Ifthe tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.
Z 392 Towing and tow-starting
! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, locked out when pushing or towing the use the key instead of the Start/Stop vehicle. button. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are Installing/removing the towing eye opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission. Installing the towing eye ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! Vehicles with differential locks: make sure the differential locks are in automatic mode. When towing, the differential locks must not be switched on. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum Example: towing eye mounting covers permissible gross vehicle weight of your : Front cover Breakdown assistance vehicle. ; Back cover Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if possible, weight rating can be found on the vehicle connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch identification plate (Y page 443). (Y page 253). It is better to have the vehicle transported The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are than to have it towed. located in the bumpers. They are at the front If the vehicle has suffered transmission and at the rear, under the covers. damage, have it transported on a transporter X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle or trailer. tool kit (Y page 380). The automatic transmission must be in X To open the cover at the front: press the position N when the vehicle is being towed. mark on cover : inwards in the direction The battery must be connected and charged. of the arrow. Otherwise, you: X To open the cover at the rear: insert a Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in flat, blunt object into the cutout and lever the ignition lock cover ; out of the bumper. Rcannot release the electric parking brake X Take cover : or ; off the opening. Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the position N stop and tighten it. i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 276). You could otherwise be Towing and tow-starting 393
Removing the towing eye In order to ensure that the automatic transmission stays in position N when towing X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. the vehicle, you must observe the following X Attach cover : or ; to the bumper and points: press until it engages. X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in position 0. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the Towing the vehicle with the rear axle ignition lock. raised On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the ! The ignition mustbe switched off if you SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button are towing the vehicle with the rear axle (Y page 158). ® raised. Intervention by ESP could X Depress and hold the brake pedal. otherwise damage the brake system. X Shift the automatic transmission to Only possible for vehicles without position N. 4MATIC. X Release the brake pedal. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps X Release the electric parking brake. (Y page 124). X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. ignition lock and remove the SmartKey X Switch on the hazard warning lamps from the ignition lock. (Y page 124). X When leaving the vehicle, take the i In order to signal a change of direction SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO key with you. when towing the vehicle with the hazard When towing your vehicle with the rear axle warning lamps switched on, use the Breakdown assistance raised, it is important that you observe the combination switch as usual. In this case, safety instructions (Y page 391). only the indicator lamps for the direction of travel flash. After resetting the combination switch, the hazard warning Towing avehicle with both axles on lamp starts flashing again. the ground It is importantthat you observe the safety Transporting the vehicle instructions when towing away your vehicle (Y page 391). ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels The automatic transmission automatically or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle shifts to position P when you open the driver's such as axle or steering components. or front-passenger door or when you remove Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or transporter if you wish to transport it. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N.
Z 394 Fuses
As soon as the vehicle is loaded: Tow-starting (emergency engine X Preventthe vehicle from rolling away by starting) applying the electric parking brake. ! Vehicles with an automatic transmission X Shift the automatic transmission to must not be tow-started. You could position P. otherwise damage the automatic X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the transmission. ignition lock and remove it. You can find information on "Jump-starting" X Secure the vehicle. at (Y page 389).
Information on 4MATIC vehicles Fuses ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed Important safety notes with either the front or the rear axle raised, as doing so will damage the transmission. G WARNING Only use fuses that have been approved for If the vehicle has transmission damage or Mercedes-Benzvehicles and that have the damage to the front or rear axle, have it correct fuse rating for the systems transported on a transporter or trailer. concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge In the event of damage to the electrical faulty fuses. Using fuses that have not been system approved or attempting to repair or bridge If the battery is defective, the automatic faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be transmission will be locked in position P. To overloaded and result in afire. Have the cause shift the automatic transmission to position traced and rectified at a qualified specialist N, you must provide power to the vehicle's
Breakdown assistance workshop. electrical system in the same way as when jump-starting (Y page 389). ! For the fuse boxes in the engine Have the vehicle transported on a transporter compartment and under the rear bench or trailer. seat, only use fuses with the suffix "S". Otherwise, components or systems could be damaged. Recovering avehicle that has become The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down stuck faulty circuits. If afuse blows, all the ! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in a components on the circuit and their functions straightline when pulling out a vehicle that stop operating. has become stuck. Excessive tractive Blown fuses must be replacedwith fuses of power could damage the vehicles. the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or in the fuse allocation chart. muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the utmost care, especially so if the vehicle is If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the laden. cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a Mercedes-BenzCenter. trailer attached. Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, using the tracks it made when it became stuck. Fuses 395
Before changing a fuse X To open: pull cover : outwards in the direction of the arrow and remove it. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away X To close: clip in cover : on the front of (Y page 179). the dashboard. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it (Y page 157). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 158). Fuse box in the engine compartment All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the must be off. fuse box when the cover is open. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: ! When closing the cover, make sure that it Rfuse boxonthe front-passenger side of the is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture dashboard seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair Rfuse box in the engine compartmentonthe the operation of the fuses. right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of travel RFuse box under the rear bench seat The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse box under the rear bench seat (Y page 395).
Dashboard fuse box
! Do not use a pointed object such as a Breakdown assistance screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the X Open the hood. dashboard or the cover. X Remove any existing moisture from the ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box using a dry cloth. fuse box when the cover is open. X To open: open clamps ;. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it X Fold up cover : in the direction of the is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture arrow and remove it. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair X To close: check whether the seal is seated the operation of the fuses. correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box into the retainers. X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;. X Close the hood.
Fuse box under the rear bench seat ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open.
Z 396 Fuses
! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses or the cover could be damaged by the rear bench seat. X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat forward (Y page 335).
X To open: lift and fold out carpet : in the direction of the arrow. Breakdown assistance
X Release clamps ; by pressing them in the direction of the arrow. X Fold cover = up in the direction of the arrow and remove it. i The fuse allocation chart is located under cover =. X To close: insert cover = into the retainers on the side of the fuse box. X Fold down cover = until clamps ; engage audibly. X Fold the right-hand rear bench seat back (Y page 335). 397
Useful information ...... 398 Important safety notes ...... 398 Operation ...... 398 Winter operation ...... 400 Tire pressure ...... 402 Loading the vehicle ...... 410 All about wheels and tires ...... 413 Changing awheel ...... 421 Wheel and tire combinations ...... 426 Emergency spare wheel ...... 436 Wheels and tires 398 Operation
Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and i This Operator's Manual describes all warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires models and all standard and optional with run-flat characteristics). equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Accessories that are not approved for your Manual. Country-specific differences are vehicle by Mercedes-Benzorare not being possible. Please note that your vehicle may used correctly can impair the operating not be equipped with all features safety. described. This also applies to safety- Before purchasing and using non-approved related systems and functions. accessories, visitaqualified specialist i Read the information on qualified workshop and inquire about: specialist workshops: (Y page 27). Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Important safety notes Rfactory recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found G WARNING in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, (Y page 426). the wheel brakes or suspension components Information on air pressure for the tires on may be damaged. There is arisk of an your vehicle can be found: accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading that fulfill the specifications of the original Information placard on the B-pillar part. (Y page 410) When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler
Wheels and tires correct: flap (Y page 174) Rin the "Tire pressure" section Rdesignation Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 402) Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Operation Rdesignation Information on driving Rmanufacturer Rmodel If the vehicle is heavily loaded, checkthe tire pressures and correct them if necessary. G WARNING While driving, pay attention to vibrations, Aflat tire severely impairs the driving, noises and unusual handling characteristics, steering and braking characteristics of the e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that vehicle. There is a risk of accident. the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your Tires without run-flat characteristics: speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon Rdo not drive with aflat tire. as possible to check the wheels and tires for Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your damage. Hidden tire damage could also be emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or causing the unusual handling characteristics. consult a qualified specialist workshop. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires Operation 399 and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire When parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (Y page 402). the tires do notget deformed by the curb or Observe the notes on the emergency spare other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over wheel (Y page 436). curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try The service life of tires depends on the to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. following factors amongst other things: Otherwise, the tires, particularly the RDriving style sidewalls, may be damaged. RTire pressure RDistance covered Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNING Tire tread Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose G WARNING control of your vehicle. There is a risk of Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. accident. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk and replace any damaged tires immediately. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving Regularly checkthe wheels and tires of your conditions. There is a risk of accident. vehicle for damage at least once a month, as If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires well as after driving off-road or on rough may exhibit different levels of wear at roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you tire pressure. Pay particular attention to should regularly check the tread depth and damage such as: the condition of the tread across the entire
Rcuts in the tires width of all tires. Wheels and tires Rpunctures Minimum tire tread depth for: Rtears in the tires RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) Rbulges on tires RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm) Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels For safety reasons, replace the tires before Regularly check the tire tread depth and the the legally prescribed limit for the minimum condition of the tread across the whole width tire tread depth is reached. of the tire (Y page 399). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benzfor your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.
Z 400 Winter operation
Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with into the tire tread. a flat tire (Y page 382). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the tread. They are visible once the tread depth factory. It is therefore recommended that is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the you additionally equip your vehicle with a case, the tire is so worn that it mustbe TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not replaced. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Winter operation type and make. General notes Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires specialist workshop at the onset of winter. with run-flat characteristics" section Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" (Y page 382). section (Y page 421). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. Driving with summer tires RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km).They only reach At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer their full performance after this distance. tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and RDo not drive with tires which have too little braking power. Change the tires on your tread depth, as this significantly reduces vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at
Wheels and tires the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires RReplace the tires after six years at the permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept latest, regardless of wear. responsibility for this type of damage. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 436). M+S tires MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat G WARNING properties) M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter characteristics), you can continue to drive and do not provide sufficient traction. There your vehicle even if there is a total loss of is a risk of an accident. pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã MOExtended tires may only be used in in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use monitor and on wheels specifically tested by winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of Mercedes-Benz. tire are identified by the M+S marking. Winter operation 401
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake if you have installed snow chains. The symbol in addition to the M+S marking vehicle may otherwise be damaged. provide the best possible grip in wintry road ! On some tire sizes there is not enough conditions. space for snow chains. To avoid damage to Only these tires will allow driving safety the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and systems such as ABS and ESP® to function tire combinations" section under "Tires and optimally in winter. These tires have been wheels". developed specifically for driving in snow. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on recommends that you only use snow chains all wheels to maintain safe handling that have been specially approved for your characteristics. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a Always observe the maximum permissible corresponding standard of quality. speed specified for the M+S tires you have If you intend to mount snow chains, please mounted. bear the following points in mind: Once the winter tires are mounted: ROnly use snow chains when driving on X Check the tire pressures (Y page 405). roads completely covered by snow. X Restart the tire pressure monitor Remove the snow chains as soon as (Y page 406). possible when you come to aroad that is X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire not snow-covered. pressure loss warning system RDo not exceed the maximum permissible (Y page 406). speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information on driving with the RLocal regulations may restrict the use of emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 436). snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. Snow chains RSnow chains may not be mounted on all Wheels and tires wheel/tire combinations. Permissible G WARNING wheel-tire combinations (Y page 426). If snow chains are installed to the front i ® wheels, they may drag against the vehicle You may wish to deactivate ESP when body or chassis components. This could pulling away with snow chains installed cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. (Y page 71). This way you can allow the There is a risk of an accident. wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force To avoid hazardous situations: (cutting action). Rnever install snow chains to the front For more information on driving with an wheels emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 436). Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.
! You must drive at raised vehicle level (height 1) if snow chains have been installed. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System (ADS): do not use the sports mode
Z 402 Tire pressure
Tire pressure Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tires is the maximum tire Tire pressure specifications pressure value stated in the table inside the Important safety notes fuel filler flap. Further information on tire pressures can be G WARNING obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Tires with tire pressures thatare too low or too high are associated with the following Tire and Loading Information placard hazards: Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle is heavily laden or when driven at high speeds. Rthe tires can wearexcessively and/or unevenly, which can severely impairtire traction. Rthe driving, steering and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. There is a risk of accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures : Recommended tire pressures and checkthe pressure of all the tires The Tire and Loading Information placard is including the spare wheel: on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the Rmonthly, at least vehicle (Y page 410). Rif the load changes The Tire and Loading Information placard Rbefore beginning a long journey contains the recommended tire pressures for Runder different operating conditions, e.g. cold tires. The recommended tire pressures
Wheels and tires off-road driving are valid for the maximum permissible load If necessary, correct the tire pressure. and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. i The specifications on the sample Tire and Loading Information placard and tire Tire pressure table pressure tables are examples. Tire The tire pressure table is on the inside of the pressure specifications are vehicle-specific fuel filler flap. and may deviate from the data shown here. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with the emergency spare wheel(Y page 436). Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory Tire pressure 403
The tire pressure table contains the i The tire pressures for increased loads recommended pressures for cold tires for and/or higher road speeds, shown in the various operating conditions, i.e. differing tire pressure table, may have a negative load and speed conditions. effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessivebuild up of heat and a suddenloss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects. laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking. amounts of luggage. The actual number of If you are unable to rectify the damage, seats may differ. contact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Wheels and tires malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other Some tire pressure tables show only the rim valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. your vehicle onto the tire valve. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire (Y page 415). does not permit any reliable conclusion about If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring road speeds, the pressures should be reset system, the tire pressure can be checked to the higher values: using the on-board computer. Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase and/or when the vehicle is in motion.This is Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds. dependent on the driving speed and the load.
Z 404 Tire pressure
Therefore, you should only correcttire Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the pressures when the tires are cold. tires, including the spare wheel. The tires are cold: Underinflated tires may: Rif the vehicle has been parked without directsunlight on the tires for at least three Roverheat, leading to tire defects hours and Rhave an adverse effect on handling Rif the vehicle has notbeen driven further characteristics than 1 mile (1.6 km) Rwear quickly and unevenly The tire temperature changes depending on Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature Overinflation changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ G WARNING 1.5 psi). Take this into accountwhen Tires with excessively high pressure can burst checking the pressure of warm tires. Only because they are damaged more easily by correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they current operating conditions. If you check the also suffer from irregular wear, which can tire pressure when the tires are warm, the severely impair the braking properties and the resulting value will be higher than if the tires driving characteristics. There is a risk of an were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the accident. tire pressure to the value specified for cold Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be tires, including the spare wheel. too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for Overinflated tires may: cold tires: Rincrease the braking distance Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rhave an adverse effect on handling
Wheels and tires on the B-pillar on the driver's side characteristics Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of Rwear quickly and unevenly the fuel filler flap Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the Rbe more susceptible to damage emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) Maximum tire pressures
Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflation G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/ or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. : Example: maximum permissible tire pressure Tire pressure 405
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system inflation pressure. Always observe the (Canada only) recommended tire pressure for yourvehicle when adjusting the tire pressure General notes (Y page 402). While the vehicle is in motion, the tire i The actual values for tires are vehicle- pressure loss warning system monitors the specific and may deviate from the values in set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the illustration. the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of Checking the tire pressures a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appearinthe multifunction Important safety notes display. Observe the notes on tire pressure You can recognize the tire pressure loss (Y page 402). warning by the Run Flat Indicator Information on air pressure for the tires on Active Press 'OK' to Restart message your vehicle can be found: which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading message display can be found under Information placard loading information "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning table on the B-pillar (Y page 410) system" (Y page 406). Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Important safety notes Rin the "Tire pressure" section The tire pressure warning system does not R under "Tire pressure" (Y page 402) warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire Checking tire pressures manually
pressure (Y page 402). Wheels and tires To determine and set the correct tire The tire pressure loss warning does not pressure, proceed as follows: replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the X Read the tire pressure and compare it with tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the the recommended value on the Tire and event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the Loading Information placard (Y page 402). vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to abrupt steering maneuvers. the recommended value. The function of the tire pressure loss warning X If the tire pressure is too high, release air system is limited or delayed if: by pressing down the metal pin in the valve. Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's checkthe tire pressure again using the tire tires. pressure gauge. Rroad conditions are wintry. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. X Repeatthese steps for the other tires.
Z 406 Tire pressure
Ryou adoptavery sporty driving style If you wish to confirm the restart: (cornering at high speeds or driving with X Press the a button. high rates of acceleration). The Tire Pressure Now OK? message Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. appears in the multifunction display. R you are driving with a heavy load (in the X Press the 9 or : button to select vehicle or on the roof). Yes. X Press the a button. Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction Restart the tire pressure loss warning system display. if you have: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure Rchanged the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set Rchanged the wheels or tires tire pressures of all four tires. Rmounted new wheels or tires If you wish to cancel the restart: X Before restarting, make sure that the tire X Press the % button. pressures are set properly on all four tires or for the respective operating conditions. X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message The recommended tire pressures can be appears, use the 9 or : button to found on the Tire and Loading Information select Cancel. placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler X Press the a button. flap. The tire pressure values stored at the last The tire pressure loss warning system can restart will continue to be monitored. only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire Tire pressure monitor
Wheels and tires pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. General notes X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 402). If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 157). pressure monitor warns you if the pressure X Press the = or ; button on the drops in one or more of the tires. The tire steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. pressure monitor only functions if the correct X Press the 9 or : button to select sensors are installed on all wheels. Tire Pressure. Information on tire pressures is displayed in X Press the a button. the multifunction display.After a few minutes The Run Flat Indicator active of driving, the current tire pressure of each Restart with OK message appears in the tire is showninthe Serv. menu of the multifunction display. multifunction display. For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 408). Tire pressure 407
system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the Example: current tire pressure display vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, G WARNING the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), malfunctions may occur for a variety of should be checked at least once a month reasons, including the installation of when cold and inflated to the pressure incompatible replacement or alternate tires recommended by the vehicle manufacturer or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the on the Tire and Loading Information placard TPMS from functioning properly. Always on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire check the TPMS malfunction telltale after pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler replacing one or more tires or wheels on your flap.Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size vehicle to ensure that the replacement or than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to Information placard or the tire pressure label, continue to function properly. you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure to that recommended for cold tires been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring which is suitable for the operating situation system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire (Y page 402). Note that the correct tire pressure telltale when one or more of your pressure for the currentoperating situation Wheels and tires tires are significantly underinflated. must first be taught-in to the tire pressure Accordingly, when the low tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of telltale illuminates, you should stop and check pressure, the warning threshold for the your tires as soon as possible, and inflate warning message is aligned to the reference them to the proper pressure. Driving on a values taught-in.Restart the tire pressure significantly underinflated tire causes the tire monitor after adjusting the pressure of the to overheat and can lead to tire failure. cold tires (Y page 409). The current Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency pressures are saved as new reference values. and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's As a result, a warning message will appear if handling and stopping ability. the tire pressure drops significantly. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute The tire pressure monitor does not warn you for proper tire maintenance, and it is the of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe driver's responsibility to maintain correcttire the notes on the recommended tire pressure pressure, even if underinflation has not (Y page 402). reached the level to trigger illumination of the The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn TPMS low tire pressure telltale. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the USA only: tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the
Z 408 Tire pressure
vehicle to a haltby braking carefully. Avoid Checking the tire pressure abrupt steering maneuvers. electronically
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position warning lamp in the instrument cluster for 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 157). indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) X Press the = or ; button on the or pressure loss (Canada). Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates steering wheel to select the Service whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire menu. pressure monitor is malfunctioning: X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is X Press the a button. significantly too low. The tire pressure The current tire pressure of each tire is monitor is not malfunctioning. shown in the multifunction display. RUSAonly:ifthe warning lamp flashes for If the vehicle has been parked for longer than around a minute and then remains lit 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be constantly, the tire pressure monitor is displayed after driving a few malfunctioning. minutes message appears. USA only: if there is a malfunction with the After a teach-in process, the tire pressure tire pressure monitor it can take more than monitor automatically detects new wheels or ten minutes until the malfunction is shown by new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for the tire pressure value to the individual approximately one minute and then lighting wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure up continuously.When the malfunction has Monitor Active display message is shown been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp instead of the tire pressure display. The tire goes out after a few minutes of driving. pressures are already being monitored. The tire pressure values indicated by the on- i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,
Wheels and tires board computer may differ from those the system may continue to show the tire measured at a gas station with a pressure pressure of the wheel that has been gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on- removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, board computer refer to those measured at note that the value displayed for the sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure position where the spare wheel is mounted values indicated by a pressure gauge are is not the same as the current tire pressure higher than those shown by the on-board of the emergency spare wheel. computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Tire pressure 409
Tire pressure monitorwarning X Set the tire pressure to the value messages recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure Information placard on the B-pillar on the loss in one or more tires, a warning message driver's side (Y page 402). is showninthe multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tire Additional tire pressure values for different pressure warning lamp lights up in the loads can also be found on the tire pressure instrument cluster. Each tire that is affected table on the inside of the fuel filler flap by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted (Y page 174). in the pressure display. X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position tire pressure in at least one tire is too low 2 in the ignition lock. and must be corrected at the next X Press the = or ; button on the opportunity. steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Press the 9 or : button to select multifunction display, the tire pressure in Tire Pressure. one or more tires has dropped significantly X Press the a button. and the tires must be checked. The multifunction display shows the RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction current tire pressure for the individual tires message appears in the multifunction or the Tire pressure will be display, the tire pressure in one or more displayed after driving a few tires has dropped suddenly and the tires minutes message. must be checked. X Press the : button. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are The Use current pressures as new rotated, the tire pressures may be reference values message appears in displayed for the wrong positions for a the multifunction display. Wheels and tires short time. This is rectified after a few If you wish to confirm the restart: minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted Restarting the tire pressure monitor message appears in the multifunction display. When you restart the tire pressure monitor, After driving for a few minutes, the system all existing warning messages are deleted and checks whether the current tire pressures the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses are within the specified range. The new tire the currently set tire pressures as the pressures are then accepted as reference reference values for monitoring. In most values and monitored. cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference If you wish to cancel the restart: values after you have changed the tire X Press the % button. pressure. However, you can also define The tire pressure values stored at the last reference values manually as described here. restart will continue to be monitored. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.
Z 410 Loading the vehicle
Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout.Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least halfofthe GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard : B-pillar, driver's side is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number Maximum permissible gross vehicle of occupants and the maximum weight rating permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle
Wheels and tires identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the X Specification for maximum gross vehicle front and rear axle. weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading The maximum gross axle weight rating is Information placard: "The combined weight the maximum weight that can be carried of occupants and cargo should never by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." exceed the maximum load or the The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, maximum gross axle weight rating for the load and luggage must not exceed the front or rear axle. specified value. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid Loading the vehicle 411
maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information rating for your vehicle on the Tire and placard. Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Number of seats X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of Maximum number of seats : indicates the luggage and cargo being loaded on the maximum number of occupants allowed to vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed travel in the vehicle. This information can be the available cargo and luggage load found on the Tire and Loading Information capacity calculated in step 4. placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in Wheels and tires your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on
Z 412 Loading the vehicle
Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 410). The greaterthe combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 253). Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in 5 3 1 the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1 occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2 Wheels and tires Weight of the Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1: occupants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) occupants All about wheels and tires 413
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) (maximumgross Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = Ò540 lbs (245 kg) = Ò150 lbs (68 kg) = vehicle weight rating 750 lbs (340 kg) 960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg) from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)
Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading carefully, you should still make sure thatthe Standards gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading be found on the vehicle identification plate on Standards the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 410). Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.
Gross axle weight rating: the maximum Wheels and tires permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are vehicle weight and maximum gross axle U.S. government specifications. Their weight rating), have your loaded vehicle purpose is to provide drivers with uniform (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full reliable information on tire performance data. trailer load if applicable) weighed on a Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using suitable vehicle weighbridge. three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Trailer load/noseweight Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross quality grading markings on the sidewall of weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the tire. the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The Where applicable, the tire grading trailer load/noseweight is usually information can be found on the tire sidewall approximately 8% of the gross weight of the between the tread shoulder and maximum trailer and its cargo. tire width.
Z 414 All about wheels and tires
Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. RTraction grade: AA You should pay special attention to road R Temperature grade: A conditions when temperatures are around All passenger car tires must conform to the freezing point. statutory safety requirements in additionto Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum specificand may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 399). Winter tires can the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with The treadweargrade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving. based on the wearrate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified Further information on winter tires (M+S U.S. government course. For example, a tire tires) (Y page 400). graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as Temperature a tire graded 100. G WARNING The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is upon the actual conditions of their use, established for a tire that is properly inflated however, and may depart significantly from and not overloaded. Excessive speed, the norm, due to variations in driving habits, underinflation, or excessive loading, either service practices and differences in road separately or in combination, can cause characteristics and climate conditions. excessive heat build-up and possible tire Wheels and tires failure. Traction The temperature grades are A(the highest), G WARNING B, and C. These represent the tire's The traction grade assigned to this tire is resistance to the generationofheat and its based on straight-ahead braking traction ability to dissipate heat when tested under tests, and does not include acceleration, controlled conditions on a specified indoor cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction laboratory test wheel. Sustained high characteristics. temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage excessive temperature can lead to sudden to the drive train. tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level The traction grades, from highest to lowest, of performance which all passenger car tires are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A measured under controlled conditions on represent higher levels of performance on the specified government test surfaces of asphalt laboratory test wheel than the minimum and concrete. Atire marked C may have poor required by law. traction performance. All about wheels and tires 415
Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.
: Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code : UniformTire Quality Grading Standard ? Rim diameter (Y page 419) A Load bearing index ; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating (Y page 418) = Maximum tire load (Y page 417) General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 404) may not contain any letters or may contain A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.
B Tire material (Y page 418) If there is no letter preceding the size Wheels and tires C Tire size designation, load-bearing description (as shown above): these are capacity and speed index (Y page 415) passenger vehicle tires according to D Load index (Y page 417) European manufacturing standards. E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description:these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. The markings described above are on the tire manufacturing standards. in additionto the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may manufacturing standards. deviate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an capacity and speed rating emergency. G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing tire width in millimeters. capacity and the approved maximum speed Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. size ratio between the tire height and tire There is a risk of accident. width and is shown as a percentage. The
Z 416 All about wheels and tires
aspectratio is calculated by dividing the tire Index Speed rating width by the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. H up to 130mph (210 km/h) Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameterofthe bead seat, not the diameter ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) of the rim flange. The rim diameter is ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of Do not overload the tires by exceeding the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have a “ZR” specified load limit. The maximum in the size description, depending on the permissible load can be found on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). vehicle's Tire and Loading Information The service specification is made up of placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side load-bearing index A and speed rating (Y page 410). B. Example: RIf the size description of your tire includes The load bearing index 91 indicates a "ZR" and there are no service maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) that the specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in
Wheels and tires tires can bear. For further information on the order to find out the maximum speed. maximum tire load in kilograms and pounds, If a service specification is available, the see (Y page 417). maximum speed is limited according to the For further information on the load bearing speed rating in the service specification. index, see "Load index" (Y page 417). Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In this Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the example, "97 Y" is the service specification. approved maximum speed of the tire. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating and the maximum speed of the tire is i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may limited to 186 mph (300km/h). deviate from the data in the example. REvery tire that has amaximum speed of Regardless of the speed rating, always morethan 186 mph (300 km/h) must have observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and a "ZR" in the size description and the adapt your driving style to the traffic service specification must be given in conditions. parentheses. Example: Summer tires 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the Index Speed rating tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) speed. R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) All about wheels and tires 417
All-weather tires and winter tires Load index
Index Speed rating Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, wintertires In addition to the load bearing index, load also have the i snowflake symbol on index : may be imprinted after the letters the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill that identify the speed index B on the the requirements of the Rubber sidewall of the tire (Y page 415). Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) example above), represents astandard regarding the tire traction on snow. They load (SL) tire have been especially developed for driving RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced on snow. tire An electronic speed limiter prevents your RLightLoad: represents a light load tire vehicle fromexceeding the following speeds: RC, D, E: represents a load range that Rall vehicles (exceptAMG vehicles): depends on the maximum load that the tire 130 mph (210 km/h) can carry at a certain pressure RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may Wheels and tires RAMG vehicles with increased top speed: deviate from the data in the example. 174 mph (280 km/h) R Maximum load rating The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 426). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.
2 or M+Si for winter tires.
Z 418 All about wheels and tires
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. specified load limit. The maximum Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used permissible load can be found on the by the manufacturer as acode to describe vehicle's Tire and Loading Information specific characteristics of the tire. placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Date of manufacture: date of manufacture (Y page 410). A provides information about the age of a i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire. The first and second positions represent specific and may deviate fromthe values in the week of manufacture, starting with "01" the illustration. for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire 2008. manufacturer or retreader must imprint aTIN in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
Wheels and tires TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it This information describes the type of tire possible for the purchaser to easily identify cord and the number of layers in the affected tires. sidewall : and under tire tread ;. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may code ? and manufacturing date A. deviate from the data in the example. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and loading symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department Tire ply composition and material used of Transportation. Describes the number of plies or the number Manufacturer identification code: of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire manufacturer identification code ; provides tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, details on the tire manufacturer. New tires nylon, polyester and other materials. have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Bar For further information aboutretreaded tires, Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and see (Y page 426). All aboutwheels and tires 419
100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on 1 bar. the driver's side. DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire the United States Department of identification. It specifies the speed range for Transportation. which the tire is approved. Normal occupant weight GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) The numberofoccupants which the vehicle The GTW is the weight of a trailer including is designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms the weight of the load, luggage, accessories (150 lb). etc. on the trailer. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Auniform standard to grade the quality of The gross vehicle weight includes the weight tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare and temperature characteristics. Ratings are wheel, accessories installed, occupants, determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if government testing procedures. The ratings applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not are molded into the sidewall of the tire. exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate Recommended tire pressure on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The Tire and Loading Informationplacard The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross contains the recommended tire pressures for weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the the vehicle including all accessories, maximum permissible vehicle speed. occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar
The tire pressure table contains the noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle Wheels and tires recommended pressures for cold tires for weight rating is specified on the vehicle various operating conditions, i.e. differing identification plate on the B-pillar on the load and speed conditions. driver's side. Increased vehicle weight due to optional Maximumloaded vehicle weight equipment The maximum weight is the sum of: This is the combined weight of all standard Rthe curb weight of the vehicle and optional equipmentavailable for the Rthe weight of the accessories vehicle, regardless of whetheritis actually Rthe load limit installed on the vehicle or not. Rthe weight of the factory installed optional Rim equipment This is the part of the wheel on which the tire Kilopascal (kPa) is mounted. Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight pressure is bar. There are 100kilopascals rating. The actual load on an axle must never (kPa) to 1bar. exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the
Z 420 All about wheels and tires
Load index Cold tire pressure In addition to the load-bearing index, the load The tires are cold: indexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall Rif the vehicle has been parked without of the tire. This specifiesthe load-bearing direct sunlight on the tires for at least three capacity more precisely. hours and Curb weight Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than The weight of a vehicle with standard 1 mile (1.6 km). equipment including the maximum capacity Tread of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air- The part of the tire that comes into contact conditioning system and optional equipment with the road. if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Bead Maximum load rating The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel The maximum tire load is the maximum wires in the bead to prevent the tire from permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for coming loose from the wheel rim. which a tire is approved. Sidewall Maximum permissible tire pressure The part of the tire between the tread and the Maximum permissible tire pressure for one bead. tire. Weight of optional extras Maximum load on one tire The combined weight of those optional extras Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated that weigh more than the replaced standard by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs). by two. These optional extras, such as high- performance brakes, level control, a roof rack
Wheels and tires PSI (pounds per square inch) Astandard unitofmeasure for tire pressure. or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of Aspect ratio the accessories. Relationship between tire height and tire TIN (Tire Identification Number) width in percent. This is a unique identifier which can be used Tire pressure by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for This is pressure inside the tire applying an example for a product recall, and thus identify outward force to each square inch of the tire's the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the surface. The tire pressure is specified in manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal type code and the manufacturing date. (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only Load bearing index be corrected when the tires are cold. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Changing awheel 421
Traction Rotating the wheels Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) severely impair the driving characteristics if The TWR specifies the maximumpermissible the wheels or tires have different dimensions. weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow The wheel brakes or suspension components hitch can support. may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Treadwear indicators Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are and tires are of the same dimensions. distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure (1.6 mm) has been reached. monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Occupant distribution Tire-mounting tools should not be used The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at near the valve. This could damage the their designated seating positions. electronic components. Total load limit Only have tires changed at a qualified Rated cargo and luggage load plus specialist workshop. 68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the Always observe the instructions and safety number of seats in the vehicle. notes in the "Mounting awheel" section (Y page 422). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires Changing awheel differ, depending on the operating conditions. Flat tire Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically Wheels and tires You can find information on whatto do in the wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown in the center. assistance" section (Y page 381). If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you Information on driving with MOExtended tires can rotate the wheels according to the in the event of a flat tire can be found under intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat book in your vehicle documents. If this is not characteristics" (Y page 382). available, the tires should then be rotated The "Breakdown assistance" section every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to (Y page 381) contains information and notes 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requires on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on this. Do not change the direction of wheel driving with MOExtended tires in the event of rotation. a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended Cleanthe contact surfaces of the wheel and tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel (Y page 382). is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and, Vehicles with an emergency spare if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss wheel: in the event of a flat tire, mount the warning system or the tire pressure monitor. emergency spare wheel according to the description under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 422).
Z 422 Changing awheel
Direction of rotation X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: make sure that highway level is selected Tires with a specified direction of rotation (Y page 209). have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk X Switch off the engine. of hydroplaning.You will only gain these benefits if the correct direction of rotation is X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove observed. the SmartKey from the ignition lock. An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the its correct direction of rotation. driver's door. The on-board electronics have status 0, which is the same as the SmartKey having Storing wheels been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, Start/Stop button from the ignition lock dry and preferably dark place. Protectthe (Y page 158). tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. X If included in the vehicle equipment, take the tire-change tool kit out of the vehicle. Cleaning the wheels X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. G WARNING The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt i Apart from certain country-specific blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage variations, vehicles are not equipped with to the tires or chassis components. a tire-change tool kit. For information on Components damaged in this way may fail which tools are required to perform a wheel unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. change on your vehicle, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not use power washers with circular jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged Necessary wheel-changing tools can include, for example: Wheels and tires tires or chassis components replaced immediately. RJack RWheel chock RLug wrench Mounting awheel Preparing the vehicle Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away X Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: whenmounting the emergency spare wheel in the event of a flat tire, follow the additional notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire" (Y page 381). X Park the vehicle on firm, non-slippery and level ground. X Unload heavy luggage. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. X Bring the front wheels into the straight- ahead position. X Shift the transmission to position P. Changing awheel 423
If yourvehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, Raising the vehicle it can be found in the tire-change tool kit WARNING (Y page 380). G The folding wheel chockis an additional If you do not position the jack correctly at the securing measure to prevent the vehicle from appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the rolling away, for example when changing a jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. wheel. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate X Fold both plates upwards :. jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the X Fold out lower plate ;. jack must be positioned vertically, directly X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into under the jacking point of the vehicle. the openings in base plate =. ! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" emergency spare wheel: use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel only on the rear axle. If you mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to the brake system. If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The defective Securing the vehicle on level ground wheel on the front axle can then be replaced with the intact wheel from the rear X On level ground: place chocks or other axle. suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the Make sure to note the placard on the wheel you wish to change. "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tires ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged. The following must be observed when raising the vehicle: Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Ifused incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel X On light downhill gradients: place is being changed. It is not suited for chocks or other suitable items in front of performing maintenance work under the the wheels of the front and rear axle. vehicle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes.
Z 424 Changing awheel
Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake and inserting wheel chocks. Never disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g. rubber mats. Rdo not use wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the The jacking points are located justbehind the jack will not be able to achieve its load- front wheel housings and just in front of the bearing capacity due to the restricted rear wheel housings (arrows). height. X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle Rthe maximum clearance between the tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of underside of the tire and the ground must the jack so that the letters AUF are visible. be 1.2 in (3 cm). Rnever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. Rnever lie under the raised vehicle. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no personsare present in
Wheels and tires the vehicle when the vehicleis raised. ; Jacking points = Jack ? Crank
X Position jack = at jacking point ;. The alignment bolt on the jack must be inserted into the intended jacking point hole.
X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on the wheel you wish to change by aboutone full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Changing awheel 425
Mounting anew wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose.As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Have the Example damaged wheel bolts or hub threads X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly replaced/renewed. Do notcontinue driving. beneath the jacking point. G WARNING X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts raised amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)from the when the vehicle is on the ground. ground. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold Removing awheel the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The boltand wheel hub Always pay attention to the instructions and threads could otherwise be damaged when safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" you screw them in. section (Y page 421). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed Wheels and tires for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel could damage the brake system. X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheelbolts fully. X Remove the wheel.
Z 426 Wheel and tire combinations
: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the X Place the ratchet wrenchonto the hexagon factory nut of the jack so that the letters AB are ; Wheel bolts for the "Minispare" visible. emergency spare wheel X Turn the ratchetwrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire- change tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor again. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Check the tire pressure of the newly
Wheels and tires surfaces. installed wheel and adjust it if necessary. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the Observe the recommended tire pressure alignment bolt and push it on. (Y page 402). X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all finger-tight. wheels mounted must be equipped with X Unscrew the alignment bolt. functioning sensors. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight. Wheel and tire combinations Lowering the vehicle General notes G WARNING ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts recommends that you only use tires and and bolts are not tightened to the specified wheels which have been approved by tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Mercedes-Benz specifically for your Have the tightening torque immediately vehicle. checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Wheel and tire combinations 427
These tires have been specially adapted for The recommended pressures for various use with the control systems, such as ABS operating conditions can be found: ® or ESP , and are marked as follows: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard RMO =Mercedes-Benz Original with the recommended tire pressures on RMOE =Mercedes-Benz Original Extended the B-pillar on the driver's side (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of RMO1 =Mercedes-BenzOriginal (only the fuel filler flap certain AMG tires) Observe the notes on recommended tire Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires pressures under various operating conditions may only be used on wheels that have been (Y page 402). specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Check tire pressures regularly, and only when Only use tires, wheels or accessories the tires are cold. Comply with the tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. maintenance recommendations of the tire Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. vehicle noise emissions or fuel Notes on the vehicle equipment –always consumption, may otherwise be adversely equip the vehicle with: affected. In addition, when driving with a Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/ load, tire dimension variations could cause right) the tires to come into contact with the Rthe same type of tires at a given time bodywork and axle components. This could (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. tires) Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not damage resulting from the use of tires, equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It wheels or accessories other than those is therefore recommended that you tested and approved. additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT Information on tires, wheels and approved kit if you mounttires that do not feature run- combinations can be obtained from any flat properties, e.g. winter tires. ATIREFIT kit Wheels and tires qualified specialist workshop. may be obtained from a qualified specialist ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor workshop. recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since i Not all wheel and tire combinations are previous damage cannot always be available at the factory for all countries. detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle i On the following pages, you can find safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do information on approved wheelrims and not mount used tires if you have no tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with information about their previous usage. winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipmentor Overview of abbreviations usedinthe optional extras. following tire tables: If you would like to equip your vehicle with RBA: both axles approved winter tires, you may also, in RFA: front axle certain circumstances, require rims of the RRA: rear axle appropriate size. The sizes of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory.
Z 428 Wheel and tire combinations
The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires Wheel and tire combinations 429
Tires ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY
All-weather tires R 18
Tires Alloywheels BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XLM+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) Wheels and tires BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)
3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. 4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Z 430 Wheel and tire combinations
R 20
Tires Alloywheels BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm) BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)
Winter tires R 18
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2
Wheels and tires Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 M+SiMOExtended3, 4 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)
4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. Wheel and tire combinations 431
ML 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY
All-weather tires R 18
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheels and tires Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm) BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)
3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. 4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Z 432 Wheel and tire combinations
Winter tires R 18
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
R 19
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 M+SiMOExtended3, 4 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) Wheels and tires ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
All-weather tires R 18
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. 4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Wheel and tire combinations 433
R 19
Tires Alloywheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)
R 20 Wheels and tires Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm) BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)
Winter tires R 18
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/55 R 18 105 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. 4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains".
Z 434 Wheel and tire combinations
R 19
Tires Alloywheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 M+SiMOExtended3, 4 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)
ML 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY
All-weather tires R 19
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheels and tires Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)
3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. 4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Wheel and tire combinations 435
Tires Alloywheels BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+S4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)
R 20
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+S4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm) BA: 265/45 R 20 108 H XL M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.24 in (57 mm)
Winter tires R 19
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm) BA: 225/50 R 19 103 W MOExtended3 BA: 8,5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2,44 in (62 mm)
BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheels and tires Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+SiMOExtended3 BA: 8.0 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL M+Si4 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm) BA: 255/50 R 19 107 H XL BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 M+SiMOExtended3, 4 Wheel offset: 2.32 in (59 mm)
4 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 3 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.
Z 436 Emergency spare wheel
ML 63 AMG 4MATIC
Summer tires R 20
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/45 ZR 20 108 Y XL4 BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)
R 21
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 295/35 ZR 21 107 Y XL4 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
Winter tires R 20
Tires Alloy wheels BA: 255/45 R 20 105 V XL M+Si BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 1.61 in (41 mm)
R 21
Tires Alloy wheels
Wheels and tires BA: 295/35 R 21 107 V XL M+Si4 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2 Wheel offset: 2.21 in (56 mm)
Emergency spare wheel To avoid hazardous situations: Important safety notes Radapt yourdriving style accordingly and drive carefully. G WARNING Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type emergency spare wheel that differs in size. of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare and the wheel to be replaced may differ. wheel of a different size briefly. Mounting an emergency spare wheel may Rdo not switch ESP® off. severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions as well as the tire type must be correct.
4 Use of snow chains not permitted.Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Emergency spare wheel 437
! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" Removing the emergency spare wheel emergency spare wheel: use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel only on the rear axle. If you mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to the brake system. If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The defective wheel on the front axle can then be replaced with the intact wheel from the rear Emergency spare wheel (example: vehicle without axle. lockable cargo compartment floor) Make sure to note the placard on the : "Minispare" emergency spare wheel "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. ; Emergency spare wheel retainer When using an emergency spare wheel or The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can spare wheel of a different size, you must not be found in the stowage well under the cargo exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph compartment floor. (80 km/h). X Lift the cargo compartment floor up Snow chains must not be mounted on (Y page 342). emergency spare wheels. X Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: remove the ball coupling stowage tray (Y page 255). General notes X Vehicles without alockable cargo Mounting the emergency spare wheel is compartment floor: turn emergency described under "Mounting a wheel" spare wheel retainer ; counter-clockwise Wheels and tires (Y page 422). and remove it. You should regularly check the pressure of X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior wheel :. to long trips, and correct the pressure as necessary (Y page 402). The applicable value can be found on the wheel or under "Technical data" (Y page 439). An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restriction on use as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel. Vehicles with a lockable cargo compartmentfloor : "Minispare" emergency spare wheel ; Stowage well
Z 438 Emergency spare wheel
X Vehicles with alockable cargo X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = on compartment floor: remove the contents tensioning straps ; in the cargo tie-down of stowage tray ;. rings. X Turn the central retaining screw of stowage X Tighten tensioning straps ; on both sides. tray ; and "Minispare" emergency spare For further information on changing and wheel : counter-clockwise and remove it. mounting a wheel, see (Y page 422). X Remove stowage well ;. X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel :.
In vehicles with a Bang &Olufsen sound system, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is stored in a bag. The bag is secured to the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment. X To remove the emergency spare Wheels and tires wheel: open the tailgate. X Loosen tensioning straps ; on both sides. X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and = on tensioning straps ; fromthe cargo tie- down rings. X Remove the bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. X Open the bag and remove the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel.
X To stow the emergency spare wheel: place the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel in the bag and close the bag. X Lay the bag with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel in the cargo compartment, with the carrying strap to the rear. Emergencyspare wheel 439
Technical data ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY
"Minispare"emergency spare wheel Tires Alloywheels T 155/90 R18 113 M 4.0 B x 18 H2 Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)
ML 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tires Alloy wheels T 155/90 R18 113 M 4.0 B x 18 H2 Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)
ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tires Alloy wheels T 155/90 R18 113 M 4.0 B x 18 H2 Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)
ML 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Wheels and tires
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tires Alloy wheels T 155/80 R19 114 M 4.5 B x 19 H2 Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)
ML 63 AMG
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel Tires Alloy wheels T 155/80 R19 114 M 4.5 B x 19 H2 Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm)
Z 440 441
Useful information ...... 442 Information regarding technical data ...... 442 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...... 442 Warranty ...... 442 Identification plates ...... 443 Service products and filling capaci- ties ...... 444 Vehicle data ...... 452 Trailer tow hitch ...... 454 Technical data 442 Warranty
Useful information ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and i This Operator's Manual describes all sensors for these restraint systems, may be models and all standard and optional installed in the following areas of your equipment of your vehicle available at the vehicle: time of publication of the Operator's Rdoors Manual. Country-specific differences are Rdoor pillars possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rdoor sills not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety- Rseats related systems and functions. Rcockpit i Read the information on qualified Rinstrument cluster R specialist workshops: (Y page 27). center console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out Information regarding technical data repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint i The data stated here specifically refers to systems. a vehicle with standard equipment.Consult Have aftermarket accessories installed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for a qualified specialist workshop. the data for all vehicle variants and trim Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to levels. strictquality control.Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benzvehicles and Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fine-tuned for them. Only genuine Mercedes- Benzparts should thereforebe used. WARNING G More than 300,000 different genuine Driving safety may be impaired if non- Mercedes-Benzparts are available for approved parts, tires and wheels or safety- Mercedes-Benzmodels. Technical data relevant accessories are used. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers This could lead to malfunctions in safety- maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. This parts for necessary service and repair work. could cause you to lose control of your vehicle In addition, strategically located parts and cause an accident. delivery centers provide quick and reliable For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommends parts service. that you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or Always specify the vehicle identification parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels number (VIN) (Y page 443) and the engine and accessories that have been specifically number (Y page 444) when ordering genuine approved for your vehicle. Mercedes-Benz parts.
H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major Warranty assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. They are covered by the Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the same Limited Warranty entitlements as new warranties printed in the Service and parts. Warranty Information booklet. Identification plates 443
Your authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island and VermontEmission Control System Warranty Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon ; Paint code Laws) = VIN Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i If you lose the Service and Warranty Information booklet, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
Identification plates Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Vehicle identification plate with ; Paint code vehicle identification number (VIN) = VIN i The data shownonthe vehicle
identification plate is used only as an Technical data example. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate.
X Open the driver's door. You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Z 444 Service products andfilling capacities
VIN Service products and filling capacities Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out X Openthe front right-hand door. of the reach of children. X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow and remove it. H Environmental note You will see the VIN. Dispose of service products in an The VIN can also be found in the following environmentally responsible manner. locations: Service products include the following: Ron the lower edge of the windshield Rfuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel) (Y page 444) Rexhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. Ron the vehicle identification plate DEF (Y page 443) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Rcoolant Engine number Rbrake fluid Rwindshield washer fluid Rclimate control system refrigerant Comply with all valid regulations with respect Technical data to handling, storing, and disposing of service fluids. Components and service products must be matched. You should therefore only use products that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Information on tested and approved products : Emission control information plate, can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- including the certification of both federal Benz Center or on the Internet at and Californian emissions standards http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. ; Engine number (stamped into the You can recognize service products approved crankcase) by Mercedes-Benzby the following = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) Service products and filling capacities 445
Other designations or recommendations Tank capacity indicate a level of quality or a specification in accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. Model Total MB 229.5). They have not necessarily been capacity approved by Mercedes-Benz. All models 24.6 US gal (93.0 l) Fuel Model Of which Important safety notes reserve G WARNING All models Approx. Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel 3.2 US gal incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and (12.0 l) explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating ML 63 AMG Approx. sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine 3.7 US gal and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before (14.0 l) refueling. Gasoline G WARNING Fuel grade Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the You must make sure that fuel does not come ignition if you accidentally refuel with the into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel the fuel system. Even small amounts of the vapors. Keep fuel away from children. wrong fuel could result in damage to the If you or others come into contact with fuel, fuel system and the engine. The repair observe the following: costs are high. Notify aqualified specialist RWash away fuel from skin immediately
workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel Technical data using soap and water. lines drained completely. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, ! You should only refuel with unleaded immediately rinse them thoroughly with premium-grade gasoline as thisavoids clean water. Seek medical assistance damaging the catalytic converter. without delay. If engine running problems are apparent, RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical have the cause checked immediately and assistance without delay.Donot induce repaired.Excess unburned fuel can vomiting. otherwise enter the catalytic converter, RImmediately change out of clothing which leading to overheating and possibly has come into contact with fuel. causing a fire. ! To ensure the longevity and full performance of the engine, only premium- grade unleaded gasoline may be used.
Z 446 Service products and filling capacities
If there is no premium-grade unleaded label on the pump, ask the staff for gasoline available and regular unleaded assistance. gasoline must be used, please observe the i For further information, consult a following precautions: qualified specialist workshop or on the Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest only). with premium-grade unleaded gasoline Information on refueling (Y page 174). as soon as possible. Rdo not drive at the maximum speed. Additives Ravoid sudden acceleration. ! Operating the engine with fuel additives Rif the vehicle is carrying a lightload, e.g. can increase wear and tear to the fuel two passengers without luggage, do not system high-pressure pump and lead to allow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm. contamination of the entire fuel system. Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being The repair costs are high. This does not operated in mountainous terrain, do not include additives for the removal and depress the accelerator pedal further prevention of residue buildup. gasoline than Ô of the pedal travel. must only be mixed with additives recommended by Mercedes-Benz. More Only refuel using premium-grade unleaded information about recommended additives gasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91. can be obtained from any authorized Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/or Mercedes-Benz Center. unleaded gasoline with additives can be used. One of the main problems of poor fuel quality The concentration of additives in the fuel, is the forming of deposits that are created however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.: during the gasoline combustion process. REthanol Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use RTAME branded fuels that have additives. RETBE If you use fuels without these additives over RIPA a longer period of time, carbon deposits may build up. These deposits form at the inlet
Technical data RTBA valves and in the combustion chamber in For MTBE, the concentration should not particular. exceed 15%. This could lead to engine problems, e.g.: The concentration of methanol in gasoline, including other additives, must not exceed Rlonger engine warm-up phase 3%. Runeven idle Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not Rengine noise permitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanol Rmisfiring and 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used. Rloss of power All of these blends must fulfill the fuel Carbon deposits may form if the availability requirements, e.g.: of gasoline with relevant additives is Rknock resistance insufficient (in certain regions). In this case, Rboiling point Mercedes-Benz recommends additives approved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles; Rvapor pressure see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. You will usually find information about the fuel For a list of approved products, consult an grade on the pump. If you cannot find the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Comply Service products and filling capacities 447 with the instructions for use on the product Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higher label. percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. This damage the engine and the fuel system. For causes unnecessary costs and could damage this reason, they are not approved. the engine. For more information, consult the gas station staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline Diesel pump mustclearly state that the standard for ULSDhas been fulfilled. If the label is not Fuel grade clear, do notrefuel the vehicle. G WARNING Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. pointis lower than that of pure diesel fuel. Information on refueling (Y page 174). When the engine is running, exhaust system Low outside temperatures components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline properties is available during the winter with diesel fuel. months. Further information about fuel properties can be obtained from oil ! Only use commercially available vehicular companies, e.g. at gas stations. ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, Flow improver 15 ppm maximum sulfur content) that meets the ASTM D975 standard. If you do To improve the low-temperature resistance of not refuel with ULSD, you may damage the diesel fuel, a flow improver can be attached. BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment The effectiveness of a flow improver is not system of the vehicle. guaranteed for every fuel. Only use flow improvers tested and approved ! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with by Mercedes-Benz. Duringuse, please a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel with observe the information on operation. gasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This may Correct dosage and sufficient mixing are otherwise result in damage to the fuel decisive in improving low-temperature system and engine. Technical data resistance with the flow improver. You will usually find information aboutthe fuel Overdosage can potentially even decrease grade on the pump. If you cannot find the low-temperature resistance and must label on the pump, ask the staff for therefore be avoided.Follow the assistance. manufacturer's guidelines on dosage. i For further information, consult a Mix the additive into the diesel in good time, qualified specialist workshop or on the before the flow characteristics of the diesel Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions only). can arise through heating the fuel system, e.g. through parking in a heated garage. Information on refueling (Y page 174). More information about recommended flow Bio-diesel -FAME (fattyacid methyl ester) improvers can be obtained from any qualified Mercedes-BenzUSA approves the use of bio- specialist workshop. diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may not exceed 5% by volume.
Z 448 Service products and filling capacities
Flexible Fuel vehicles Fuel consumption The energy content of E85 fuel is less than Important safety notes that of the same amount of premium-grade G WARNING gasoline. The amount of fuel consumed when Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel operating the vehicle with E85 fuel is incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and therefore higher than with premium-grade explosion. gasoline. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating Maintenance sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Informyour authorized Mercedes-Benz and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before Center that you are operating or have refueling. operated the vehicle with E85 fuel. G WARNING Low outside temperatures Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. If the outside temperature is below 32 ‡ There is a riskofinjury. (0 †) the starting procedure can take You must make sure thatfuel does notcome noticeably longer when operating with E85 into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing fuel. and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outside vapors. Keep fuel away from children. temperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †). If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: DEF RWash away fuel from skin immediately using soap and water. Important safety notes RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, Comply with the important safety notes for immediately rinse them thoroughly with service products when handling DEF clean water. Seek medical assistance (Y page 444). without delay. DEFis a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical gas aftertreatmentofdiesel engines.Itis:
Technical data assistance without delay. Do not induce vomiting. Rnot poisonous RImmediately change out of clothing which Rcolorless and odorless has come into contact with fuel. Rnot flammable When you open the DEF container, small Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueled with the amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. following fuel types: Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are Rpremium-grade unleaded gasoline particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous RE85 fuel membranes and to the eyes. You may Ra mixture of E85 fuel and premium-grade experience a burning sensation in your eyes, unleaded gasoline nose and throat. Coughing and watering of the eyes are possible. i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognized by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF inside of the fuel filler flap. tank only in well-ventilated areas. Service products and fillingcapacities 449
Low outside temperatures Engine oil DEF freezes at a temperature of General notes approximately 12 ‡(-11 †). The vehicleis delivered from the factory equipped with a ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a DEFpreheating system. Winter operation can specificationotherthan is necessary to thus be guaranteed even at temperatures fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do below 12 ‡ (-11 †). not change the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer replacement Additives intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage ! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. 22241. Do not use additives with DEF and Follow the instructions in the service do not dilute DEF with water. This may interval display regarding the oil change. destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas Otherwise, you may damage the engine and aftertreatment system. the exhaust gas aftertreatment. Purity Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling engine oil ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other (Y page 444). service products, cleaning agents or dust) The engine oils are matched to the lead to: performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and Rincreased emission values service intervals. You should therefore only Rdamage to the catalytic converter use engine oils and oil filters that are approved for vehicles with maintenance Rengine damage systems. Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, aftertreatment system consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly Center. Or visit the website important with respect to avoiding http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas The table shows which engine oils have been aftertreatment system. approved for your vehicle. Technical data If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during repair work, it must not be returned to Model Engine MB the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer model Approval be guaranteed. ML 350 276 229.5 BlueEFFICIENCY Filling capacities ML 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Model Total capacity ML 550 4MATIC 278 229.5 ML 350 BlueTEC 4MAT 7.3 US gal BlueEFFICIENCY IC (27.5 l) ML 63 AMG 157 229.5 ML 350 BlueTEC 642 228.51, 4MATIC 229.31, 229.51
Z 450 Service products and fillingcapacities
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity) for AMG vehicles. classification suitable for the prevailing outside temperatures. The table shows you i MB approval is indicated on the oil which SAE classifications are to be used. The containers. low-temperature characteristics of engine oils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a Filling capacities result of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is The following values refer to an oil change therefore strongly recommended that you including the oil filter. carry out regularoil changes using an approved engine oil with the appropriate SAE Model Capacity classification. ML 350 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) BlueEFFICIENCY Brake fluid ML 350 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY G WARNING ML 550 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture BlueEFFICIENCY fromthe air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake ML 63 AMG Without external oil fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the cooler: 9.0 US qt brake system when the brakes are applied (8.5 l) hard. This would impair braking efficiency. ML 350 BlueTEC 4 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) There is a risk of an accident. MATIC You should have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals.
Additives Comply with the important safety notes for ! Do not use any additives in the engine oil. service products when handling brake fluid This could damage the engine. (Y page 444). The brake fluid change intervals can be found
Technical data Engine oil viscosity in the Maintenance Booklet. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. Information about approved brake fluid can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop and have this confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, this means that it is thick; a low viscosity means that it is thin. Service products and filling capacities 451
Coolant The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentration in the engine cooling system Important safety notes should: G WARNING Rbe at least 50%. This will protectthe engine If antifreeze comes into contact with hot cooling system against freezing down to components in the engine compartment, it approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection Let the engine cool down before you add down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not will not be dissipated as effectively. spilled next to the fillerneck. Thoroughly If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal clean the antifreeze from components before amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion starting the engine. inhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ ! Only add coolant that has been premixed corrosion inhibitor concentrate in with the desired antifreeze protection.You accordance with MB Specifications for could otherwise damage the engine. Service Products 310.1. Further information on coolants can be The coolant is checked with every found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications maintenance interval at a qualified specialist for Service Products, MB Specifications for workshop. Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or filled with a coolant mixture that ensures contact a qualified specialist workshop. adequate antifreeze and corrosion protection. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures Filling capacities prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not Model Capacity sufficiently protected from corrosion and ML 350 overheating. Approx. 11.1 US qt BlueEFFICIENCY (10.5 l) Technical data Comply with the important safety precautions ML 350 4MATIC for service products when handling coolant BlueEFFICIENCY (Y page 444). The coolant is a mixture of water and ML 550 4MATIC Approx. 13.6 US qt antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs BlueEFFICIENCY (12.9 l) the following tasks: ML 63 AMG Approx. 12.4 US qt Rcorrosion protection (11.7 l) Rantifreeze protection ML 350 BlueTEC 4 Approx. 12.2 US qt Rraising the boiling point MATIC (11.5 l) If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion coolant during operation is approximately inhibitor/antifreeze. 266 ‡ (130 †).
Z 452 Vehicle data
Windshield washer system and At temperatures below freezing: headlamp cleaning system X Fill the washerfluid reservoir with a mixture Important safety notes of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit. G WARNING Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside Windshield washer concentrate is highly temperature. flammable. If it comes into contact with hot RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB engine components or the exhaust systemit WinterFit to 2 parts water. could ignite. There is a riskoffire and injury. RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB Make sure that no windshield washer WinterFit to 1 part water. concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for WinterFit to 1 part water. plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer could damage the plastic lenses of the fluid all year round. headlamps. ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to Filling capacities the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the level sensor may be damaged. Model Capacity ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit All models (except 5.5 US qt (5.2 l) washer fluid should be mixed together. The for AMG vehicles) spray nozzles may otherwise become AMG vehicles 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) blocked. Comply with the importantsafety notes for service products when handlingwasher fluid Vehicle data (Y page 444). At temperatures above freezing: General notes Technical data X Fill the washerfluid reservoir with a mixture Please note that for the specified vehicle of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. data: MB SummerFit. RThe heights specified may vary as a result Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 partswater. of: - tires - load - conditionofthe suspension - optional equipment Observe the information relating to level control:
RAIRMATIC package (Y page 210) RON&OFFROAD package (Y page 204) Vehicle data 453
Dimensions andweights All models (except for AMG vehicles) Maximum vehicle height 71.6 in (AIRMATIC package) (1818 mm) Maximum vehicle height 72.8 in (ON&OFFROAD package) (1848 mm) Minimum vehicle height 69.2 in (highway driving level) (1758 mm) Wheelbase 114.8 in (2915 mm) Models with: : ; Opening Max. Maximum ground 10.0 in clearance (AIRMATIC height headroom (255 mm) package) Steel 86.4 in 78.2 in Maximum ground 11.2 in suspension (2195 mm) (1987 mm) clearance (ON&OFFROAD (285 mm) AIRMATIC 84.3 in - 76.0 in - package) package 87.2 in 79.0 in Minimum ground 7.1 in (2140 mm - (1931 mm - clearance (180 mm) 2215 mm) 2006 mm) (AIRMATIC package) ON&OFFROAD 84.3 in - 76.0 in - (ON&OFFROAD package) package 88.4 in 80.2 in Ground clearance 8.0 in (2140 mm - (1931 mm - (steel suspension) (202 mm) 2245 mm) 2036 mm) Turning radius 38.7 ft
: ; (11.80 m) Technical data Opening Max. Maximum roof load 220 lb height headroom (100 kg) AMG vehicles 84.6 in - 76.3 in - 86.9 in 78.7 in ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY (2148 mm - (1938 mm - ML 350 4MATIC 2208 mm) 1998 mm) BlueEFFICIENCY ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC All models (exceptfor Vehicle length 189.1 in AMG vehicles) (4804 mm) Vehicle widthincluding 84.3 in exterior mirrors (2141 mm) Vehicle height 70.7 in (steel suspension) (1796 mm)
Z 454 Trailer tow hitch
ML 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Vehicle length 190.5 in (4839 mm)
ML 63 AMG Vehicle length 189.6 in (4817 mm) Vehicle width including 84.3 in exterior mirrors (2141 mm) Maximum vehicle height 71.3 in (1812 mm) Minimum vehicle height 69.0 in Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (1752 mm) (example) : Anchorage points Wheelbase 114.8 in ; Rearaxle centerline (2915 mm) Maximum ground 9.1 in clearance (231 mm) Minimum ground 6.7 in clearance (171 mm) Turning radius 38.7 ft (11.80 m) Maximum roof load 220 lb
Technical data (100 kg)
Trailer tow hitch Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system and drive train may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. Trailer tow hitch 455
Trailer loads Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loads Missing values were not availableattime of going to print. All models (except AMG vehicles and ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY) Permissible trailer load,unbraked Permissible trailer load, braked (at a 7198 lbs (3265 kg) minimumgradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) Maximum drawbar noseweight (the 575 lbs (261 kg) drawbar noseweight is notincluded in the trailer load) Permissible rear axle load when towing 3527 lbs (1600 kg) a trailer For model ML 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC: 3637 lbs (1650 kg)
ML 350 BlueEFFICIENCY Permissible trailer load, unbraked Permissible trailer load, braked (at a 6613 lbs (3000 kg) minimumgradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill) Maximum drawbar noseweight (the 529 lbs (240 kg) drawbar noseweight is notincluded in
the trailer load) Technical data Permissible rear axle load when towing 3527 lbs (1600 kg) a trailer
ML 63 AMG Permissible trailer load, unbraked 1653 lbs (750 kg) Permissible trailer load, braked (at a 7198 lbs (3265 kg) minimumgradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)
Z 456 Trailer tow hitch
ML 63 AMG Maximum drawbar noseweight (the 575 lbs (261 kg) drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load) Permissible rear axle load when towing 3637 lbs (1650 kg) a trailer
Ball position
Ball position of the ball coupling When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions stated in the illustration must not be exceeded. Technical data